JP2009273494A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of attaining a novel game while maintaining gaming performance in which determination about jackpot is carried out at one predetermined winning probability. <P>SOLUTION: The game machine has a first start opening 390, a second start opening 392, and a third start opening 394 acceptable game balls hit into a game zone. The lottery processing about jackpot is carried out at the predetermined one winning probability when game balls enter either one of the start openings. As the result, jackpot game providing a player with privilege is carried out when the jackpot is won. Here, the control mode before and after suspension and digestion of the game of the first start opening 390 side and the games of the second and third start openings 392, 394 sides are different according to the patterns appearing when jackpot is won. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2010,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  For example, as can be seen in Patent Document 1, a gaming machine is known in which a probability variation function can operate after a big hit game.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, a game ball is placed in either the first start opening that is always open or the second start opening that can be awarded only when the movable piece is opened and closed. It is determined whether or not there is a prize. And when there is a winning at any of these start openings, the jackpot is determined with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when the jackpot is won, a jackpot game in which a large amount of game balls are paid out to the player is performed. Note that this jackpot game is performed, for example, when a game in which the opening / closing device is opened in a predetermined pattern is a round game, and this round game is repeatedly executed, for example, “15” times.

After the jackpot game is performed in this manner, the lottery process for winning the jackpot is performed again on the condition that a winning is made to either the first start port or the second start port. However, at this time, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined one winning probability is changed to a higher probability until at least the next jackpot is won.
JP 2004-329448 A

  However, in recent years, such a conventional game in which only one predetermined winning probability is changed to a higher probability has been bored by players. Therefore, in any game at the first start port side and the second start port side, to realize a novel game by sacrificing the above-mentioned game using the predetermined one winning probability. However, this may complicate the calculation of the number of balls played as a single gaming machine.

  Accordingly, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and a gaming machine capable of realizing a novel game while maintaining the gameability in which the determination of the jackpot is performed with a predetermined winning probability. The purpose is to provide.

  In order to achieve such an object, according to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a first starting port capable of receiving a game ball driven into a game area, and a movable piece operable between an open state and a closed state. And, when the movable piece is in the closed state, a determination process for the big hit with a predetermined winning probability and a second starting port that makes it difficult to accept a game ball than the first starting port. The jackpot determination means to be performed, and the jackpot determination means performs a determination process for the jackpot, triggered by a game ball entering either the first start port or the second start port, and the determination process When the jackpot is determined, the game control means for performing a special game in which a privilege is given to the player and the symbol change on the predetermined display screen, and when the jackpot is determined, the determined Indicate Display control means for performing a special symbol display, wherein the game control means determines a symbol used for the special symbol display by the display control means when performing the special game based on the jackpot determination The display control means is a gaming machine that performs the special symbol display by using the symbols determined by the game control means, and the game control means is configured such that when a game ball enters the first start port. Holds the game on the first start port side by holding the determination process for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port until the execution condition is satisfied, and the second start When a game ball enters the mouth, the determination processing for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the second starting port is made to wait until the execution condition is satisfied. In the game holding means for holding the game on the second start port side and the special game based on the jackpot determination, the game on the first start port side is a postponement of the game on the second start port side. A first suppression symbol that suggests that the game is to be executed, and a second suppression symbol that indicates that the game on the second start port side is to be executed as a follow-up on the game on the first start port side Any one of the above, the symbol lottery means for determining as the symbol used for the special symbol display by the display control means, and the second starting port when the first suppression symbol is determined by the symbol lottery means As long as the game on the side is held, the first game suppression state in which only the game on the second start port side of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is executed The first game suppression system to control As long as the game on the first start port side is put on hold when the second suppression symbol is determined by the control means and the symbol lottery means, the game on the first start port side and the first A second game suppression control means for controlling to a second game suppression state in which only the first startup port side game is executed among the two startup port side games, and the first suppression symbol in the special symbol display The first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means after appearing and the second game suppression control means controlled by the second game suppression control means after the second suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display The gist of the invention is that it has superior / inferior impression control means capable of changing the predetermined one winning probability to a higher probability only in the first game suppression state among the second game suppression states.

In the above configuration, as a symbol used for special symbol display that appears on a predetermined display screen,
-A first suppression pattern that suggests that the game on the first start side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the second start side, and-The game on the second start side is on the first start side Prepare a second suppression symbol that suggests that the game will be executed later. In executing the special game, either the first suppression symbol or the second suppression symbol is determined (symbol lottery means).

  In other words, the first and second control relating to the suspension and digestion of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is performed in accordance with the symbol thus determined (the symbol used for symbol display). The player can recognize ahead of time for the above-described reservation and digestion only by looking at the types of symbols used for symbol display. Thereby, even if the advance and the turn related to the above-mentioned hold digestion are changed frequently, the player can appropriately perform the game corresponding to the advance and the stop related to the stop digestion without being confused. . For example, when the game on the first start port side is disadvantaged and the game on the second start port side is advantageous, the game on the second start port side is digested first. In the game suppression state, it is important to maintain the number of games held on the second start port side so that the disadvantaged first start port side game is not performed. The player can quickly respond to such a game and can play the game without suffering a loss.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means after the first suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display, and the second suppression in the special symbol display. Of the second game suppression state controlled by the second game suppression control means after the symbol appears, the predetermined one winning probability is changed to a higher probability only in the first game suppression state. It was possible (superior impression control means).

  That is, in this case, only when the first start opening side game execution is suppressed and only the second start opening side game is controlled to be executed in the first game suppression state, the predetermined one is determined. A setting change to a higher probability of winning can be expected. In other words, when the game is controlled to the second game suppression state in which the game execution on the second start port side is suppressed and only the game on the first start port side can be executed, the predetermined one win is selected. Changing the setting to a higher probability cannot be expected. Therefore, while maintaining the above-described gameability in which the determination on the jackpot is performed with the predetermined one winning probability in both the game on the first start side and the game on the second start side, Give the impression that the game at the first starting side is disadvantaged by a low winning probability, and give the impression that the game at the second starting side is favored by a high winning probability Will be able to.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened on one side of an outer frame of a pachinko machine and a front frame is opened on one side of the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the entire front side of the pachinko machine. In FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the decorative members in the game area are omitted.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, a front frame 4, a game board 5, and the like. The outer frame 2 is formed into a vertically long rectangular frame shape by upper, lower, left, and right wooden frame members, and has a lower receiving plate 6 that receives the lower surface of the main body frame 3 at the front lower portion of the outer frame 2. A main body frame 3 is attached to one side of the entire surface of the outer frame 2 by a hinge mechanism 7 so as to be opened and closed forward. The outer frame 2 may be formed of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

[About the frame structure]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the main frame of the pachinko machine and the game board separated from the front right and diagonally.

  The main body frame 3 is configured by integrally molding the front frame body 11, the game board mounting frame 12 and the mechanism mounting body 13 with a synthetic resin or the like. The front frame body 11 of the main body frame 3 is formed in a rectangular frame shape having a size corresponding to the outer shape excluding the support plate 6 on the front side of the outer frame 2 (see FIG. 1). A body frame side hinge device 15 is fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the front frame body 11, and hinge pins and hinge holes are provided to the outer frame side hinge device 14 fixed to the upper and lower portions of one side of the outer frame 2. It is mounted so that it can be opened and closed freely. That is, the hinge mechanism 7 is constituted by the outer frame side hinge device 14, the main body frame side hinge device 15, the hinge pin, and the hinge hole.

  On the front side of the front frame body 11, a speaker box portion 16 is integrally formed in the front lower left area of the front frame body 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, and is formed in the front opening portion of the speaker box portion 16. The speaker mounting plate 17 is mounted so as to close the opening. A speaker 18 is mounted on the speaker mounting plate 17.

  In the lower region of the front surface of the front frame 11, a firing rail 19 is attached to the upper half of the front frame 11 in an inclined manner. A lower front plate 30 is mounted on the lower half of the lower area of the front surface of the front frame 11. A lower tray 31 capable of storing game balls is provided at a substantially central portion of the front surface of the lower front plate 30, an operation handle 32 is provided on the right side, and an ashtray 33 is provided on the left side. . The lower plate 31 is provided with a ball discharge lever 34 for discharging the game ball downward.

[About front frame configuration]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. The front frame 4 is mounted on one side of the front surface of the front frame body 11 so as to cover a portion extending from the upper end of the front frame body 11 to the upper edge of the lower front plate 30 so as to be opened and closed forward by a hinge mechanism 36. Yes.

  A substantially circular opening window 38 through which the game area 37 of the game board 5 can be seen through from the front is formed at a substantially central portion of the front frame 4. A window frame 39 having a rectangular frame shape larger than the opening window 38 is provided on the rear side of the front frame 4, and a transparent plate 50 such as a glass plate or a transparent resin plate is attached to the window frame 39. A substantially entire front surface of the front frame 4 is decorated by a front decoration member in which a lamp or the like is provided, and an upper plate 51 is formed at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 4. Specifically, in the periphery of the opening window 38, side decoration devices 52 are mounted on the left and right sides, an upper plate 51 is mounted on the lower portion, and an acoustic lighting device 53 is mounted on the upper portion.

  The side decoration device 52 is mainly configured by a side decoration body 54 in which a lamp driving substrate is disposed and formed of a synthetic resin material. A plurality of slit-like opening holes that are long in the horizontal direction are arranged in the side decoration body 54 in the vertical direction, and a lens 55 corresponding to the light source disposed on the lamp driving substrate is incorporated in the opening hole. The acoustic illumination device 53 includes a transparent cover body 56, a speaker 57, a speaker cover 58, a reflector body (not shown), and the like, and these constituent members are assembled together to form a unit.

  An effect selection switch 60 is provided on the left side of the front surface of the upper plate 51. The effect selection switch 60 is configured to be pressed by the player himself. When the player depresses the effect selection switch 60, the player's intention can be reflected in the effect display on the effect display device 115 described later. It should be noted that a lever or a button may be used instead of the effect selection switch 60. Moreover, the voice input means which receives a player's voice may be sufficient. In other words, any device that reflects the player's intention is acceptable.

[About the configuration of the locking device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 3. A function of locking the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and a function of locking the front frame 4 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the free end side opposite to the hinge mechanism 36 of the front frame body 11 The locking device 70 having both of the above is mounted.

  That is, in this embodiment, the locking device 70 includes a plurality of upper and lower body frame locking hooks 72 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 71 provided on the outer frame 2 to lock the body frame 3 in a closed state, From the front of the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of upper and lower door locking hooks 74 that are detachably engaged with a closing tool 73 provided on the rear side of the free end side of the front frame 4 to lock the front frame 4 in a closed state. And a cylinder lock 75 exposed through the front frame body 11 and the lower front plate 30 so that the key can be inserted and unlocked. Then, a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 75 and rotated in one direction, so that the engagement between the main body frame locking hook 72 and the closing tool 71 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is unlocked. By rotating in the opposite direction, the engagement between the door locking hook 74 and the closing tool 73 of the front frame 4 is released and the front frame 4 is unlocked.

[About the structure of the game board mounting frame]
A description will be given with reference to FIGS. 1, 3 and 4. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3 is provided on the rear side of the front frame body 11 and the game board 5 is mounted so as to be attachable / detachable from the front. .

  The game board 5 is formed in a substantially square plate shape having a size to be fitted from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 (see FIG. 11). A guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 is provided on the board surface (front surface) of the game board 5, and a game area 37 is defined inside the guide rail 78.

  A predetermined gap is provided between the launch rail 19 and the guide rail 78, and when the launched game ball returns to the guide rail 78, the game ball is discharged from the gap. The lower plate 31 is guided.

  Further, a front structural member 79 made of synthetic resin is attached to the front surface of the game board 5 in the outer region of the guide rail 78.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, the lower part on the rear side of the game board 5 receives a game ball that has flowed into the various winning devices in a portion extending from the center part to the lower part, and serves as a collective bag for guiding the game ball to a predetermined position. A box mounting base 118 having both the above function and the function as a box mounting portion is provided.

  A sub-control board box 130 in which a sub-control board 119 such as a sound control board and a lamp control board is housed is mounted on the box mounting base 118, and is superposed on the rear side of the sub-control board box 130. A main control board box 132 in which the control board 131 is housed is mounted.

  Further, in a state where the box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132 are respectively mounted on the rear side of the game board 5, the game board 5 is moved from the front of the game board mounting frame 12 of the main body frame 3. The box mounting base 118, the sub control board box 130, and the main control board box 132 are arranged so as not to protrude outward from the outline of the game board 5 so that they can be fitted and installed.

[Configuration of body frame mechanism mounting body, ball tank and tank rail]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing the state in which various members are assembled to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right rear, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the main body frame from diagonally upper right rear.

  A tank mounting portion 133, a rail mounting portion 134, a dispensing device mounting portion 135, and the like are formed on the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3, and a ball tank 136 is mounted on the tank mounting portion 133.

  The ball tank 136 is made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and is formed in a box shape opening upward so that a large number of game balls supplied from the island facility can be stored. The storage state of the game balls in the ball tank 136 is visible through the rear side wall of the ball tank 136.

  In addition, a discharge port 138 for discharging a game ball is formed at the rear corner of the bottom plate portion 137 of the ball tank 136, and the bottom plate portion 137 is formed on an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the discharge port 138. .

  The mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3 is integrally formed with a rail mounting portion 134 so as to approach the tank mounting portion 133 downward, and the rail component 139 is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 so that the tank rail 150 is configured. That is, in this embodiment, the rail mounting portion 134 is formed in a state in which the upper lateral portion of the main body frame 3 is recessed by a predetermined depth, and the rear side wall of the recess is used as the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150. An inclined rail shelf 155 is formed along the lower edge of the concave portion so as to incline downward from one end (left side in FIG. 8) to the other end (right end in FIG. 8). An upward surface extending in the lateral direction of the rail shelf 155 is a rail receiving portion 158.

  The rail constituting member 139 that is mounted on the rail mounting portion 134 and constitutes the tank rail 150 includes a rear wall portion 152 that forms a rail passage between the rail mounting portion 134 and the front wall portion 151, and an inclined lower plate And a partition wall (both not shown) that project along the center in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate part and divide the rail passage into front and rear rows (in this embodiment, front and rear rows). It is formed in preparation.

  The rail constituting member 139 is attached to the rail attaching portion 134 by an appropriate attachment means, whereby the tank rail 150 having a plurality of front and rear rail passages is configured. Then, after the game balls discharged from the discharge port 138 of the ball tank 136 (dropped by its own weight) are received at one end of the rail passages in the front and rear rows of the tank rail 150, the game balls are moved along the rail passage by their own weight. And rolling toward the other end of the rail passage.

  Further, in this embodiment, the rail component member 139 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material, whereby the flow state of the game balls in the rail passage is visually recognized through the rear wall portion 152 of the rail component member 139. It is possible.

  The front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150 (rail mounting portion 134) has a first space portion in order to avoid interference with the rear upper end portion of equipment (for example, the center accessory 300) that protrudes to the rear side of the game board 5. It is provided in a separated state.

  In this embodiment, the rear end of the rail shelf 155 serving as the rear end portion of the main body frame 3 and the rear wall portion of the tank rail 150 are substantially flush with the rear side wall of the ball tank 136. In other words, the tank rail 150 is arranged rearwardly from the rear surface of the game board 5 until the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136 is substantially flush with the rear wall portion of the ball tank 136. Thus, a first space portion for avoiding interference with the rear portion of the center accessory 300 is provided between the rear side of the game board 5 and the front wall portion 151 of the tank rail 150.

  Above the tank rail 150, a rectifier 156 for aligning the game balls flowing in the rail passage without overlapping each other is mounted on the upper portion thereof so as to be swingable about the shaft 157. The rectifier 156 is provided with a weight from the center to the bottom.

[Configuration of payout device mounting part and ball payout device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. A vertically long paying device mounting portion 135 corresponding to a ball paying device (ball paying unit) 170 described below is formed in the vertical direction of one side of the mechanism mounting body 13 of the main body frame 3. The dispensing device mounting portion 135 is formed in a concave shape having an opening on the rear side.

  In addition, an opening 173 through which a payout motor 172 (see FIG. 3) of the ball payout device 170 can project is formed at a predetermined position of a back wall portion (not shown) having a stepped shape of the payout device mounting portion 135. Yes.

  In a state where the ball paying device 170 is mounted in the recess of the paying device mounting portion 135, a second space portion is provided between the game board 5 and the first space portion, which is at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction. . Thus, the rail passage and the ball passage are arranged at substantially the same level in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the rear end of the body frame 3, that is, the rear end of the peripheral wall portion of the dispensing device mounting portion 135, the rear end of the rail shelf 155, the rear surfaces of the ball tank 136, the tank rail 150, and the ball dispensing device 170 are substantially the same surface. There is no.

  The ball payout device 170 has a vertically long box shape that is substantially the same size as the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135, and is unitized by mounting various parts related to payout.

  The ball payout device 170 is fitted from the rear opening of the recess of the payout device mounting portion 135 and is mounted by appropriate mounting means (for example, mounting means such as an elastic clip, a locking claw, and a screw). ing.

  Although not shown, the ball dispensing device 170 is formed by dividing the ball passages having inflow ports respectively communicating with the outlets of the rail passages in the tank rail 150 into a plurality of front and rear rows (for example, front and rear rows). Further, the downstream portions of the front and rear rows of ball passages formed in the interior are bifurcated to form front and rear rows of award balls, a ball rental ball passage, and a ball removal ball passage. A payout member (not shown) made of a rotating body for distributing and paying out game balls to any of the passages is rotated in the forward and reverse directions at the branch portion between the winning ball and the ball passage for lending and the ball passage for ball removal. It is arranged to be possible.

[Equipment on the lower rear of the main frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. On the rear side of the front frame 11 of the main body frame 3, on one side (left side in FIG. 4) of the rear lower region of the front frame 11 positioned below the game board mounting frame 12, A launching device unit in which a launching hammer (not shown) for launching a game ball sent to the launching position of the tilted end, a launching motor 192 for differentially launching the launching hammer, and the like are assembled to the mounting substrate 193 and unitized. 194 is installed.

  A power supply board box 196 for receiving the power supply board 195 is mounted at a substantially central portion of the rear lower region of the front frame body 11, and the dispensing control board 197 is received in a state of being superimposed on the rear side of the power supply board box 196. A payout control board box 198 is mounted.

  The payout control board 197 includes a RAM for storing the number of game balls to be paid out, and transmits a control signal for paying out game balls in accordance with a payout signal transmitted from the main control board 131 to a relay circuit board (not shown). Thus, the operation of the payout motor 172 is controlled.

[Configuration of rear cover body]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the entire rear side of the pachinko machine from the upper right rear.

  The rear end portions of the display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) and the main control board box 132 arranged on the rear surface of the game board 5 project toward the window opening portion opened in the center portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. .

  Between the side wall portion constituting one side wall of the window opening portion of the mechanism mounting body 13 and the one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135 constituting the other end wall, an opaque synthetic resin material is formed into a substantially square box shape. Then, the rear cover body 210 is detachably mounted by a cover hinge mechanism 211.

  The rear cover body 210 is configured integrally with a substantially rectangular rear wall portion 212 and a peripheral wall portion 213 that protrudes forward from the outer peripheral edge of the rear wall portion 212. Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the one side wall portion 213 a is respectively viewed from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 formed at a total of three locations above and below the rear wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. A hinge body 216 having a hinge pin 215 that is detachably fitted downward is integrally formed.

  Further, of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, the other wall portion 213b has a locking claw that can be elastically engaged with a locking hole formed in one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. An elastic closing body 217 is integrally formed.

  That is, in the rear cover body 210, the hinge pins 215 of the upper and lower and intermediate hinge bodies 216 are respectively fitted from above the hinge holes of the hinge body 214 of the side wall portion of the mechanism mounting body 13. In this state, the rear cover body 210 is rotated toward the other side of the mechanism mounting body 13 around the hinge pin 215, and the elastic closing body 217 is inserted into the locking hole on one side wall of the dispensing device mounting portion 135. The rear cover body 210 is held in the closed state on the rear side of the mechanism mounting body 13 by being elastically engaged. Then, the rear cover body 210 covers the entire display device control board box 117 (see FIG. 9) on the rear surface of the game board 5 and a portion extending from the substantially middle portion to the upper end of the main control board box 132 by the rear cover body 210. ing. As a result, the board connector of the main control board 131 exposed at the upper part of the main control board box 132 (mainly a board connector for connecting to the display device control board 116) is hidden from view from behind.

  Further, a portion from the substantially middle portion to the lower end of the main control board box 132 is exposed without being covered by the rear cover body 210. The inspection connector 218 disposed on the main control board 131 is exposed below the main control board box 132, and the inspection connector on the main control board 131 is closed with the rear cover body 210 closed. A board inspection device (not shown) can be connected to the connector 218 for inspection.

  A large number of heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233 are provided in the rear cover body 210, and internal heat is released from these many heat radiation holes 230, 231, 232, and 233. . In this embodiment, the rear cover body 210 is provided with a large number of slit-like heat radiation holes 230 extending from the peripheral wall portion 213 to the rear wall portion 212, and from the substantially middle height position of the rear wall portion 212 to the upper portion. A large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 231 are penetrated, and a large number of elliptical, elliptical, etc. heat radiation holes 232 and a predetermined number of horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 are penetrated below the rear wall 212. Has been.

  Further, the horizontally elongated rectangular heat radiation holes 233 have a size corresponding to the size and arrangement position of the plurality of parallel seal portions 235 sealed by the seal screws (sealing members) of the main control board box 132. It penetrates the position. As a result, even when the opaque rear cover body 210 is closed, the plurality of parallel sealing portions 235 of the main control board box 132 are exposed so as to be visible at the portion of the heat radiation hole 233. For this reason, even when the rear cover body 210 is closed, the sealing state of the sealing portion 235 of the main control board box 132 can be easily visually confirmed. Further, since the opaque synthetic resin material can be easily used as a synthetic resin material that is recycled compared to the transparent synthetic resin material, the rear cover body 210 can be manufactured at low cost.

  Of the peripheral wall portion 213 of the rear cover body 210, a predetermined position (two places on the left and right in this embodiment) of the upper wall portion 213c is substantially C-shaped to hold a power cord (not shown) in an appropriately folded state. An elastically deformable cord holder 237 extends toward the rear wall surface of the upper tank rail 150 (the rear wall surface of the rail component 139). A knob for removing the power cord by elastically deforming the cord holder 237 is formed at the tip of the cord holder 237.

  One end of the power cord is detachably connected to the board connector 239 of the distribution board 238, and the power plug at the other end is inserted into a power outlet. As described above, by forming the cord holding body 237 integrally with the rear cover body 210 and holding the power cord, the power cord hangs when the pachinko machine 1 is transported and stored, and it becomes an obstacle to foreign matter. The trouble which is caught can be prevented.

[About the configuration of ball derivatives etc. for the lower pan of the rear lower part of the main body frame]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 6. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the rear cover body and various control boards are removed from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

  A lower dish ball derivative 253 is attached to the other side portion (the hinge portion) of the rear lower region of the main body frame 3 in the recessed portion of the rear step portion of the speaker box portion 16. The lower tray ball derivative 253 is used when the game balls paid out to the upper plate 51 through the upper plate connecting path (not shown) from the winning and rental ball passages of the ball dispensing device 170 are full. The game ball on the upper plate communication path is for guiding the game ball to the lower plate 31.

  In this embodiment, a board box 254 that houses the interface board 252 is mounted on the outer surface of the rear wall of the lower dish ball derivative 253. The interface board 252 is interposed between the ball rental machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 197, and transmits / receives a signal related to ball rental between the ball rental machine and the payout control board 197. Electrical connection is possible.

[About the configuration of the game board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a configuration of a game board having a game area. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the front. FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the front. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the game board disassembled for each major component and shown obliquely from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the game board 5 has a substantially circular game area forming wall 80 that forms the game area 37. Inside the game area forming wall 80 (on the game area 37 side) and on the left side, a guide rail 78 including an outer rail 76 and an inner rail 77 for guiding the game ball to the game area 37 is provided. A game ball launched from the launcher unit 194 (see FIG. 7) is driven toward the game area 37 along the guide rail.

  In the center of the game area 37, a center accessory 300 is arranged. The center accessory 300 has a size that occupies more than two-thirds of the width direction of the game area 37. The center accessory 300 has a substantially rectangular opening 301, and an effect display device 115 is disposed in the opening 301. The center accessory 300 has a frame-shaped decorative body 370, and the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is provided along the opening edge of the opening 301.

  A first start port 390 capable of receiving a game ball driven toward the game area 37 is disposed below the center combination 300. Below the first start port 390, a third start port 394 having a pair of movable pieces 396 (the second start port will be described later) is disposed. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, the third start port 394 is unable or impossible to receive the game ball. When the pair of movable pieces 396 is in the open state, It becomes easier to accept a game ball than the one start port 390. Note that the pair of movable pieces 396 illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 11 are represented by solid lines in both the open state and the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, “downward” means the downstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction, and “upward” means the upstream side of the game ball in the downflow direction.

  An opening 372 is formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 directly above the first start port 390.

  An opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upper part of the center accessory 300. The effect opening / closing device 398 includes an effect large winning opening 398a and an effect large winning opening opening / closing door 398b provided corresponding to the effect large winning opening 398a.

  The stage winning prize opening 398a is an open area where a game ball can be received. Specifically, from the player in six directions around the upper side, the lower side, the left side, the right side, the near side, and the back side. This is an area in which openings are formed on the front side and the upper side as viewed, and walls are formed on the left side, the right side, the lower side, and the rear side. The opening on the near side from the player is closed by a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the game ball received in the large prize winning opening 398a for performance. On the other hand, the upper opening portion is configured to be freely opened and closed by an effect grand prize opening opening / closing door 398b described later. Further, the back wall is made of a transparent member that can transmit light, and behind this transparent member is provided an effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 that can emit light by switching between red and green. Yes. That is, the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 can be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398.

  The stage prize winning opening / closing door 398b switches the opening on the upper side of the stage prize winning opening 398a between an open state in which the game ball can be received and a closed state in which the game ball cannot be received or difficult. It is a member. Specifically, it is a movable piece made of a rectangular flat plate configured to be able to be inserted and removed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5 (that is, the front-rear direction). When the player protrudes from the board surface of the game board 5 as viewed from the player side, the upper opening is closed and when the board is retracted to the board surface side of the game board 5 (in this embodiment, the board surface of the game board 5 is used for production. When the big prize opening opening / closing door 398b is substantially flush), the upper opening is opened. Thus, the stage opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 can be saved by arranging the stage winning prize opening / closing door 398 b to be freely inserted and removed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 5. It can be made into a space. In recent years, in order to increase the interest of the game related to the production, the production display device 115 has been enlarged. Therefore, it is necessary to efficiently provide each member in the game area 37, and the effect is remarkable. In particular, in this embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the hit jack game opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the area of the effect opening / closing device 398 occupying the game area 37 is reduced. The effect by is tremendous.

  In addition, when the stage winning prize opening 398a is in the closed state, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 37 and collided with the flat portion of the stage winning prize opening / closing door 398b is the stage winning prize opening opening / closing door 398b. An impact is given to the flat part of. However, in the present embodiment, since the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided above the effect display device 115, compared to the case where the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided below the first start port 390, The impact of the game ball on the flat surface of the effect opening / closing device 398 is reduced. This is because the game ball thrown toward the game area 37 is accelerated by gravity, so that the direction in which the production-use grand prize opening / closing door 398b is provided further upward is the plane of the production-use grand prize opening / closing door 398b. This is because the speed of the game ball when colliding with the part is small.

  In the present embodiment, the effect large winning opening opening / closing door 398b is configured to be freely put in and out in a direction substantially perpendicular to the surface of the game board 5, but is not limited thereto, and the effect opening / closing for the game area 37 is occupied. As long as the area of the device 398 can be saved, the directions may intersect.

  In the present embodiment, the “front-rear direction” means a direction orthogonal to the surface of the game board 5, that is, a front-rear direction viewed from the player.

  A jackpot gaming opening / closing device is provided between the first start port 390 and the ball discharge port 406, specifically below the third start port 394 and above the ball discharge port 406 (directly above in the present embodiment). 400 is provided. The effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 constitute an opening / closing device 397. The jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 includes a jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a and a jackpot gaming big prize opening opening / closing door 400b provided corresponding to the jackpot gaming big prize opening 400a. The jackpot game grand prize winning port 400a is an opening through which a game ball can be received. The jackpot gaming prize winning opening / closing door 400b is a member for switching the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a between an open state in which a game ball can be received and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be received or difficult. is there. It should be noted that when the big hit game winning prize opening 400a is in the closed state, it is not necessarily limited to the fact that it is impossible to accept the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37, and it is difficult, preferably extremely difficult. There may be.

  A passing gate 402 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the center accessory 300, and three lower left corners (on the left side of the first start port 390 and the third start port 394) of the center accessory 300. One general winning opening 404 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the “left side” means the left side as viewed from the player.

  The game balls that have not won any of the start openings 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, and the general winning opening 404 are most downstream in the flow direction of the game balls. A ball discharge port 406 for discharging behind the board 5 is formed. That is, each of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the effect opening / closing device 398, the jackpot game opening / closing device 400, and the general winning port 404 provided upstream of the ball discharge port 406 in the flow direction of the game ball. The game balls that have not won the prize flow down toward the ball discharge port 406.

  The jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is disposed immediately above the ball discharge port 406. As a result, during the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, game balls that have not won any of the start ports 390, 392, 394, the production opening / closing device 398 and the general winning opening 404 are the jackpot gaming opening / closing device. Since it gathers in the vicinity of 400, it can have a sense of expectation of winning a prize.

  On the lower right of the center object 300, a first special symbol display 84 for displaying a lottery result by a first special symbol lottery means 700, which will be described later, and a second special symbol for displaying a lottery result by a second special symbol lottery means 710. A first special display for displaying the number of holdings of lottery processing by the display 86 and the first special symbol lottery means 700 (hereinafter also referred to as the number of holdings of the first special symbol or the number of holdings of the start memory of the first special symbol). Displays the number of lottery processes held by the symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the number of second special symbols or the number of reserved start of second special symbols). A second special symbol hold indicator 90 is provided. Also, a normal symbol display 82 for displaying the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720 and a normal symbol hold indicator 92 for displaying the number of lotteries held by the normal symbol lottery means 720 are provided.

  Each of these indicators 82, 84, 86, 88, 90, 92 is constituted by, for example, an LED, and the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the second special symbol lottery means, depending on the lighting state of this LED. The lottery result by 710, the lottery result by the normal symbol lottery means 720, the holding number of lottery processing by the first special symbol lottery means 700, the holding number of lottery processing by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 The number of holds will be notified.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, “the number of lottery process suspensions” means that the determination process for determining whether or not the acquired randomness for success determination is correct, but the determination process for determining whether or not the acquired randomness for determination is correct, This is not limited to this, but it may be the number of the determination random numbers for which determination is made and the acquisition determination random numbers are reserved.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 88 and the second special symbol hold indicator 90 may be the number of lottery results displayed in place of the lottery processing hold number display. In other words, although it is determined whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is obtained and whether or not the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired, the determination result is not displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. , The number of such hold may be displayed.

  When the game board 5 of this embodiment is disassembled for each major component, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, from the front side, the front component member 79 including the guide rail 78 and the frame-shaped center accessory 300 are provided. A jackpot game opening / closing device 400, a third start opening 394, and a general winning opening 404, a side opening member 262 including a passing gate 402, a center accessory 300, a winning opening from the front side. A plate-like game board base 266 having a plurality of appropriately sized through holes 264 for attaching the unit 260 and the side decoration member 262, and a back having a frame-like opening attached to the rear side of the game board base 266. A unit 270, an effect display device 115 fixed to the back unit 270 so as to close the opening of the back unit 270 from the rear side, and a lower side of the back unit 270 An outlet port passage that is disposed and attached to the rear side of the game board base 266, supports the sub control board box 130 and the main control board box 132, and discharges the game balls that are driven into the game area 37 from the game board 5. And a substrate box holder 268 having a main body.

[About the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd stages in the center role]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the center accessory 300 includes a first shelf (hereinafter referred to as “first stage 330”) and a game ball in the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. It has the 2nd shelf part (henceforth "the 2nd stage 350") arrange | positioned downstream from the 1st stage 330 about the flow-down direction. The position where the second stage 350 is disposed is on the opposite side of the effect display device 115 with respect to the first stage 330 (that is, the front (player) side).

  A first stage guiding path for guiding a flowing game ball to the first stage 330 in the vicinity of the substantially vertical center of the left frame 370 b of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 (that is, the side of the frame-shaped decorative body 370). (Hereinafter referred to as "first warp 316") is provided with a first warp inlet 306 that can be received.

  Also, below the first warp inlet 306, a second warp inlet 308 that can be received in a second stage guide path (hereinafter referred to as “second warp 318”) is juxtaposed with the first warp inlet 306. Yes.

  Below the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308, a first warp guide piece (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball to the second warp inlet 308, respectively. A second warp guide piece 310 is provided. The second warp guide piece 310 protrudes from the frame-shaped decorative body 370 toward the left (that is, from the center accessory 300 to the game area 37). Thereby, the second warp inlet 308 is easier to guide the game ball than the first warp inlet 306. Therefore, even if the game ball is not guided to the first warp inlet 306, the expectation of being accepted at the second warp inlet 308 is increased, and the interest is enhanced.

  The first stage 330 has a curved surface formed in a wave shape from the first warp outlet side end 336 to the first warp opposite outlet side end 338. Specifically, a mountain portion 332 that swells upward is formed at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the first stage 330, and a valley portion continuously connected to the mountain portion 332 is formed on the left and right sides of the mountain portion 332. 334 is formed.

  In addition, the height of the peak portion 332 is lower than the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the first warp outlet 312 can get over the mountain portion 332, and reciprocates between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338. Can roll.

  A hill portion 352 is formed at a substantially central portion of the second stage 350. The elevated part 352 is located in front of the peak part 332 of the first stage 330. The second stage 350 has a curved portion 354 having a curved surface formed from the second warp outlet side end portion 356 to the elevated portion 352 in addition to the elevated portion 352. Moreover, it has the curved part 354 in which the curved surface was formed from the 2nd warp opposite exit side edge part 358 to the high platform part 352. FIG. These curved portions 354 are curved below the hill portion 352.

  The height of the hill portion 352 is lower than the second warp outlet side end 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end 358. Thereby, the game ball discharged from the second warp outlet 314 can get over the hill part 352 and reciprocate between the second warp outlet side end part 356 and the second warp counter-exit side end part 358. Can roll.

  The game balls received in the first warp inlet 306 and the second warp inlet 308 are discharged from the first warp outlet 312 and the second warp outlet 314, respectively, and are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  Note that the direction in which the game ball flows down in the first warp 316 and the direction in which the game ball rolls in the first stage 330 are substantially collinear, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 has little loss of kinetic energy. . That is, if the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 changes its traveling direction, kinetic energy is lost. Accordingly, the game ball that has flowed down the first warp 316 rolls on the first stage 330 vigorously. Similarly, since the flow direction of the game ball in the second warp 318 and the rolling direction of the game ball in the second stage 350 are substantially on the same line, the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 also has a loss of kinetic energy. Few. As a result, both the game ball guided to the first stage 330 and the game ball guided to the second stage 350 roll vigorously on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, and on each stage. The time spent staying at 330 and 350 becomes longer, and as a result, the game balls play at the respective stages 330 and 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is not guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 from the right side of the center accessory 300. That is, since the game balls are guided only from the left side of the center accessory 300 to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, the game balls rolling on the first stage 330 and the second stage 350 are viewed from opposite directions. Rolling is not inhibited by the guided game ball. As a result, the time spent on each stage 330, 350 is lengthened, and as a result, the game ball plays in each stage 330, 350, and the interest is enhanced.

  In the vicinity of the lower frame 370 a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 and between the effect display device 115 and the first stage 330, a center electrical decoration unit 302 adjacent to the effect display device 115 is formed. A shelf-like curved surface is formed in the center electrical decoration portion 302 along the width direction of the center accessory 300, and a plurality of center decoration lamps 304 are arranged on the curved surface.

  A second start port 392 that can receive a game ball is formed at a position that is substantially in the center in the left-right direction of the center illumination part 302 and that corresponds to the mountain part 332 of the first stage 330. That is, the second start port 392 is provided not in the second stage 350 side, which is the flow-down direction of the game ball, but in the opposite direction (rear side of the first stage 330). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392. This is because the second stage 350 is formed below the first stage 330 and a stage partition wall 364 described later is provided between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350.

  In addition, a second start guide port 340 for guiding a game ball to the second start port 392 is formed in the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330. The second start guide port 340 is inclined downward from the peak portion 332 to the second start port 392, so that the game ball is guided to the second start port 392. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to roll in the vicinity of the mountain portion 332, the second starting guide port 340 is easily guided to the second starting port 392.

  The game ball that has won the second starting port 392 is discharged to the back of the game board 5 through a discharge path (not shown) communicating with the back of the game board 5.

  A first stage inclined groove 342 for allowing the second stage 350 to flow down the game ball is formed in the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330. The first stage inclined groove 342 is inclined downward from the trough 334 to the second stage 350 (that is, from the rear to the front), so that the game ball is guided to the second stage 350. It has become. Therefore, when the game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not have the momentum to climb over the mountain portion 332, it is easily guided to the second stage 350 by the first stage inclined groove 342. The game ball that has lost its momentum to reciprocate between the first warp outlet side end 336 and the first warp counter-exit side end 338 wins the third starting port 394 from the mountain portion 332. The possibility of being guided from the valley 334 to the second stage 350 is much higher than the possibility.

  Between the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, a thin plate-like stage partition wall 364 for partitioning the stages 330 and 350 is provided. The stage partition wall 364 is disposed so as to protrude upward from the surface on the first stage 330, so that a game ball rolling on the first stage 330 does not flow down to the second stage 350. It has become. However, a communication portion 366 that connects the first stage 330 (specifically, the valley portion 334) and the second stage 350 is formed at a position corresponding to the valley portion 334 of the first stage 330 of the stage partition wall 364. ing. The game balls that have lost the momentum to roll to the left and right near the communication portion 366 flow down from the first stage 330 to the second stage 350 through the communication portion 366.

  A first start port guide path 374 is provided at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction of the second stage 350 (that is, a portion corresponding to the mountain portion 332 of the first stage 330) and a position corresponding to the hill portion 352. A first start guide port 368 communicating with an opening 372 formed in the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 is formed. In other words, the first start guide port 368 is provided not in the flow-down direction side of the game ball but in the opposite direction (the rear side of the second stage 350). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize that the game ball is received in the first start guide port 368.

  The game ball guided to the first start guide port 368 passes through the first start port guide path 374 and is discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5. Here, since the first start port guide path 374 is formed so as to guide the game ball to a position directly above the first start port 390, the first start port guide path 374 is guided to the first start port guide path 374 and discharged to the game board 5 surface side. The expectation that the played game ball wins the first start opening 390 becomes very large. However, a nail (not shown) is disposed directly above the first start port 390, and this nail may inhibit the winning of the game ball to the first start port 390. Therefore, the probability that the game ball discharged from the opening 372 onto the game board 5 through the first start port guiding path 374 wins the first start port 390 is about one fourth to three fourths. Become.

  The substantially central portion of the hill portion 352 in the left-right direction corresponds to the position of the first start guide port 368 and is downward from both ends of the hill portion 352 to the substantially center portion (that is, toward the first start guide port 368 side). It has the inclination part 353 which inclines to. In addition, a front inclined groove 360 for guiding a game ball to a later-described third shelf (hereinafter referred to as “third stage 376”) is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352. Further, a first start guide opening guide groove 362 for guiding the game ball to the first start guide opening 368 is further formed inside the front inclined groove 360. That is, a front inclined groove 360 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, and further inclined downward from the front to the rear in the front inclined groove 360. Thus, the first start guide opening guide groove 362 is formed. Thereby, the game ball that has lost the momentum to roll to the left and right in the vicinity of the front inclined groove 360 is guided to the first start guide opening 368 along the first start guide opening guide groove 362 and to the front inclined groove 360. Along the third stage 376 in some cases.

  Further, a third stage 376 having a curved surface so as to draw an arc in the left-right direction is formed on the lower frame 370a of the frame-shaped decorative body 370. The game ball can roll on the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. A front guide groove 378 that is inclined downward from the rear to the front is formed in a substantially central portion of the third stage 376 in the left-right direction. The game ball that has lost the momentum to roll from side to side in the vicinity of the front guide groove 378 flows down on the game board 5 along the front guide groove 378.

  As described above, since the first start guide port guide groove 362 is formed in the substantially central portion of the hill portion 352, the expectation that the game ball is guided to the first start guide port 368 is from the mountain portion 332 to the second start. This is much higher than the expectation for winning the mouth 392. In addition, only the game balls received from the first warp inlet 306 into the center character 300 can be won at the second start opening 392, while the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp can be won at the first start opening 390. Not only the game balls received from the entrance 308 into the center combination 300 but also the game balls flowing down the left side of the center combination 300 may be guided by the nail and win the first starting port 390. Thus, the probability that a game ball wins the first start port 390 is higher than the probability that the game ball wins the second start port 392.

[About the first and second warps and the light transmitting member in the center role]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a perspective view showing the game board obliquely from the front, and is a perspective view in which the first warp and the second warp are made visible by removing the decorative cover. FIG. 15 is a perspective view showing a configuration around the first warp and the second warp. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a positional relationship between the light transmitting member and the first and second warps. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view showing the configuration of the light transmitting member at a position different from that in FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view including the light transmissive member according to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the 1st warp 316 and the 2nd warp 318 are divided and formed mutually. That is, a game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 flows down only the first warp 316, and a game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 flows down only the second warp 318. Thereby, the game ball taken in from the first warp inlet 306 and the game ball taken in from the second warp inlet 308 are guided to the first stage 330 and the second stage 350, respectively, without interfering with each other.

  Further, each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 is made of a transparent member so that a game ball flowing down inside can be visually recognized. Thereby, the game ball received from the 1st warp entrance 306 or the 2nd warp entrance 308 can be visually recognized. That is, in the past, the player is often attracted attention to the center character 300 and the effect display device 115, and thus misses that the game ball has been received at the first warp entrance 306 or the second warp entrance 308. In many cases, the interest was reduced. Therefore, by using the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 as transparent members, even if the player has missed that the game ball has been received at the first warp inlet 306 or the second warp inlet 308, the first warp Since the game balls flowing down 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are adjacent to each other and provided along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300 so that the second warp 318 is on the front side. Thereby, even if it is a narrow space, both can be arranged efficiently.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, an effect light source 380 is arranged behind the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. The light source 380 includes a base 382 and a plurality of LEDs 384, and the plurality of LEDs 384 are arranged on the base 382. The light source 380 (base 382 and LED 384), the decorative cover 386, and the light transmitting member 388 constitute an electric decoration member 379.

  The light emitted from the light source 380 enters the light transmission member 388, passes through the light transmission member 388 along the plane portion 388a, and is guided to the front of the game board 5. The light transmitting member 388 is a curved plate-like member and is made of a resin such as a transparent plastic. The light transmitting member 388 has a flat portion 388a and an end portion 388b intersecting the flat portion 388a. The light transmitting member 388 is disposed such that the end portion 388b is on the front side (player side).

  The first warp 316, the second warp 318, and the light transmission member 388 are covered with a colored non-transparent decorative cover 386. Since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is guided to the decorative cover 386, the front portion of the decorative cover 386 emits light. As described above, the light transmission member 388 can guide the light emitted from the light source 380 forward to emit light linearly. In addition, since the light transmitting member 388 can guide light forward by the length in the width direction of the flat portion 388a, the degree of freedom of the position where the light source 380 is arranged is increased.

  In addition, since the decorative cover 386 is colored, it is difficult to visually recognize the first warp 316 and the second warp 318. Accordingly, the first warp visual recognition hole 386a and the second warp so that the game ball flowing down the second warp 318 can be visually recognized on the front surface of the decorative cover 386 so that the game ball flowing down the first warp 316 can be visually recognized. A visual recognition hole 386b is formed. Thereby, while being able to perform the effect by the colored light, the game balls flowing down the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be visually recognized, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 16, the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are attached along the flat portion 388 a of the light transmission member 388. Here, since the light emitted from the light source 380 is guided forward from the end portion 388b of the light transmitting member 388, the path through which the game ball flows can be easily grasped by the light emitted from the light source 380.

  In addition, since the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 are disposed adjacent to each other in the front-rear direction, the first light warp 316 and the second warp 318 are not provided with the light source 380 and the light transmission member 388, respectively. The game balls flowing down each of the first warp 316 and the second warp 318 can be grasped.

  Further, since the light transmitted through the light transmitting member 388 is emitted from the end portion 388b, the light can be emitted linearly. Thereby, it is possible to emit light even in a narrow place such as a place along the periphery of the center accessory 300, and a gorgeous effect can be executed. Furthermore, it is possible to emit light in a frame shape as in the case where light is emitted along the opening 301 of the center accessory 300.

  In addition, a planar portion 388a is formed in a bowl shape at the end portion 388b of the light transmitting member 388 when viewed from the front view direction. As a result, the light transmitted through the plane portion 388a is not guided linearly forward, but is dispersed in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the end portion 388b, so that the light emitting area becomes larger and looks more gorgeous. Enhanced.

  Out of the illumination members 379 arranged on the outer periphery of the center accessory 300 according to the present embodiment, the illumination members 379 on the lower right side of the center accessory 300 when viewed from the front, that is, below the stages 330, 350, and 376. It is extended and arranged in the vicinity (left side) of the normal symbol display 82, the first and second special symbol indicators 84 and 86, the first and second special symbol hold indicators 88 and 90, and the normal symbol hold indicator 92. In the electric decoration member 379, a light transmitting member 389 having a shape characteristic as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is used.

  Similar to the light transmitting member 388, the light transmitting member 389 is made of a transparent plate having a predetermined thickness, and an incident side end 389a to which light from the LED 384 of the light source 380 is directly irradiated and an incident side end 389a. And a radiation-side end 389b that radiates light that has entered the light-transmitting member 389 from the incident-side end 389a to the outside. A fine convex lens is formed on the surface of the radiation side end portion 389b so that the emitted light is diffused.

  Further, the light transmitting member 389 is formed with a V-shaped cutout portion 389c from the radiation side end portion 389b side to the incident side end portion 389a, and the longitudinal direction of the light transmission member 389 in the cutout portion 389c. An end surface on the direction tip portion side (upper side in the figure) is a first light guiding portion 389d. The first light guiding portion 389d has a surface shape such that light incident from the incident side end portion 389a is reflected and guided in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389.

  When light entering from the incident end side 389a side reaches the first light guiding unit 389d inside the light transmitting member 389 by the first light guiding unit 389d, a part of the light is transmitted to the first light guiding unit 389d. The light is reflected in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389, and the light travels inside the light transmitting member 389 toward the distal end side in the longitudinal direction. There is light emitted from the first light guiding portion 389d to the outside of the light transmitting member 389 without being reflected by the first light guiding portion 389d, and the light emitted to the outside is a decoration in front of the notch portion 389c. The cover 386 is irradiated.

  Further, the light transmitting member 389 has a longitudinal end portion (upper end portion in the drawing) on the same side as the side where the first light guiding portion 389d of the cutout portion 389c is disposed, in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389. A second light guiding portion 389e is formed for reflecting and guiding the light that has traveled along the light source to the radiation side end portion 389b side. The second light guiding portion 389e has a plurality of inclined surfaces formed at an angle that makes an acute angle from the end surface of the incident side end portion 389a toward the longitudinal tip. As shown in the figure, these inclined surfaces have different angles, and in this example, have a saw shape. By the second light guiding portion 389e, the light that has traveled in the light transmitting member 389 toward the front end side in the longitudinal direction is reflected toward the radiation side end portion 389b and can be emitted from the radiation side end portion 389b. ing.

  According to the light transmitting member 389 of the present example, the light from the light source 380 disposed at a predetermined position is caused to enter the inside from the incident side end 389a, and then reflected by the first light guiding portion 389d to have its optical axis. Is directed in the longitudinal direction of the light transmitting member 389 that is substantially perpendicular to the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and is sent to the second light guiding portion 389e that is a predetermined distance away from the first light guiding portion 389d. In the light guiding portion 389e, the light that has traveled in the longitudinal direction is reflected from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 to be emitted from the radiation side end portion 389b on the front side of the second light guiding portion 389e, and the decorative cover in front thereof By irradiating 386, light decoration can be performed.

  That is, according to the light transmissive member 389 of the present example, the light from the light source 380 can be irradiated even on a portion of the decorative cover 386 that is not disposed directly in front of the light source 380. Therefore, the light source 380 is disposed directly behind. Even if it is not possible, the decoration cover 386 can be well decorated with light by irradiating the entire decoration cover 386 with light.

[Relationship between back unit and effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 19 is a perspective view showing the front unit and the effect display device as viewed from the front. 20 is a perspective view showing FIG. 19 from the rear. FIG. 21 is a perspective view showing the back unit from the rear. FIG. 22 is a rear view of the effect display device. FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear unit and the effect display device etc. from the front.

  As shown in the figure, in this example, the effect display device 115 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 270. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the back unit 270 has an inner periphery of an opening 412 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in the back box 410, and is vertically moved to one side (left side in the rear view) extending vertically. Two attachment / detachment grooves 414 formed away from each other, and an attachment / detachment mechanism 418 having an attachment / detachment lever 416 disposed on the rear surface of the back box 410 on the opposite side to the attachment / detachment groove 414 (right side in rear view). ing.

  The attachment / detachment lever 416 of the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 has a box shape that is long in the vertical direction with the side facing the center of the opening 412 in the back box 410 open, and can be slid vertically on the rear surface of the back box 410. Is retained. On the rear surface side of the detachable lever 416, there are provided a knob portion 416a that protrudes rearward at the approximate center in the vertical direction, and an opening portion 416b that is opened to the rear side by cutting out the rear surface below the knob portion 416a. ing.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, the effect display device 115 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and is formed at positions separated from each other in the vertical direction on one of the left and right side surfaces (the side surface on the left side in the rear view). Two detachable protrusions 420 projecting outward, and the other side surface (the side surface on the right side of the back view) opposite to the side surface on which the detachable protrusion 420 is formed, are formed at a substantially center in the vertical direction and outward An attachment / detachment locking portion 422 protruding toward the surface is provided. These attachment / detachment protrusions 420 and attachment / detachment locking portions 422 are formed so as to correspond to the attachment / detachment grooves 414 and the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 of the back unit 270.

  The effect display device 115 is attached to the back unit 270 in a state where the attachment / detachment lever 416 of the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 in the back box 410 is slid upward and the display screen of the effect display device 115 is directed to the front side and the rear unit 270 is attached. The attachment / detachment protrusion 420 is inserted into the attachment / detachment groove 414, and the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is inserted into the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 from the opening 416 b of the attachment / detachment lever 416. Then, by sliding the attachment / detachment lever 416 downward, the rear side of the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is covered with the rear surface of the attachment / detachment lever 416, the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is locked, and the effect display device 115 moves to the back unit 270. Will be installed.

  Note that the effect display device 115 is attached to the back unit 270, whereby the opening 412 of the back box 410 is closed by the effect display device 115, and the rigidity of the back box 410 is increased.

  In addition, the attachment / detachment groove 414 in the back unit 270 is a cooperation between the back box 410 and a production accessory back ball path upper member 424 (detailed configuration and operation will be described later) fixed to the rear side of the back box 410. Is to be formed. The effect accessory back ball path upper member 424 is fixed to the back box 410 by a predetermined screw from the rear side, and has a color clearly different from the back box 410 of the back unit 270 and the effect display device 115. It is colored so that it can be easily distinguished from them (see FIG. 20, FIG. 21, etc.).

  By the way, when the effect display device 115 is detached from the back unit 270 due to a failure or the like, the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 for attaching / detaching the effect display device 115 to / from the attachment / detachment mechanism 418 is provided due to the presence of the knob portion 416a of the attachment / detachment lever 416. It can be easily recognized by the operator. However, even if the attachment / detachment locking portion 422 is unlocked by the attachment / detachment mechanism 418, the attachment / detachment protrusion 420 is inserted and fitted into the attachment / detachment groove 414, so that it is removed only by pulling the effect display device 115 rearward. This may cause the operator to think about the removal method, and may increase the time required for the work, or may be forcibly removed and damaged.

  However, in this embodiment, the production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 can be easily identified, and the production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 can be immediately recognized that it can be removed by another member. Therefore, when removing the effect display device 115, the effect accessory back ball path upper member 424 can be removed, and the effect display device 115 can be easily removed, and the time taken for the removal can be obtained as a result. In addition, the rear unit 270 and the like can be prevented from being damaged due to excessive removal.

[Overall configuration of back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 24 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board including the effect bonus. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the rear unit attached to the rear of the game board from the front upper front. FIG. 26 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. FIG. 28 is a perspective view showing the rear unit disassembled for each main member from the front.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with an effect accessory 430 that is arranged in the game area 37 and can perform an effect using a game ball. This stage effect 430 is arranged inside the center role 300 and adjacent to the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370, and receives the game ball received from the stage prize winning opening 398a. It is used to produce an effect.

  The effect accessory 430 includes a cylindrical accessory rotator 432, and a figure 434 is accommodated in the accessory rotator 432 as shown in FIG. This accessory rotating body 432 is made up of a transparent member in which a part in the circumferential direction can visually recognize the inside, and another part different from a part in the circumferential direction is made up of an opaque member that cannot visually see the inside. Has been. However, an opening may be formed instead of the transparent member. If the figure 434 accommodated in the inside can be visually recognized, the aspect is not limited.

  In this specification, the side on which the figure 434 can be visually recognized is referred to as an effect side area, and the side on which the figure 434 cannot be viewed is referred to as a decoration side area.

  The accessory rotator 432 of the effect accessory 430 is configured to be rotatable about the center extending in the longitudinal direction (that is, the center line of the cross section crossing the longitudinal direction of the accessory rotator 432). Therefore, the player can or cannot visually recognize the figure 434 depending on the rotation position. That is, the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized when the opaque member is on the front (player side) (see FIG. 10), and the figure 434 can be visually recognized when the transparent part is on the front. (See FIG. 24).

  Note that the phrase “freely rotatable with respect to the game board 5” does not mean that it is attached to the game board 5, but whether it is attached to the game board 5 or not. Can be freely rotated.

  When this figure 434 cannot be visually recognized, the character of “Utahime Legend” can be visually recognized on the front surface of the accessory rotating body 432. Although the detailed configuration will be described later, this character is composed of a transparent member capable of transmitting light, and a light source such as an LED is disposed behind the character. When light is emitted from the light source toward the front of the game board 5, the “diva legend (decorative character)” is turned on. Then, by changing the lighting mode of the light source to various modes, it is possible to use the effect accessory 430 as a decorative member.

  In other words, the effect accessory 430 can be arbitrarily set between the effect position where the accessory rotator 432 can visually recognize the figure 434 and the decoration position where the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized and the decorative characters of “Daiba Legend” can be visually recognized. It has a rotatable structure.

  Therefore, the production role 430 functions as a production role 430 when the figure 434 can be visually recognized, and functions as a decoration member when the figure 434 cannot be visually recognized (that is, when the decorative characters can be visually recognized). The area 5 can be used effectively, and the player can be surprised by rotating the accessory rotating body 432, so that interest is enhanced.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 27, the game ball received from the stage winning prize opening 398 a is directed to the stage actor 430 between the stage actor 430 and the stage opening / closing device 398. An accessory guiding path 436 for guiding is provided.

  The accessory guide path 436 is inclined downward from the effect opening / closing device 398 toward the effect accessory 430 (see FIG. 25). As a result, the game ball received in the stage special prize winning opening 398 a rolls on the accessory guide path 436 toward the stage accessory 430. Further, the accessory guiding path 436 is made of a transparent resin member, so that a game ball rolling on the accessory guiding path 436 can be visually recognized.

  Here, the above-described effect accessory 430, the accessory guide path 436, and the like are supported by the back box 410, and are constituent members of the back unit 270. That is, the back unit 270 includes an effect opening / closing device 398 having an effect winning prize opening 398a, and an accessory guiding path 436 for guiding a game ball received in the effect winning prize opening 398a of the effect opening / closing device 398. An effect accessory 430 capable of providing an effect using the game ball as the game ball guided by the accessory guide path 436 enters the interior, an effect opening / closing device 398, an accessory guide path 436, and It mainly includes a back box 410 having a rectangular opening portion 412 that holds the effect-use accessories 430 and the like in predetermined positions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  In addition, the back unit 270 causes a game ball arranged at the upper part of the effect bonus 430 and guided by the bonus guidance path 436 to enter the effect bonus 430 or outside (the effect bonus 430). The game ball distributed to the outside of the production-use accessory 430 by the distribution mechanism 438 and the production-use accessory back sphere on-path member 424. Further, a production accessory back sphere path lower member 426 (see FIG. 43) is further provided. In FIG. 28, reference numeral 440 denotes a lamp driving board box that houses a lamp driving board 688 described later.

  Further, the back unit 270 includes a plurality of light sources 380 for light-decorating the frame-shaped decorative body 370 in the center accessory 300 described above, and light sources of the center illumination unit 302 disposed in the vicinity of the stages 330, 350, and 376. And a center light source unit 442 having a center decoration lamp 304 or the like (see FIGS. 25 and 28). Although not shown, the center light source unit 442 includes a base substrate having a plurality of LEDs and a diffusing lens that is disposed above the base substrate and diffuses light from the LEDs. In addition, each stage 330, 350, 376, etc. can be light decorated.

  In the back unit 270, as shown in the figure, a stage effect 430, an accessory guide path 436, each light source 380, a center light source unit 442, and the like provided with a sorting mechanism 438 on the upper side are provided in the back box 410 from the front side. It can be mounted on. Further, the effect opening / closing device 398, the effect accessory back sphere path upper member 424, the effect accessory back sphere path lower member 426, the lamp driving board box 440, and the like are attached to the back box 410 from the back side. ing.

[Regarding the production of the acting and distribution mechanism in the back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 29 is an anomalous front view shown from the front of the figure in a state in which the effector has a distribution mechanism. FIG. 30 is a rear view of the effect accessory provided with a distribution mechanism. 31 is a plan view of FIG. FIG. 32 is a bottom view of FIG. FIG. 33 is a perspective view from the front in a state in which the effector has a distribution mechanism. FIG. 34 is a perspective view showing the effect accessory for each major configuration as viewed from the front. FIG. 35 is a perspective view showing the accessory rotating body. FIG. 36 is an irregular front view showing the accessory rotating body with the figure as the front. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the figure side of the accessory rotating body. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the decorative member side of the accessory rotating body. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a rotation drive mechanism of the first effect rod in the accessory rotating body. 40 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view for explaining a discharge path of game balls in the effect item.

  As shown in the figure, in the effect accessory 430, the accessory rotator 432 that is rotatable about the axis extending in the vertical direction and the predetermined range in the circumferential direction of the accessory rotator 432 are exposed to the outside. Effect accessory base 446 having an opening 444, a rotation drive unit 448 disposed below the effect accessory base 446 and rotating the accessory rotator 432, and the opening of the effect accessory base 446 It mainly includes a first closing member 450 and a second closing member 452 that are made of a transparent member by closing the portion 444 (see FIG. 34).

  In addition, the effect item 430 is used for irradiating light to a predetermined range (specifically, the right frame 370c) of the frame-shaped decorative body 370 in the center accessory 300 via the transparent second closing member 452. A light source 454 is provided. Similar to the light source 380, the light source 454 includes a plurality of LEDs 456 and a light source substrate 458 to which the LEDs 456 are attached. The light source 454 is substantially the same as the length (vertical length) of the accessory rotating body 432. The LEDs 456 are mounted in a row on the light source substrate 458 having a length (see FIG. 34).

  The accessory rotator 432 in the effect accessory 430 includes an accessory rotator body 460 that holds the figure 434 and the like. The accessory rotating body 460 divides a cylindrical space formed by the disc-shaped top plate portion 462 and the bottom plate portion 464 and the top plate portion 462 and the bottom plate portion 464 in the circumferential direction. Partition walls 466 that form two spaces (a sphere circulation space 460a and a decoration space 460b) (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  A bearing groove 462a is formed at the center of the top surface of the top plate portion 462 of the accessory rotating body 460, and a long hole 462b that penetrates vertically and allows a game ball to pass therethrough. The long hole 462b is formed so as to communicate with one space (the sphere circulation space 460a) partitioned by the partition wall 466, and the circumferential end of the sphere circulation space 460a (the left end in FIG. 36). It is arranged in the vicinity.

  On the other hand, the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotator main body 460 includes an opening 464a disposed substantially at the center thereof and a plurality of through holes 464b arranged in a circular arc shape disposed on the sphere circulation space 460a side. The opening 464a and the through hole 464b are formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction (see FIGS. 37 and 38).

  Further, the accessory rotating body 432 includes a figure 434 formed by deforming a predetermined character in a three-dimensional shape in a ball circulation space 460 a partitioned by a partition wall 466, and a long hole toward the approximate center of the figure 434. A ball discharge member 468 that discharges the game ball that has passed through 462b into the accessory rotator 432, and an axis (described later) that is disposed below the ball discharge member 468 and extends in the left-right direction and horizontally in the horizontal center. A first effect rod 470 that is rotatable around the support shaft 474) and a second effect rod 472 disposed below the first effect rod 470 are further provided.

  Each of these ball discharge member 468, first effect rod 470, and second effect rod 472 is made of a transparent member so that the manner in which the game ball rolls can be visually recognized.

  The figure 434 is arranged in such a manner that one hand 434a is pushed forward. Further, a support shaft 474 is supported by the figure 434 directly above the one hand 434a. The support shaft 474 is an axis whose longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. That is, the one hand 434a and the support shaft 474 are substantially parallel. The first performance rod 470 is fixed to the one hand 434 a so as to be supported by the one hand 434 a of the figure 434 and is supported by the support shaft 474.

  The support shaft 474 is configured integrally with the one hand 434a of the figure 434 and the first performance rod 470, and is configured to be rotatable within a predetermined angle range (details will be described later). The support shaft 474 is pivotally supported by a partition wall 466, and an end opposite to the one hand 434a side extends through the partition wall 466 to the decorative space 460b side (see FIG. 38).

  In addition, the second effect rod 472 disposed below the first effect rod 470 is inclined from one end (right end 472a in the present embodiment) to the other end (left end 472b in the present embodiment). The first effect 樋 470 and the second effect 樋 472 have an arc shape along the circumferential direction of the accessory rotator 432 in plan view, and the outer shape protrudes from the outer periphery of the cylinder of the accessory rotator main body 460. (See FIG. 35, FIG. 42, etc.).

  The accessory rotating body 432 has a first outlet 476 below the support shaft 474 and on the left side in the ball circulation space 460a, and below the support shaft 474 and on the right side. A second effect rod guide port 478 communicating with the second effect rod 472 is formed. When the support shaft 474 rotates counterclockwise to the rotation limit, the left end 470b of the first performance rod 470 is positioned above the first performance port 476. On the other hand, when the support shaft 474 rotates in the clockwise direction to the rotation limit, the right end 470a of the first effect rod 470 is positioned above the second effect rod guide port 478.

  It should be noted that the first effect rod 470 is such that the center portion is positioned below the right end 470a and the left end 470b when the right end 470a and the left end 470b at both ends thereof have the same height (horizontal state). It has a shape. That is, the first performance rod 470 has a shape with a lowered center. As a result, when the game ball released from the ball discharge member 468 is supplied when the first effect rod 470 is in a substantially horizontal state, the first effect rod 470 is caused to move in the horizontal direction. (See FIG. 29).

  The movement of the game ball in the first effect 樋 470 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 29, the game ball supplied to the first effect 樋 470 is a motion vector (predetermined to the right) by the ball discharge member 468. Is applied to the vicinity of the center of the first effect 樋 470, the game ball supplied to the first effect 470 is moved toward the right end 470a of the first effect 470. Will move. At that time, since the left and right both ends 470a and 470b of the first performance rod 470 are higher than the center, the game ball rolling toward the right end 470a is in a state of climbing a hill, and the speed is increased by the action of gravity. When the game ball gradually decelerates and the rolling of the game ball stops, this time, the rolling starts toward the center of the first performance rod 470, and the game ball returns to the center lower than the left and right. In addition, when the motion ball in the right direction is large and the game ball reaches the right end 470a without decelerating, when the first effect 樋 470 is substantially horizontal, the right end 470a of the first effect 樋 470 and the second effect 樋Since the guide port 478 is in a non-communication state, the game ball is not guided to the second effect kite guide port 478 but is reflected by colliding with the partition wall portion 466 and is reflected at the center of the first effect kite 470, that is, the left end 470b. It will roll towards.

  And the game ball which went to the center side from the right end 470a side of the 1st production pole 470 will be in the state which goes down the hill, and since rolling speed becomes fast as it goes to the center, it passes the center of the 1st production basket 470. This time, the hill is climbed toward the left end 470b. When the rolling speed of the game ball from the center toward the left end 470b is gradually reduced due to the action of gravity and stops, this time, the rolling starts from the left end 470b side toward the center side, that is, the right end 470a side. To do. When the first performance rod 470 is in a substantially horizontal state, the left end 470b of the first performance rod 470 and the first performance outlet 476 are in a non-communication state, so that the game ball is in the first performance hall 476. When the game ball rolls at a high speed and does not stop and reaches the left end 470b, the ball collides with the partition wall 466 and is reflected, and rolls toward the center of the first performance rod 470, that is, the right end 470a. To move.

  Thus, by repeating the above-described operation, the game ball rolls so as to swing in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470, and between the right end 470a and the left end 470b of the first effect rod 470. As the game ball moves back and forth, it is possible to make the player feel excited about which end the game ball falls from, so that the movement can be enhanced.

  In addition, a second performance exit 480 is formed below the left end 472b of the second performance rod 472. That is, the first performance port 476 and the second performance port 480 are formed side by side. The first performance port 476 and the second performance port 480 pass through the partition wall 466 and communicate with the decoration space 460b side, and the received game ball is sent to the decoration space 460b side. Yes. Note that, on the decorative space 460b side of the partition wall portion 466, a first guiding portion that guides the game balls received in the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 to the outer periphery of the cylindrical body of the accessory rotating body 460. 466a and a second guiding portion 466b are formed.

  Here, the first performance port 476 is configured in blue, and the second performance hall guide port 478 and the second performance port 480 are configured in red. As a result, it is possible to determine whether it is a hit or a miss while sorting one game ball by the first stage 樋 470 left and right by accepting the game ball to each performance exit formed side by side. It is like that.

  By the way, in the accessory rotating body main body 460, as shown in FIG. 40, the rear end of the long hole 462b in the top plate portion 462 is disposed at a position where it bites into the decorative space 460b side with respect to the general shape of the partition wall portion 466. In addition, in the predetermined range below the long hole 462b (up to the substantially rotating upper end of the first effect rod 470), the partition wall portion 466 is on the decorative space 460b side so that the long hole 462b communicates only with the ball circulation space 460a. A concave portion 466c that is recessed on the side of the ball circulation space 460a is formed.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge member 468 has a fan-shaped decorative portion 468a disposed below the top plate portion 462, and extends downward from one end portion (left end portion) of the decorative portion 468a. A covering portion 468b that covers the front upper portion of the recessed portion 466c of the partition wall portion 466, and a discharge portion 468c that is substantially continuous with the bottom surface of the recessed portion 466c below the covering portion 468b and extends near the upper portion of the center of the first effect rod 470c. .

  When this ball discharge member 468 is attached to the accessory rotating body main body 460, a game ball that has fallen into a drop port 536b of the effect accessory base 446 described later enters from the front side portion in the elongated hole 462b and is covered. It is guided to the recess 466c by the portion 468b. At that time, a long hole 462b is formed so as to follow the movement of the game ball above the covering portion 468b. That is, the upper portion of the covering portion 468b is raised by the long hole 462b. It is guided well to the recess 466c without contacting the back side of the plate portion 462. Then, after the game ball is lowered to the bottom surface of the recess 466c by the covering portion 468b and the recess 466c, it can be supplied from the bottom surface of the recess 466c to the first stage basket 470 via the discharge portion 468c. (See FIG. 40).

  Further, the accessory rotating body 432 is a sphere that is attached to the partition wall portion 466 below the second performance rod 472 in the sphere circulation space 460a and the rotation shaft 482 penetrates the partition wall portion 466 and protrudes toward the decoration space 460b. An allocating unit motor 484 and a motor cover 486 arranged on the front side so as to cover the ball allocating unit motor 484 and having a surface decorated with plating are provided. The motor cover 486 prevents the ball sorter motor 484 from being seen by the player. In this example, the ball sorter motor 484 is a stepping motor.

  Further, on the front side of the motor cover 486, a chandelier-shaped decorative lens 488 made of a transparent member, and a partial cylindrical surface that covers the front surface of the decorative lens 488 and whose outer surface substantially coincides with the outer peripheral surface of the accessory rotating body 460. And a cover lens 490 made of a transparent member. The plated decoration of the motor cover 486 and the transparent decorative lens 488 give a gorgeous and gorgeous impression.

  The cover lens 490 includes a partially cylindrical cover portion 490a extending in the vertical direction, and a plate-like bottom portion 490b extending substantially horizontally from the lower end of the cover portion 490a toward the rotation center of the accessory rotating body main body 460, The cross section is substantially L-shaped (see FIG. 41). Although illustration is omitted, the cover portion 490a of the cover lens 490 is provided with a polished decoration in which characters and the like are designed.

  The cover lens 490 includes a light incident portion 490c disposed below the outer end of the bottom portion 490b of the cover lens 490, and light incident on the bottom portion 490b from the light incident portion 490c, and the cover portion 490a and the bottom portion 490b. The first light guiding part 490d that guides reflection in the direction in which the light comes into contact, and the cover part 490a and the bottom part 490b are arranged in contact with each other, and light from the first light guiding part 490d is reflected and guided in the direction of the upper end surface of the cover part 490a A second light guiding portion 490e; and a light emitting portion 490f that is disposed on the upper end surface of the cover portion 490a and emits light from the second light guiding portion 490e toward the inside obliquely upward of the cover lens 490. Yes.

  The first light guiding portion 490d in the cover lens 490 is cut out at the outer end of the bottom portion 490b (the end toward the center of the accessory rotating body main body 460) in a chamfered shape (C chamfer) on the upper side. It is formed by setting it as such a shape. The second light guiding portion 490e is formed by chamfering (C chamfering) the inside and outside of the portion where the cover portion 490a and the bottom portion 490b are in contact. Further, the light emitting portion 490f is formed by chamfering the upper end of the cover portion 490a so that the inner side of the cover lens 490 is lowered and the vertical line thereof faces the direction of the figure 434. Has been.

  According to this cover lens 490, the light incident inside from the light incident portion 490c is guided to the light emitting portion 490f at the upper end of the cover portion 490a, and is emitted from the light emitting portion 490f, and is disposed above the cover lens 490. The figure 434, the first effect 樋 470, and the second effect 樋 472 can be illuminated from below.

  A part of the motor cover 486 whose surface is plated is disposed so as to be in contact with the first light guiding portion 490d of the cover lens 490, and the second light is also reflected by the light reflected by the motor cover 486. The amount of light reflected in the direction of the guiding portion 490e can be relatively increased.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38, in the other space partitioned by the partition wall portion 466 in the accessory rotating body 432, that is, in the decoration space 460b, the first effect rod 470 is rotated within a predetermined angle range. The rotation drive mechanism 492 is provided. The rotation drive mechanism 492 includes a first link member 494 that rotates integrally with the support shaft 474 of the first effect rod 470, and a second link member 496 that rotates integrally with the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484. ing.

  This rotation drive mechanism 492 is inserted into a slit 494a formed on the front end side of the first link member 494 by inserting a pin 496a protruding from the front end of the second link member 496, The second link member 496 is linked to each other so that the rotation of the ball sorter motor 484 is transmitted to the first effect rod 470 (see FIG. 39). More specifically, when the second link member 496 is rotated by driving the ball distribution motor 484, the pin 496a at the tip of the pin 496a moves on the circumference of a predetermined radius around the rotation shaft 482. The moving pin 496a pushes the slit 494a of the first link member 494 from the inside, and the movement of the first link member 494 other than the rotation is restricted by the support shaft 474. Therefore, the pin 496a slides in the slit 494a. As a result, the first link member 494 rotates about the support shaft 474.

  In the rotation drive mechanism 492, the length of the first link member 494 is approximately twice the length of the second link member 496, as shown in the figure. Accordingly, when the second link member 496 is rotated by a predetermined angle by the ball distributing unit motor 484, the support shaft 474 is approximately half the predetermined angle via the second link member 496 and the first link member 494. It is designed to rotate. That is, the rotation angle of the ball sorter motor 484 is approximately halved and transmitted to the support shaft 474 that pivotally supports the first performance rod 470. The rotation error of the effect rod 470 is approximately halved, so that the rotation control of the first effect rod 470 can be controlled more closely, and the first effect rod 470 can be smoothly rotated.

  Note that the rotation drive mechanism 492 extends in a direction different from that of the second link member 496 with respect to the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484, and is integrated with the second link member 496. A piece 498 and a ball sorter motor sensor 500 capable of detecting the detection piece 498 and supported by the partition wall 466 in the vicinity of the rotation shaft 482 of the ball sorter motor 484 are provided.

  The rotation position of the ball sorting motor 484 can be detected by the detection piece 498 and the ball sorting motor sensor 500, and the origin adjustment of the ball sorting motor 484 is performed by the detection, and the first position is adjusted. The stage 470 can be rotated in a good state.

  Further, the accessory rotator 432 is provided with a decoration member 502 that lights and blinks the characters “Legend of the Diva” in the decoration space 460b. The decorative member 502 is sized to cover only the predetermined range, not the entire circumferential direction of the decorative space 460b in the accessory rotating body main body 460. Specifically, the size of the decorative member 502 in the circumferential direction is such that the first guide portion 466a and the second guide portion 466b extending from the partition wall portion 466 toward the outer periphery are exposed to the outside of the accessory rotating body 432. (See FIG. 35).

  The decorative member 502 has a partial cylindrical surface shape substantially matching the cylindrical outer periphery of the accessory rotating body main body 460, and includes a decorative lens 504 made of a translucent member having characters of “Utahime Densetsu”, and a decorative lens. A plate-like diffusing lens 506 disposed on the back side of the 504, and a light source substrate 512 disposed on the back side of the diffusing lens 506 and provided with a plurality of LEDs 510 at predetermined positions of the substrate 508.

  The diffusing lens 506 of the decorative member 502 is arranged on the surface facing the decorative lens 504 at a position corresponding to the decoration of the “diva legend” on the decorative lens 504, and a light emitting portion 506a composed of a plurality of belt-like convex lenses extending in the vertical direction. The light reflecting portion 506b, which is provided on the surface opposite to the light emitting portion 506a and extends in a direction orthogonal to the vertical direction, is perpendicular to the direction in which the V groove of the light reflecting portion 506b extends. And a light incident portion 506c having a flat surface formed at an end located in the direction (vertical direction) (see FIGS. 38 and 41).

  The diffuser lens 506 of this example is formed with an opening 506d having a predetermined width that penetrates through a portion where the light emitting portion 506a is formed in the middle portion in the vertical direction, and the upper surface and the lower surface of the inner periphery of the opening 506d, respectively. The light incident portion 506c is used.

  Further, the light source substrate 512 of the decorative member 502 is disposed at a position as close as the substrate 508 comes into contact with the back surface of the diffusion lens 506 as shown in the figure, and the light from the LED 510 is a light incident portion of the diffusion lens 506. The light emitting portion of the LED 510 is attached to the substrate 508 so that the light emitting portion of the LED 510 faces in the vertical direction so as to irradiate 506c. That is, the LEDs 510 are attached to the substrate 508 so as to face the upper and lower end portions of the diffusion lens 506 and the light incident portion 506c formed in the opening portion 506d.

  In the decorative member 502, light emitted in the vertical direction by the LEDs 510 of the light source substrate 512 is irradiated to the light incident portion 506 c disposed in a direction perpendicular to the surface formed by the light emitting portion 506 a of the diffusion lens 506. Then, the light enters the diffusion lens 506 from the light incident portion 506c. Of the light that has entered the diffusing lens 506, light directed toward the side opposite to the side on which the decorative lens 504 is disposed (the side on which the substrate 508 is disposed) reaches the light reflecting portion 506 b and the plural The V-groove is reflected to the decorative lens 504 side (light emitting portion 506a side) and emitted from the light emitting portion 506a to the decorative lens 504. At this time, since the light emitting portion 506a is provided with a plurality of belt-like convex lenses extending in the vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 506a is emitted so as to diffuse in a direction perpendicular to the vertical direction. The

  According to the decorative member 502, when light is incident from the light incident portion 506c provided at the end of the diffuser lens 506 formed in a plate shape, the plurality of V grooves formed on one surface of the diffuser lens 506 The light reflecting portion 506b is reflected toward the light emitting portion 506a formed on the other surface so that light can be emitted from the entire light emitting portion 506a, and the entire decorative lens 504 can be illuminated in a planar shape. It has become.

  By the way, when the light source is arranged on the back side of the decorative lens, if the distance between the light source and the decorative lens is too close, the light from the light source reaches the decorative lens before it is sufficiently diffused, and there is no light source. By the way, there is a problem that the decorative lens has different light conditions and does not emit light in a planar shape. For this reason, it is conceivable to make the decorative lens emit light in a plane shape by sufficiently diffusing the light by moving the light source away from the decorative lens. In this case, the distance between the decorative lens and the light source becomes long. As a result, the thickness of the entire decorative member increases, and the decorative lens cannot emit light in a planar shape due to space or the like, and there is a problem that effective optical decoration cannot be performed.

  However, according to the decorative member 502, light incident from a direction along the surface of the diffusion lens 506 can be emitted in a planar shape from the surface of the diffusion lens 506. It is not necessary to arrange a light source, the thickness of the decorative member 502 can be made as thin as possible, and the decorative lens 504 can emit light in a planar state in a good state regardless of the installation space of the decorative member, and is effective. Light decoration can be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 41, the accessory rotating body 432 of the present example further includes a rotating body upper substrate 514 disposed between the top plate portion 462 and the ball discharge member 468 in the accessory rotating body main body 460. Yes. A plurality of LEDs 516 are attached to the lower surface of the rotating body upper substrate 514, and the LED 516 emits light to raise the figure 434, the first effect 樋 470, the second effect 樋 472, etc. via the ball emitting member 468. It comes to illuminate from.

  The accessory rotating body 432 further includes a rotating body lower substrate 518 disposed below the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotating body main body 460. The rotating body lower substrate 518 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 520 as light sources at positions corresponding to the through holes 464b in the bottom plate portion 464 on the upper surface side, and is provided on the accessory rotating body 432 at the center on the lower surface side. The ball distribution unit motor 484, the ball distribution unit motor sensor 500, the light source substrate 512, the rotating body upper substrate 514, the rotating body lower substrate 518, and the connection connector 522 for electrically connecting the distributing mechanism 438 are provided. A plurality (three in this example) are provided.

  Of the three connection connectors 522, the central connection connector 522 located at the center of rotation of the accessory rotating body main body 460 is a rotating body connected to the ball sorting unit motor 484, the ball sorting unit motor sensor 500, and the like. Even if the connection connector 522 rotates with the rotation of the accessory rotating body 432, the wiring cord extending from the connection plug connected to the connection connector 522 is minimized as much as possible. Therefore, the risk that the wiring cord is disconnected due to twisting can be reduced.

  Further, the accessory rotator 432 is provided with a rotation connecting member 524 that is disposed below the rotator lower substrate 518 and transmits the rotation drive from the rotation drive unit 448 to the accessory rotator 432. By fixing the rotary connecting member 524 to the bottom plate portion 464 of the accessory rotating body main body 460 using a predetermined screw, the rotary lower member substrate 518 is sandwiched and fixed by the rotary connecting member 524 and the bottom plate portion 464. It has become.

  The rotary connecting member 524 is substantially concentric with the axis of the accessory rotating body main body 460, and the plurality of connection connectors 522 attached to the rotating body lower substrate 518 are opened in a circular shape having a size that can be viewed from below. 524a, a cylindrical portion 524b extending downward from the vicinity of the periphery of the opening 524a, and a plurality (two in this example) of protrusions 524c disposed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 524b and extending in the vertical direction (two in this example). (See FIGS. 32 and 34). The size of the opening 524a is such that a connection plug (not shown) connected to the connection connector 522 can pass therethrough so that the accessory rotating body 432 rotating through the opening 524a can be electrically connected. It has become.

  The rotation drive unit 448 in the effect accessory 430 of this example includes a rotation motor 526 for rotating the accessory rotation body 432, a first gear 528 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation motor 526, A pedestal gear 530 having a second gear 530a meshing with the first gear 528 and connected to the rotation connecting member 524 of the accessory rotating body 432 and supporting the accessory rotating body 432 from below, and the rotational position of the pedestal gear 530 A rotation unit motor sensor 532 that detects the rotation position of the rotation unit motor 526 by detecting it, and a rotation drive unit that supports the rotation unit motor 526, the first gear 528, the base gear 530, and the rotation unit motor sensor 532 at predetermined positions. And a casing 534 (see FIG. 34).

  The pedestal gear 530 in the rotation drive unit 448 includes a cylindrical pedestal cylindrical portion 530b that is open at the top and bottom and can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 524b of the rotation connecting member 524, and an upper end portion of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b. A notch 530c into which the projection 524c can be fitted, and a second gear 530a formed on the outer periphery of the lower portion of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b and meshing with the first gear and having an outer diameter approximately twice the diameter of the first gear 528. And a substantially fan-shaped detection piece 530d which is formed on the lower outer periphery of the second gear and protrudes outward in the radial direction.

  In addition, the rotation drive unit casing 534 of the rotation drive unit 448 has a circular opening 534a that communicates with the inside of the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b of the pedestal gear 530, and a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction outside the opening 534a. And a plurality of (three in this example) support rollers 534b that rotatably support the base gear 530 (see FIG. 32). Since the pedestal gear 530 is placed on the plurality of support rollers 534b, the pedestal gear 530 is rotatably supported.

  The rotational drive unit 448 inserts the base cylindrical part 530b of the base gear 530 into the cylindrical part 524b of the rotary connection member 524, and connects the notch part 530c of the base cylindrical part 530b and the protrusion 524c in the cylindrical part 524b to each other. By fitting, the base gear 530 and the rotation connecting member 524 can be connected so as to be integrally rotatable, and the accessory rotating body 432 can be rotated by driving of the rotating portion motor 526.

  Further, the lower side of the accessory rotating body 432 is rotatably supported by the base gear 530 of the rotation drive unit 448. The rotation drive unit 448 not only rotates the accessory rotating body 432, but also can favorably support the weight of the accessory rotating body 432 by the support roller 534b of the rotation driving unit casing 534 via the base gear 530. It has become.

  With the opening 534a of the rotation drive unit casing 534 and the pedestal cylindrical portion 530b of the pedestal gear 530 in the rotation drive unit 448, the connection connector 522 provided at the lower part of the accessory rotator 432 can be viewed from below, A connection plug (not shown) can be connected to the connection connector 522 through the lower side of the rotation drive unit 448 (see FIG. 32).

  Although a specific configuration is not shown, the connection plug connected to the connection connector 522 at the lower part of the accessory rotating body 432 is below the portion where the effect accessory 430 of the back box 410 is fixedly supported. The rotating body relay board fixing part 410a (see FIG. 25 and FIG. 28) is connected to the formed rotating body relay board (not shown) via a wiring cord having a predetermined slack. . The distance between the connection connector 522 and the rotating body relay board allows the wiring cord to be twisted between the rotating connection connector 522 and the rotating body relay board fixed to the back box 410 without causing any trouble. Since it is a distance, it can be electrically connected in good condition to the rotating accessory rotating body 432, and the risk of disconnection of the wiring cord is as low as possible.

  The effect accessory base 446 in the effect accessory 430 includes a base-shaped base top plate portion 536 arranged on the upper side, a base bottom plate portion 538 arranged on the lower side, a base top plate portion 536, and a base bottom plate portion. The outer peripheral wall 540 is connected mainly to the outer peripheral edge of the pachinko machine 1 and has a base outer peripheral wall part 540 that is open to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 34).

  An upper ball guide path 536a for guiding the game ball supplied from the accessory guide path 436 to the rear side of the effect accessory base 446 on the base top plate portion 536 of the effect accessory base 446, A circular drop port 536b is provided so as to pass through the base top plate portion 536 at a position off the upper ball guide path 536a so that a game ball can pass (see FIG. 31). The upper ball guide path 536a guides the game ball supplied from the left side of the base top plate portion 536 in the figure by the accessory guide path 436 in the circumferential direction with respect to the center of the base top plate portion 536. Then, it is guided to the rear side of the production-use accessory base 446.

  The drop opening 536b in the base top plate 536 is arranged at a position that substantially coincides with the front end of the long hole 462b in the accessory rotator 432 when the accessory rotator 432 is in an effect position where the figure can be visually recognized. Yes. The base top plate portion 536 is provided with a through hole 536c having a diameter slightly larger than the bearing groove 462a of the accessory rotating body main body 460 at the center (see FIG. 34).

  The base bottom plate portion 538 of the effect accessory base 446 is formed with a through hole 538a at the center thereof through which the cylindrical portion 524b of the rotary connecting member 524 protruding downward from the lower side of the accessory rotating body main body 460 can pass. (See FIG. 34).

  When the accessory rotator 432 is positioned at the effect position so that the figure 434 is visible on the base outer peripheral wall 540 of the effect accessory base 446 of the present example, the first induction of the accessory rotator 432 is performed. The first discharge receiving port 540a and the second discharge receiving port 540b are formed at positions corresponding to the portion 466a and the second guiding portion 466b so as to penetrate the base outer peripheral wall portion 540, and the first rotating member 432 of the first accessory rotating body 432 is formed. The game balls received in the first performance outlet 476 or the second performance outlet 480 are guided by the first guiding portion 466a or the second guiding portion 466b and pass through the first discharge receiving port 540a or the second discharge receiving port 540b. It is discharged to the back side of the outer peripheral wall portion 540, that is, to the rear side of the effect accessory 430.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30, the base outer peripheral wall portion 540 includes, on its rear side, a sphere discharge passage 542 that communicates with the upper sphere guide passage 536 a of the base top plate portion 536, a sphere discharge passage 542, Is provided with a production ball discharge flow path 544 that is a separate flow path and communicates with the first discharge reception opening 540a and the second discharge reception opening 540b. The ball discharge flow path 542 and the production ball discharge flow path 544 are formed in a groove shape whose rear side is opened, and when the production accessory 430 is attached to the back box 410, the rear side thereof is the back box 410. The game ball can be circulated well in the ball discharge channel 542 and the effect ball discharge channel 544.

  The sphere discharge channel 542 has a structure that is vertically divided into an upper sphere discharge channel 542a and a lower sphere discharge channel 542b so as to sandwich the effect sphere discharge channel 544, although illustration is omitted. The back box 410 has a through hole through which a game ball can pass at positions corresponding to the lower end of the upper ball discharge flow path 542a and the upper end of the lower ball discharge flow path 542b. The production-use accessory back sphere path upper member 424 arranged in the position returns the game balls discharged from the upper ball discharge flow path 542a to the outside of the back box 410 to the lower ball discharge flow path 542b (see FIG. 43). ). The ball discharge channel 542 is provided with a ball discharge channel sensor 546 for detecting a game ball passing through the channel.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the effect ball discharge channel 544 joins the game balls that have passed through the first discharge receiving port 540a and the second discharge receiving port 540b arranged at different positions in the vertical direction in the flow channel. The first effect ball discharge flow path sensor 548 that can detect only the game balls from the first discharge reception opening 540a, the first discharge reception opening 540a, and the first discharge reception opening 540a. 2 is provided with a second effect ball discharge flow path sensor 550 capable of detecting a game ball from the discharge outlet 540b.

  The first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548 and the second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550 within a predetermined time by the first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548 and the second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550, the game ball. When the passage of the game ball is detected, the game ball is received by the first performance outlet 476 and passes through the first discharge reception port 540a, and the passage of the game ball is detected only by the second performance ball discharge flow path sensor 550. In this case, the game ball is received by the second performance outlet 480 and passed through the second discharge reception port 540b. That is, it can be seen to which side the game balls supplied on the first effect rod 470 in the accessory rotating body 432 are distributed by the rotation of the first effect rod 470.

  The game balls that have circulated through the ball discharge flow path 542 and the effect ball discharge flow path 544 flow down to the effect accessory back ball path lower member 426 disposed on the lower side, and this effect accessory back ball path They merge in the lower member 426 and are discharged from the game board 5 to the outside (see FIG. 43).

  Further, the base outer peripheral wall portion 540 is provided with an attachment step portion 540c for holding the light source 454 on the inner surface of the right end portion thereof. By attaching the light source 454 to the attachment step portion 540c, the LEDs 456 of the light source 454 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction with the light emitting portion facing substantially frontward.

  The first closing member 450 and the second closing member 452 in the effect accessory 430 of this example are formed in a partial cylindrical surface shape so as to be substantially along the outer periphery of the effect accessory base 446. By covering and closing the opened front side of 446, the game balls that have entered the ball circulation space 460a of the accessory rotating body 432 are discharged from other than the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480. This is to prevent this.

  The second closing member 452 includes a cylindrical portion 452a having a partially cylindrical surface shape, a flat portion 452b disposed on one end side in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 452a and extending outward in the left-right direction, and a cylindrical portion 452a opposite to the flat portion 452b. And a curved portion 452c that extends outward in the front-rear direction and has a center portion in front view curved outward.

  In addition, the second closing member 452 is a light transmission capable of guiding the light from the light source 454 disposed on the back side of the game board base 266 to the predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 5, which is provided in the effect accessory 430. A function as a member is provided. More specifically, the second closing member 452 is disposed on the rear surface side of the flat part 452b, and enters a light incident part 452d that makes the light from the light source 454 incident inside, and the light incident from the light incident part 452d on the cylindrical part 452a. A first light guiding portion 452e that guides the reflection so as to be guided along the circumferential direction, and a second light guide that guides the reflection of the light guided from the first light guiding portion 452e along the extending direction of the curved portion 452c. Part 452f and a light emitting part 452g for emitting light guided from the second light guiding part 452f to the front side through the curved part 452c (see FIG. 42).

  The second closing member 452 has a light incident portion 452d disposed at a portion where the cylindrical portion 452a and the flat portion 452b are in contact with each other, and a first light guiding portion 452e disposed on the front side of the light incident portion 452d. The first light guiding portion 452e is a flat surface formed in a substantially straight section so that the thickness of the cylindrical portion 452a decreases toward the curved portion 452c. The second light guiding portion 452f is a curved surface in which the rear corner where the cylindrical portion 452a and the curved portion 452c are in contact with each other is formed in a C-chamfer shape having a substantially linear cross section.

  According to the second closing member 452, the light emitted from the light source 454 is guided to the light radiating portion 452g on the front surface of the curved portion 452c through the inside thereof, and is emitted to the front side of the light radiating portion 452g, and the curved portion 452c. The decorative cover 386 (the right frame 370c of the frame-shaped decorative body 370) disposed in front of the frame irradiates and can be optically decorated.

  Further, according to the second closing member 452, the light is guided through the cylindrical portion 452a having a partial cylindrical surface shape along the circumferential direction and emitted from the light emitting portion 452g. The optical axis radiated from the light emitting portion 452g can be shifted or shifted in a predetermined direction, and the decorative cover 386 can be provided even if the light source 454 cannot be arranged immediately after the decorative cover 386 to be light-decorated. The light can be well guided and light decorated.

  As shown in FIG. 31, the distribution mechanism 438 attached to the upper part of the effect accessory base 446 extends and contracts (moves) in the front-rear direction (X direction and Y direction shown in FIG. 47) with respect to the pachinko machine 1. A solenoid 552 having a jar 552a, a game ball holding member 554 capable of holding only one game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 47), and a plunger 552a and a game ball holding member 554 are connected. And a pin 558 for supporting the connecting member 556.

  The game ball holding member 554 in the distribution mechanism 438 includes a U-shaped storage recess 554a that is opened radially outwardly about the pin 558 and can store only one game ball, and a rear end portion of the storage recess 554a. And an extending portion 554b extending rearward in the circumferential direction around the pin 558. The outer periphery of the extending portion 554b in the game ball holding member 554 constitutes a part of the peripheral wall of the upper ball guiding path 536a.

  The distribution mechanism 438 can rotate the game ball holding member 554 around the pin 558 by driving the solenoid 552. Specifically, the accommodation recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 is guided in the guiding direction of the accessory guide path 436. Can be rotated between an accommodation position that substantially coincides with the fall position where the accommodation recess 554a substantially coincides with the fall opening 536b of the base top plate portion 536. When the game ball holding member 554 is in the storage position, the storage recess 554a and the drop port 536b do not coincide with each other so that the game ball stored in the storage recess 554a does not fall into the drop port 536b. Further, when the game ball holding member 554 is in the fall position, the game ball from the accessory guiding path 436 is not accommodated in the accommodation recess 554a.

  When the game ball holding member 554 is in the storage position and the game ball is supplied from the accessory guide path 436, the distribution mechanism 438 stores only one game ball, and the game ball is stored in the storage recess 554a. Then, the other supplied game balls are guided to be discharged to the rear side of the effect accessory base 446 through the upper ball guide path 536a. Further, when the game ball is stored in the storage recess 554a and the solenoid 552 is driven to rotate the game ball holding member 554 from the storage position to the drop position, the game ball stored in the storage recess 554a is dropped. It can be dropped into 536b.

  The distribution mechanism 438 is provided with a protruding pin 560 that protrudes downward on the lower side thereof. The projecting pin 560 penetrates the through hole 536c formed in the center of the base top plate portion 536 by attaching the distribution mechanism 438 to the base top plate portion 536 of the effect accessory base 446. The projecting pin 560 extends to the lower side of the portion 536, and the accessory rotating body 432 (the accessory rotation) arranged on the lower side of the base top plate portion 536, that is, in the effect accessory base 446. The upper part of the accessory rotating body 432 can be rotatably supported by being inserted into the bearing groove 462a of the body main body 460).

[About the opening / closing device for production in the back unit]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device from the left front. FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device from the right front side. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the effect opening / closing device in an exploded manner.

  This stage opening / closing device 398 includes a lower casing 562 having a stage winning prize opening 398a and a stage large winning opening opening / closing door 398b that is assembled on the upper side of the lower casing 562 and opens and closes the stage winning prize opening 398a. And an opening / closing drive mechanism 566 that is held by the cooperation of the upper casing 564 and the lower casing 562 and that drives the opening / closing door 398b for effect to open and close.

  The lower casing 562 is configured such that the upper side is opened, and a discharge port 562a for discharging the game ball from the production large winning port 398a is formed at the bottom. The stage winning prize opening / closing door 398b has a support portion 398ba extending rearward and has a T-shape in plan view as a whole, and a connection port 398bb for connecting to the opening / closing drive mechanism 566 is formed in the support portion. ing.

  The opening / closing drive mechanism 566 moves the movement of the production opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 having a plunger 568a movable in the vertical direction and the plunger 568a driven in the vertical direction by the production opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 back and forth. And a drive transmission member 570 that converts the movement of the direction into the direction large opening / closing door 398b for production in the front-rear direction. The plunger 568a is disposed so as to advance and retract from the lower side of the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568.

  More specifically, the drive transmission member 570 is engaged with the distal end of the plunger 568a of the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for production and extends substantially in the horizontal direction, and slides in the forward / backward direction of the plunger 568a and the opening / closing door 398b for production. A first piece 570b rotatable around a support shaft 570a orthogonal to any of the directions, and a connecting port 398bb of a large-award winning prize opening / closing door 398b for production that rotates integrally with the first piece 570b and extends substantially upward from the support shaft 570a. And a second piece 570c inserted and engaged therein.

  Also, the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided with an effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 below the discharge port 562a of the lower casing 562, and the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 causes the effect opening / closing device count port 398a. It is possible to detect game balls that won a prize.

  In this stage opening / closing device 398, only the upper side of the stage big winning opening 398a can be closed by the stage large winning opening opening / closing door 398b, and the front side is always open. A glass plate attached to the window frame 39 of the pachinko machine 1 is arranged immediately before (not shown in the figure), and a game ball does not enter the stage prize winning opening 398a from the opened front side. It is like that.

  Further, the effect opening / closing device 398 can prevent the ball clogging by holding the game ball between the window frame 39 and the glass plate when the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b is in the closed position. The opening and closing force is weakened.

[About the flow of game balls from the opening / closing device for production to the distribution mechanism]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the effect opening / closing device, the accessory guide path, the distribution mechanism, and the effect accessory as viewed from the upper left. 48 to 50 are plan views of the accessory guide path, the distribution mechanism, and the effect accessory, and are diagrams illustrating a manner in which game balls are distributed by the distribution mechanism.

  In this example, the game balls received from the effect opening / closing device 398 are behind the game board 5 and the game balls guided to the effect actor 430 by the distribution mechanism 438 provided above the effect actor 430. It will be distributed to game balls to be discharged. In this example, before the game ball can be received by the effect opening / closing device 398, the accessory rotator 432 is rotated to an effect position where the figure 434 inside the effect accessory 430 can be visually recognized by the player. It has become.

  First, when a game ball is received in the effect large winning opening 398a of the effect opening / closing device 398, the game ball is discharged from the discharge port 562a of the lower casing 562 and at the same time is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 to confirm the winning. The game ball downstream from here becomes a game ball (so-called dead ball) that is not related to game control that is advantageous to the player, such as payout of the game ball or generation control of an advantageous game state such as jackpot game.

  The game ball detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 is supplied to the accessory guide path 436 and is guided in the direction of the effect accessory 430. As shown in the figure, the accessory guide path 436 guides the game ball from the effect opening / closing device 398 to the right side in the left-right direction for a predetermined distance, then guides the game ball to the rear side at a substantially right angle, and The game ball is guided toward the upper part of the effect accessory 430 obliquely from behind by bending the guidance direction of the game ball again.

  As described above, since the accessory guiding path 436 has a plurality of corners, the circulation speed of the game ball is attenuated at each corner, and the speed at which the game ball flows can be prevented from increasing. The game balls that circulate through the accessory guide path 436 can be easily seen, and the movement of the game balls can be enjoyed.

  Then, the game ball guided by the accessory guide path 436 first reaches the distribution mechanism 438. In the distribution mechanism 438, the plunger 552a of the solenoid 552 is located on the X direction side (accommodating position) when in the normal state (that is, the demagnetized state). Then, the game ball that has rolled on the accessory guide path 436 toward the distribution mechanism 438 is accommodated and held in the accommodation recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 (see FIG. 48).

  When one game ball is held by the game ball holding member 554, the game ball that subsequently rolls on the accessory guiding path 436 cannot be stored and held by the storage recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554. The ball passes through the ball guide path 536a and is discharged to the rear side (Y direction side in the figure) of the game board 5 (see FIG. 49).

  By the way, the game balls are supplied to the upper ball guide path 536a from the oblique rear to the front by the accessory guide path 436, so that the inertial force of the game ball is on the front side of the upper ball guide path 536a, that is, the game ball. The holding member 554 faces the housing recess 554a, so that the game ball can be easily housed in the housing recess 554a.

  When the solenoid 552 is excited in a state where the game ball is accommodated in the accommodation recess 554a, the plunger 552a moves in the Y direction. At this time, the connecting member 556 rotates counterclockwise (α direction in the figure) using the pin 558 as a fulcrum. The game ball holding member 554 rotates counterclockwise as the connecting member 556 rotates counterclockwise. A drop opening 536b through which a game ball can fall is formed on the upper surface of the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430. When the solenoid 552 is excited and the game ball holding member 554 rotates counterclockwise with the connecting member 556 as a fulcrum, the game ball housed and held in the housing recess 554a of the game ball holding member 554 is played from the drop port 536b. It falls into the rotating body 432 (see FIG. 50).

  The game ball that has fallen into the drop opening 536b enters the ball circulation space 460a of the accessory rotator 432. At this time, the accessory rotator 432 rotates the figure 434 to a visual effect position. In addition, the drop opening 536b and the elongated hole 462b of the accessory rotating body 432 coincide with each other, so that it can enter the accessory rotating body 432 from the dropping opening 536b. Note that the first effect rod 470 is provided after the game ball from the drop opening 536b is once sent to the rear side by the elongated hole 462b of the top plate portion 462 and the covering portion 468b of the ball discharge member 468 in the accessory rotating body 460. (See FIG. 40).

  If the solenoid 552 is in a demagnetized state, the game ball held by the game ball holding member 554 is held at a position shifted from the drop opening 536b, so that the game ball held by the game ball holding member 554 is used as an accessory. It does not fall into the rotating body 432.

  In this way, even if there are a plurality of game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398, only one game ball is guided into the effect accessory 430 by the distribution mechanism 438. As a result, the effect accessory 430 can produce an effect using one game ball.

[Control structure of main board and peripheral board]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 51 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly showing the configuration around the main board. FIG. 52 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration, and mainly shows the configuration around the peripheral substrate. In these drawings, bold arrows indicate connection and direction of the power source, and thin arrows indicate connection and direction of the signal.

  The control of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is broadly divided into a group of main boards 600 (shown in FIG. 51) and a group of peripheral boards 660 (shown in FIG. 52). The group of main boards 600 controls gaming operations (winning detection, winning judgment, special symbol display, prize ball payout, etc.), and the group of peripheral boards 660 has stage operations (issue decoration, sound output, liquid crystal display and decoration body). Control).

  As shown in FIG. 51, the main board 600 includes a main control board 131 and a payout control board 197. The main control board 131 includes a CPU 602 as a central processing unit, a ROM 604 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 606 as a readable / writable memory.

  The CPU 602 controls various games performed in the pachinko machine 1 by executing a control program stored in the ROM 604, and creates a command signal to be output to the peripheral board 660 and the payout control board 197.

  The ROM 604 temporarily stores various data generated in various processes executed by the main control board 131 and information such as input signals.

  The main board 600 is connected to the power supply board 195 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199, and operating power is supplied from the power supply board 195.

  The input interface of the main control board 131 includes a first start port sensor 644 for detecting a winning state at the first start port 390, a second start port sensor 646 for detecting a winning state at the second start port 392, and a second. A third start port sensor 648 for detecting a winning state at the 3 start port 394 and an all winning port winning number detection sensor 650 for counting the number of winnings for all winning ports are connected.

  In addition, the input interface of the main control board 131 indicates that the game ball has won the gate sensor 630 for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 402 and the general winning opening 404 through the panel relay terminal plate 624. A general winning opening sensor 632 to be detected is connected.

  Furthermore, an effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 is connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 via an effect opening / closing device relay terminal plate 626 connected to the panel relay terminal plate 624 and connected to the panel relay terminal plate 624. The jackpot game switchgear count sensor 640 is connected via the jackpot game switchgear relay terminal plate 628.

  Detection signals from the above sensors are input to the main control board 131. Also connected to the input interface of the main control board 131 are an inner frame opening switch 620 for detecting the opening state of the front frame body 11 and a door opening switch 622 for detecting the opening state of the front frame 4.

  On the other hand, a normal symbol / special symbol display board 636 is connected to the output interface of the panel relay terminal board 624 via a symbol limiting resistor board 634, and the normal symbol display 82, the first symbol is displayed from the main control board 131. A drive signal can be output to the special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86.

  In addition, an output opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for driving an effect large winning opening / closing door 398b of the effect opening / closing device 398 is connected to the output interface of the effect opening / closing device relay terminal board 626, and the main control board 131 is connected. Therefore, these drive signals are output.

  Further, the jackpot game opening / closing device relay terminal plate 628 has an output interface with a normal electric combination solenoid 638 for driving the pair of movable pieces 396 of the third start port 394 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. A big hit game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 for driving the mouth opening / closing door 400b is connected, and these drive signals are outputted from the main control board 131.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 197 includes a CPU 608 as a central processing unit, a ROM 610 as a read-only memory, and a RAM 612 as a readable / writable memory.

  The payout control board 197 processes the command signal input from the main control board 131 and outputs a drive signal to the ball payout device 170 and the launch motor 192 connected to the launch control board 616. Thereby, the ball payout device 170 pays out the game ball according to the drive signal, and the firing motor 192 can fire the game ball according to the drive signal.

  Note that bi-directional communication is performed between the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197 via respective input / output interfaces. For example, when the main control board 131 transmits a prize ball command, it responds to this. An ACK signal is returned from the payout control board 197 to the main control board 131.

  The payout control board 197 is also connected with a lower tray full tank switch 614 that detects that the game balls stored in the lower tray 31 are full. “Please remove from the dish 31” is notified.

  Further, an external terminal board 618 is connected to the main control board 131 and the payout control board 197, and the winning statuses of the start ports 390, 392, 394 and the opening / closing devices 398, 400, normal symbols / special symbols are displayed. Various information such as the game state based on the fluctuating state and the lottery result is output to a hall computer or the like provided in the game facility.

  On the other hand, the peripheral substrate 660 includes a peripheral control substrate 662 and a display device control substrate 116 as shown in FIG. Note that only one-way communication is performed between the input / output interface and the input interface between the main control board 131 and the peripheral control board 662, and the main control board 131 to the peripheral control board 662. The command is sent to, but the reverse is not done. The power for operation is also supplied from the power supply board 195 to the peripheral board 660 via the power supply relay terminal plate 199.

  The peripheral control board 662 also has electronic components such as a CPU 664, a ROM 666, and a RAM 668, and a predetermined effect control program can be executed by these electronic components.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 662 is provided with a ROM 672 that stores a sound source that is the basis of voice and music, and a sound source IC 670 that outputs the sound and music according to the production content based on the sound source stored in the ROM 672. It has been.

  Note that bidirectional communication is performed between the peripheral control board 662 and the display device control board 116 with each input / output interface.

  On the other hand, a liquid crystal display (LCD) as an effect display device 115 is connected to the display device control board 116, and the display device control board 116 processes a command signal transmitted from the peripheral control board 662, A drive signal is output to the effect display device 115. More specifically, the display device control board 116 includes a CPU 678, a RAM 680, a ROM 682, a VDP 684, and an image ROM 686.

  The CPU 678 receives the command signal sent from the peripheral control board 662 via the input / output interface and performs arithmetic processing based on the command to control the VDP 684. The RAM 680 provides a work area for the CPU 678 and temporarily stores information included in the display command. The ROM 682 holds a program for the CPU 678 (for display control).

  A VDP (video display processor) 684 is a drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 115. A register is provided in the VDP 684, and it is possible to hold the operation mode of the VDP 684, setting information of various display functions, and the like. Then, the CPU 678 rewrites various information held in the register, whereby the display mode on the effect display device 115 can be changed variously. The image ROM 686 is a nonvolatile memory that stores various image data, and stores bitmap image data of various display patterns, JPEG image data for a background image, and the like.

  Further, a lamp driving board 688 and a frame decoration relay terminal board 674 are connected to the peripheral control board 662. Further, a center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 694 is connected to the lamp driving substrate 688 as a relay terminal plate. Further, a rotating body lower substrate 518 is connected to the center decoration driving unit relay terminal plate 694.

  In the input interface of the rotating body lower substrate 518, the game ball used for the production (that is, the game ball that has rolled the first production basket 470) A ball sorter motor sensor 500 for detecting whether or not it has been received is connected. Also connected to the output interface of the rotating body lower substrate 518 are a ball sorting motor 484 that repeatedly rotates the support shaft 474 clockwise and counterclockwise, and a rotating LED substrate 696 in which LEDs are arranged as electrical decorations. Has been. The rotating part LED substrate 696 is the rotating body upper substrate 514 and the light source substrate 512.

  The output interface of the lamp driving board 688 includes a panel decoration lamp 690, a center decoration lamp 304, a rotation motor 526 for rotating the effect accessory 430, and a rotation unit for detecting the rotation position of the effect accessory 430. A motor sensor 532 is connected. Thereby, the lamp drive board 688 can switch the lighting state of each of these lamps, and can detect the rotation operation and the rotation position of the effect accessory 430. Further, a discharge port detection sensor 692 for detecting a game ball discharged to the rear side of the game board 5 is connected to the input interface of the lamp drive board 688. The discharge port detection sensor 692 includes a ball discharge channel sensor 546, a first effect ball discharge channel sensor 548, and a second effect ball discharge channel sensor 550.

  The frame decoration relay terminal board 674 connected to the peripheral control board 662 is connected to the speakers 18, 57 connected to the front frame 4, the effect selection switch 60, the frame decoration lamp 676, and the like. In 662, the effect mode output to the effect display device 115 is switched based on the operation state of the effect selection switch 60, and a drive signal is output to the speakers 18, 57 and the frame decoration lamp 676.

[Functional configuration of main control board and peripheral control board]
This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a functional block diagram schematically showing a functional configuration of the peripheral control board in the main control board and the peripheral board.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the main control board 131 includes first special symbol lottery means 700, first special symbol display control means 802, first special symbol hold display control means 730, and first special symbol hold counter 703. Second special symbol lottery means 710, second special symbol display control means 804, second special symbol hold display control means 732, second special symbol hold counter 713, first special symbol lottery means 700 or 2 Hold control means 790 for controlling the lottery processing with special symbols and release of the hold, normal symbol lottery means 720, big hit game execution means 748, small hit game execution means 746, and opening / closing operation control means 744 Probability change game execution means 740, normal symbol display control means 806, normal symbol hold display control means 734, normal symbol hold counter 723, time-short game And execution means 742, and the third start hole opening and closing control means 728, and a command transmitting means 749.

  The first special symbol lottery means 700 extracts a random number by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 when a game ball wins the first starting opening 390 and is detected by the first starting opening sensor 644. The extracted random numbers are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 up to a first predetermined number (for example, four) by the hold control means 790 (that is, whether or not the extracted random numbers are hits) Is put on hold). When the hold is released by the hold control unit 790, the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 determines whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 is the normal symbol normal number stored in the ROM 604 and the random number value obtained by the first special symbol determining random number extracting means 702 in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state. Based on the hourly determination table 706, and in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the random number value acquired by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 and the special symbol probability variation time determination table stored in the ROM 604 708.

  The hold stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is predetermined when a winning game (long winning game or short winning game, which will be described later) is being executed, or when the special symbol is in a fluctuating state. If the start condition is not satisfied, it is not released. In other words, when the winning game is not being executed and the special symbol is not in the fluctuation state, the holding control means 790 releases the predetermined start condition as being satisfied. Further, when the random number is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the hold control unit 790 holds the lottery process for the start memory of the first special symbol or the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol. It also remembers whether it is pending. Thereby, the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are performed separately.

  In this embodiment, when winning “long win”, the jackpot game execution means 748 executes a long hit game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for 15 rounds, and when winning “short win”, the jackpot game The short hit game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for two rounds is executed by the execution means 748. When the “small hit” is won, a small hit game in which the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed twice by the small hit game executing means 746 is executed. Note that the operation mode of the opening / closing device 397 is the same in the short win game and the small hit game, but when the short win is won, the probability variation function is activated by the probability variation game execution means 740 (so-called probability variation game state). However, when winning a small hit, the probability variation function does not work. When the probability variation function is activated according to a specific winning such as a long win, the time-short function is also activated by the time-short game execution means 742 (a so-called time-short game state occurs).

  By the way, when the winning per winning is won, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is continuously executed for 15 rounds, whereby a long winning game in which a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out is performed. In addition, when winning a short win, a short win game is performed in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is continuously executed for two rounds. After the short hit game ends, a probability change game state by the probability change game execution means 740 occurs.

  The second special symbol lottery means 710 receives the second special symbol when the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 and is detected by the second starting port sensor 646 or the third starting port sensor 648. A random number is extracted by the hit determination random number extraction means 712. The extracted random number is held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 up to a second predetermined number (for example, four). Then, when the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is released, it is determined by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 whether or not the long win, short win or small win is won. The determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the normal symbol normal number stored in the ROM 604 and the random number value obtained by the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 in the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state. Based on the hourly determination table 706, and in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the random number value obtained by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 and the special symbol probability variation time determination table stored in the ROM 604 708.

  The order in which the game balls are detected by the first start port sensor 644, the second start port sensor 646, and the third start port sensor 648 is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 described later by the hold control means 790. Then, the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 perform lottery one by one based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In other words, based on the order stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the long winning, short winning or small winning is won. It is determined one by one. The lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed when the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol is established when a predetermined release condition is established, for example, a start condition is established. This is done by releasing the hold by the hold counter 713.

  As will be described later, the hold control means 790 according to this embodiment holds a lottery process (game on the first start port 390 side) based on winning in the first start port 390, and the second start port 392 or the second start port 392. The procedure for the on-hold digestion when both of the lottery processing (games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394) based on winning at the 3 start port 394 are present, the probability variation function is deactivated The time is different from the time of operation.

  That is, first, when the probability variation function is not in operation, the game on the first start port 390 side (specifically, whether or not the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether the game is successful) is determined by the second and third start ports 392 and 394. The release of the hold is controlled so as to be preferentially consumed over the game on the side (specifically, whether the second special symbol determination unit 714 determines whether or not the game is successful). As a result, when the probability variation function is inactive, as long as the game on the first start port 390 side is held, the game on the first start port 390 side and the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side Of these games, only the game on the first start port 390 side is continuously executed (second game suppression state).

  On the other hand, when the probability variation function is activated, the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 (specifically, whether or not the game is determined by the second special symbol determination unit 714) is played on the first start port 390 side. The release of the hold is controlled so as to be digested with priority over (specifically, the determination as to whether or not the first special symbol determination unit 704 determines whether or not it is true). As a result, when the probability variation function is activated, as long as the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is held, the game on the first start port 390 side and the second and third start ports Of the games on the 392 and 394 sides, only the games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 are continuously executed (first game suppression state).

  In addition, when digesting the suspension of the game on the first start opening 390 side (the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 700), when there are a plurality of such suspensions, the game balls are awarded in the order in which the game balls win the first start opening 390 Those holds are digested. Similarly, when there are a plurality of suspensions when the suspension of the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 (the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 710) is digested, the second and third start ports Those reservations are digested in the order in which the game balls win 392, 394.

  The determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed on the first special symbol display 84 by the first special symbol display control unit 802. The number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is displayed on the first special symbol hold indicator 88 by the first special symbol hold display control means 730.

  The determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 by the second special symbol display control unit 804. Further, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed on the second special symbol hold display 90 by the second special symbol hold display control means 732.

  The jackpot game execution means 748 and the jackpot game execution means 746 execute the jackpot game or the jackpot game based on the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, when it is determined that the long win is won, the long hit game is executed by the jackpot game executing means 748, and when it is determined that the short win is won, the short hit game is executed by the big hit game executing means 748. If it is determined that the small hit is won, the small hit game executing means 746 executes the small hit game. In the present embodiment, “long win and short win” are collectively referred to as “big hit”, and “long win game and short win game” are collectively referred to as “big hit game”.

  In the present embodiment, the long hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 are performed over a total of 15 rounds. Specifically, after the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for two rounds, the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is continued by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for 12 rounds, and continuously. And then the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for only one round. The short hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744 for two rounds, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is not performed. The small hit game is a game in which only the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed twice by the opening / closing operation control means 744.

  As described above, when the long hit game is executed, the number of opening / closing operations of the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398, and the short hit game and the small hit game are executed. The number of opening / closing operations of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed more than the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400.

  The opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed by operating the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed by the opening / closing operation control means 744. This is done by operating a jackpot game opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642.

  Specifically, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the opening / closing operation control means 744 performs the opening / closing device for effects up to two rounds. The opening / closing solenoid 568 is actuated to open / close the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b. From the 3rd round to the 14th round, the opening / closing operation control means 744 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing solenoid 642 to open / close the jackpot gaming big prize opening / closing door 400b. Further, only for the 15th round, the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568 for the effect is operated by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the opening / closing door 398b for the effect is opened / closed. On the other hand, if the lottery result determined by the first special symbol determination unit 704 and the second special symbol determination unit 714 is short hit, the opening / closing operation control unit 744 operates the effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568, The operation for opening and closing the large winning opening / closing door 398b for performance is performed only for two rounds.

  When a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the number of winning balls is counted by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640. In addition, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the winning game ball is detected by the effect opening / closing device count sensor 572 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device count sensor 640. In response, a game ball is paid out as a prize ball by the ball payout device 170.

  If the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a small hit, the opening / closing operation control means 744 causes the opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid for effects to be generated. 568 is operated to open and close the big winning game opening / closing door 400b twice.

  In the present embodiment, opening and closing of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed depending on whether the lottery result determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small win. The operation mode is the same. However, in the normal gaming state (that is, any one of the jackpot gaming state, the probability variation gaming state, and the short-time gaming state), if the short winning game is won, the gaming state after the short winning game is over is a big hit However, in the case of winning a small hit, the gaming state after the small winning game is finished does not change (that is, the normal gaming state remains). Therefore, when the opening / closing operation of the production grand prize opening / closing door 398b is performed two rounds or twice, it is difficult for the player to determine whether it is short win or small hit, The probability of winning a jackpot differs between the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, the player cannot discriminate whether the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state or the normal gaming state, and the interest is enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing operation processing of the effect opening / closing device 398 (specifically, the effect opening / closing device) when the long hit game is executed, when the short hit game is executed, and when the small hit game is executed The number of open / close operations 398) is shared. Thereby, the data amount of the ROM 604 of the main control board 131 can be reduced. In particular, when the short hit game is executed and when the small hit game is executed, the opening / closing time of the effect opening / closing device 398 is also shared, so that the tables of the short hit game and the small hit game are shared. As a result, the data amount of the ROM 604 can be reduced.

  Here, “round” means that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses and a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls) of game balls wins when a long winning game and a short winning game are executed. It means a unit in which the opening / closing device for effect 398 or the opening / closing device for jackpot game 400 is opened / closed by satisfying any of the conditions. Therefore, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 when the small hit game is being executed is not referred to as “round”. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game is much longer than the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 and the big hit game opening / closing device 400 per round in the long hit game. It is a short time. Note that the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per time in the small hit game is substantially the same as the opening time of the effect opening / closing device 398 per round in the short hit game.

  The probability variation game execution means 740 increases the probability of winning a jackpot in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 in the game after the long hit game or short hit game is executed. Execute. Specifically, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol validity determination unit 704 and the second special symbol validity determination unit 714 is performed based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, “probability change game” means that the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determine whether or not the special symbol probability change time determination table 708 and special symbol probability change time, respectively. It means a game played based on the hit determination table 708. A gaming state in which a probability variation game is being performed is referred to as a “probability variation gaming state”. Here, the special symbol probability change per hour determination table 708 is set to have a higher probability of winning per long and short than the special symbol normal per hour determination table 706.

  In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the long winning game is executed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 or the second special symbol determination unit 714, for example, after the long winning game is executed, for example, one half. If the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 determines that the short win game is executed, the probability change will occur with a probability of 100%. It becomes a gaming state. On the other hand, when it is determined that a small hit is made by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 or the second special symbol appropriate / bad determination means 714, the game state is changed after the small hit game executing means 746 is executed. There is nothing.

  When the game ball passes through the passing gate 402 and is detected by the gate sensor 630, the normal symbol lottery means 720 extracts random numbers by the normal symbol per-determination random number extracting means 722. The extracted random numbers are held up to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 4) by the normal symbol hold counter 723. When the normal symbol hold counter 723 releases the hold, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment means 724 determines whether or not the hold is made. The determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 is based on the random number value acquired by the random number extraction means for normal symbol determination 722 and the normal symbol normal time determination table 726 stored in the ROM 604 in the normal gaming state. If it is in the short-time gaming state, it is performed based on the random number value obtained by the random number extraction means 722 for determining the normal symbol per symbol and the table 727 for determining the normal symbol per short time stored in the ROM 604.

  The normal symbol display control means 806 displays the determination result by the normal symbol appropriateness determination unit 724 on the normal symbol display unit 82. Further, the number of holds by the normal symbol hold counter 723 is displayed on the normal symbol hold display 92 by the normal symbol hold display control means 734.

  The short time game executing means 742 executes the short time game for shortening the lottery time in the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720. In the probability variation game state, a time-short game by the time-short game execution unit 742 may be performed together with the probability variation game by the probability variation game execution unit 740.

  In the present embodiment, the “short-time gaming state” means a gaming state in which the normal symbol winning / non-winning determination unit 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate based on the normal symbol short-time / hit determination table 727. Here, the normal symbol time per hour determination table 727 is set so that the lottery time is shorter than the normal symbol normal time per hour determination table 726. It should be noted that the normal symbol normal hour determination table 726 and the normal symbol short time determination table 727 both have a winning probability set as high as 90%, for example. Accordingly, when the normal symbol determination unit 724 determines whether the normal symbol is appropriate or not based on the normal symbol short-time hit determination table 727, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the third start port 394 is opened and closed. It becomes easy to win a game ball. When a game ball wins at the third start port 394, the game ball is paid out by the ball payout device 170, so that it is possible to play the game without reducing the game balls as much as possible during the short-time game state.

  Here, the lottery in the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 will be described with reference to Tables 1 and 2. Table 1 is a table showing winning probabilities and random numbers. Table 2 is a table for determining the type of jackpot game when the jackpot is won.

  As shown in Table 1, one of the 631 random numbers from 0 to 630 is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol and the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol. First, it is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 based on Table 1 whether or not the extracted random number value is won. Specifically, first, the gaming state is determined. If the gaming state is the normal gaming state, 7 and 317 are random numbers, and if the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, 7, 37, 67, 97, 127, 157. , 187, 217, 247, 277, 307, 337, 367, 397, 427, 457, 487, 517, 547, 577 are jackpot random numbers. Note that the same table is used according to the gaming state in the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the hit determination by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. That is, when the determination of winning by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 is performed using the special symbol probability change per-time determination table 708, the determination of winning by the second special symbol probability change determination means 714 is also performed at the time of special symbol probability change. When the winning determination table 708 is used and the winning determination by the first special symbol success / failure determining means 704 is performed using the special symbol normal time winning determination table 706, the second special symbol winning / failing determining means 714 is performed. The determination of winning by using the special symbol normal hour determination table 706 is also performed.

  When it is determined that the extracted random number is a jackpot random number, the type of jackpot is determined based on a later-described symbol random number (first suppression symbol, second suppression symbol) or the like, and the determined jackpot is corresponded. A jackpot game is played.

Here, as a type of jackpot according to this embodiment, largely,
-After the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is performed, the first suppression that triggers the game on the first start port 390 side to be executed as a postponement of the game on the second, third start port 392, 394 side Winning (big hit corresponding to the first suppression symbol).
-After the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot is performed, the second suppression that triggers the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 to be executed as a postponement of the game on the first start port 390 side Win (a jackpot corresponding to the second suppression symbol).
Are classified into two jackpots.

  Although this will also be described later, in this embodiment, the above-described probability variation function is activated when it is won for the first suppression of the two jackpots. . Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled to the first game suppression state in which the game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed, it is also controlled to the probability variation game state in which the probability variation function is activated. . Conversely, when the probability variation gaming state in which the probability variation function is activated is controlled, the first game suppression state in which the game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed is also controlled.

  Further, in this embodiment, the above-described probability variation function that is activated in this manner is deactivated in response to the winning of the second suppression of the two jackpots. . Therefore, in this embodiment, the game state in which the probability variation function is deactivated when the second and third start ports 392 and 394 are controlled to the second game suppression state in which the game is suppressed. It is also controlled (short time gaming state or normal gaming state). Conversely, when the game state is controlled such that the probability variation function is inactive (time-short game state or normal game state), the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is suppressed. It is also controlled in the second game suppression state.

However, as shown in Table 2, from the viewpoint of the number of balls that can be expected in a jackpot game, the second suppression per embodiment according to this embodiment is:
(1) The jackpot game time is long, and a long jackpot where a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out (hereinafter referred to as “ordinary jackpot”).
In contrast to the first suppression per this embodiment,
(2) The jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the long win is referred to as “long win game”) is long, and a long hit where a large amount of game balls can be expected to be paid out (hereinafter referred to as “probable change per short length”). Called).
In addition, as a short hit that the time of jackpot game is short and the payout of the game ball is more difficult than the long hit,
(3) “Normal short win” (only a short win game state does not occur) after the jackpot game (hereinafter, the jackpot game corresponding to the short win is referred to as a “short win game”), in which only the probability change game state occurs.
(4) “Short per hit with short time at probability change” in which both the probability variation gaming state and the short time gaming state occur after the short winning game ends.
Such a hit is prepared.

  On the other hand, if the random number extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special symbol determination random number extraction means 712 is not a winning random number, whether or not a small hit is won is displayed. 1 is determined by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Specifically, regardless of the gaming state, 16, 92, 133, 321, 465, 501, 568, and 610 are small random numbers. When it is determined that the extracted random number is a small hit random number, the small hit game is executed by the small hit game execution means 746. As described above, according to Table 1, the winning probability for jackpot is 2/631, and the winning probability for jackpot is 8/631.

  In this way, even if the jackpot is not won, it can be expected to win the jackpot. In addition, since the probability of winning the jackpot is set higher than the probability of winning the jackpot, every time a player wins the jackpot, the player always feels that he has won the jackpot. It can have, and can suppress the fall of interest. Furthermore, since the player will continue to play the game, it will also benefit the hall where the operating rate of the pachinko machine is improved. In addition, in response to the random numbers extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702 or the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712, the big win winning is determined prior to the small winning winning determination. The In other words, if the winning of the small win is first, the winning determination of the big win will not be performed if the winning of the small win is made, but the determination of the big win is made prior to the determination of the small win winning as in this embodiment. If the winning is determined, the jackpot winning is always performed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, since the determination of the big win is made only when the big win is not won, the big win and the small win do not overlap. If the big win and the small win are duplicated, it will be necessary to decide which one will be the winner and it will be complicated in terms of control, but the big win was not won as in this embodiment. The control load can be reduced by making a determination of winning a small hit only occasionally. In addition, two lottery opportunities for jackpot determination and small hit determination are given, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the tables used for the hit determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 do not necessarily need to be the same table. Different tables may be used for each of the determination units 714. Even in such a case, if the probability variation gaming state, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 both use the probability variation gaming state table, and the normal gaming state For example, it is preferable that a table for a normal gaming state is used for both the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714. Thereby, even if the starting opening where a game ball wins is different, the same gaming state is obtained, so that the game is not complicated, and consequently, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination unit 704, the second special symbol determination unit 714, and the normal symbol determination unit 724 does not necessarily include a deviation. For example, if the small hit game is a game in which the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for a very short time, if the big hit is not won, all may be won.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and when determining whether or not the jackpot is won when the jackpot is not won, a remarkable effect is brought about. In addition, it may be drawn in a lump on whether or not the big win and the small win are won.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the winning by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is won per short time for the probable change time and when winning for the short time for the probable change time, the short time for the probable change is given. The gaming state after the long winning game and the short winning game with the probability change time is finished becomes the probability changing game state. It can be understood from the display mode on the effect display device 115 that the gaming state at this time is the probability changing game state. On the other hand, when the normal short win is won, the game state after the normal short win game ends becomes the probability change game state, but the display on the effect display device 115 indicates that the game state at this time is the probability change game state. It cannot be grasped from the aspect. That is, a display mode in which the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the probability-changing game state after the normal short hit game ends and the display mode displayed on the effect display device 115 in the normal game state are similar to each other. It becomes. Here, the “similar display mode” may be the same or similar so that the player cannot grasp whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the probability-changing gaming state.

  The third start opening / closing control means 728 operates the normal electric accessory solenoid 638 to open / close the pair of movable pieces 396 when the lottery result determined by the normal symbol determination unit 724 is correct. When the pair of movable pieces 396 opens and closes, it becomes easy for a game ball to win a prize at the third start port 394. When the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the closed state, it is impossible to win a game ball in the third start port 394, or a game ball win in the third start port 394 is the first start. Although it is more difficult than winning a game ball to the mouth 390 and the second starting port 392, when the pair of movable pieces 396 are in the open state, the winning of the game ball to the third starting port 394 is as follows. It becomes easier than winning a game ball to the start port 390 and the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 is configured more difficult than the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390.

  The command transmission means 749 transmits the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure judgment means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure judgment means 714 and information related to the lottery result to the peripheral board 660. The “information related to the lottery result” corresponds to an effect time or the like performed in the effect display device 115.

  The peripheral control board 662 includes command receiving means 750, effect lottery means 760, effect accessory operation executing means 762, and effect opening / closing device state display control means 764.

  The command receiving unit 750 receives the lottery result and information related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 131 by the first special symbol acceptability judging unit 704 or the second special symbol acceptability judging unit 714.

  The effect lottery means 760 determines by lottery whether or not the effect by the effect item 430 is performed. As a result of the lottery by the effect lottery means 760, if it is determined that the effect by the effector 430 is to be performed, the effect lottery means 760 is connected to the ball distribution unit via the lamp drive board 688 and the center decoration drive part relay terminal plate 694. The motor 484 is actuated to execute the effect by the effect item 430. However, since the effect by the effect item 430 is performed using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398, such an effect is not performed when the game ball is not won in the effect opening / closing device 398. .

  The effect accessory operation executing means 762 controls the effect accessory 430 via the lamp driving board 688 such as rotational driving of the effect agent 430.

  The effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 controls the display mode of the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 688. Specifically, when the opening / closing operation control means 744 operates the jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642 to open / close the effect big prize opening / closing door 398b, such information is transmitted by the command transmission means 749 to the peripheral control board 662. Sent to. Information transmitted from the command transmission unit 749 to the peripheral control board 662 is received by the command reception unit 750.

  When the command receiving means 750 receives information related to the opening / closing operation of the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b, the effect opening / closing apparatus state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing apparatus state display lamp 651 via the lamp driving board 688. Control the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, when the command transmission unit 749 transmits information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the operation of the effect large winning opening / closing door 398b, the peripheral control board 662 transmits the information. Then, the display control is performed so that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is displayed in green. When information indicating that the effect opening / closing device 398 has been changed from the open state to the closed state by the operation of the effect grand prize opening / closing door 398b is transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 by the command transmitting means 749, the effect opening / closing is performed. Display control is performed so that the device status display lamp 651 displays red. That is, display control is performed in green if the stage performance prize opening opening / closing door 398b is in the open state and red in the closed state.

  As described above, the effect opening / closing device state display control means 764 causes the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened by the opening / closing operation control means 744 and when it is closed. Display control is performed in different display modes. Thereby, since the opening / closing state of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be grasped, the player cannot grasp that the effect opening / closing device 398 is open even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is open, It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the inability to aim the game ball at the effect opening / closing device 398.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, during the jackpot game, there are cases where the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 opens and closes and the effect opening / closing device 398 opens and closes, and it is understood which game ball should be won. hard. In particular, in the case where a stage opening / closing device 398 is provided in addition to the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 provided conventionally, the player wins a game ball in the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 during the jackpot gaming. Try to let them. Therefore, when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened instead of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, the player feels confused, cannot know where to win the game ball, and is less interesting. In addition, an opening / closing device for production 398 is provided on the upstream side of the production display device 115 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, and further, the direction in which the production prize winning opening / closing door 398b intersects the board surface of the game board 5 is provided. When it is movable, it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the production large prize opening opening / closing door 398b. Therefore, a situation may occur in which a game ball is missed by winning the effect opening / closing device 398 even though the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state. Accordingly, the display opening / closing device 398 is opened when the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is controlled to be displayed in different display modes when the display opening / closing device 398 is open and when it is closed. In spite of the fact, it is possible to avoid the game opening / closing device 398 from winning a game ball and to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the effect opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398, the player only has to hit a game ball aiming at a place emitting green light. Thus, even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided in a place where it is difficult to grasp the position, such as above the effect display device 115 as in the present embodiment, the player can aim the game ball at any place. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not it is necessary to enter, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Note that “the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided so as to be displayed in the effect opening / closing device 398” means that the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 is provided in the effect opening / closing device 398. For example, as in the present embodiment, the back wall in the production opening / closing device 398 is a transparent member, and the inside of the production opening / closing device 398 is lit from behind the transparent member. Also good. That is, it is only necessary that the inside of the effect opening / closing device 398 can be displayed. Further, “within the effect opening / closing device 398” means a region on the downstream side of the effect large prize opening opening / closing door 398b in the flow direction of the game ball.

  Further, since an opening is formed on the front side of the stage winning prize opening 398a when viewed from the player, a game ball received in the stage winning prize opening 398a is placed on a glass plate attached to the window frame 39. Can be visually recognized. Thereby, it can be ascertained that the game ball has been received in the stage prize winning opening 398a. As described above, the combination of the fact that it is possible to grasp that the game ball can be received in the stage winning prize opening 398a and the fact that the game ball can be received in the stage prize winning opening 398a can be used. Even if the effect opening / closing device 398 is provided separately from the device 400 and the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened in place of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the display opening / closing device status display lamp 651 is displayed in green when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the open state, and is displayed in red when the display opening / closing device 398 is in the closed state. However, the mode is not limited as long as it is possible to grasp whether the production opening / closing device 398 is in the open state or the closed state. For example, the effect opening / closing device state display lamp 651 may be controlled to be turned off when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in a closed state, and may be controlled to be turned on when the effect opening / closing device 398 is in an open state.

[About the operation of the director for the production]
FIG. 54A, which will be described based on FIGS. 52 to 54, is a front view showing the internal configuration of the accessory container of the effect for the effect, and the first effect 樋 is directed toward the first performance exit. It is a figure which shows being inclined below. FIG. 54 (b) is a front view showing the internal structure of the accessory container of the effect accessory, and shows that the first effect 樋 is inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port. FIG.

  First, in the lamp driving board 688, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or reset, it is confirmed whether or not a detection signal of the rotary motor sensor 532 that detects the rotation position of the effect accessory 430 is received. If there is no detection signal from the rotation unit motor sensor 532, the effect accessory 430 is driven to rotate at a position where the inside of the effect rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430 cannot be visually recognized. As a result, as shown in FIG. 10, the “diva legend” appears in front of the production role 430.

  Thereafter, in accordance with the change in the gaming state, a control command for effecting rotational drive control of the effect accessory 430 from the peripheral control board 662 (specifically, the effect accessory action execution means 762) to the lamp drive board 688 is issued. When transmitted, the lamp driving board 688 drives the rotating part motor 526 so that the figure 434 inside the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430 can be seen as shown in FIG. The effect accessory 430 is rotated. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the figure 434 arranged inside the accessory rotating body 432 of the effect accessory 430. When the game ball received from the effect opening / closing device 398 is guided to the first effect basket 470, the effect using the game ball can be visually recognized.

  When the control command for effect driving control is sent from the peripheral control board 662 to the lamp driving board 688, the lamp driving board 688 moves the support shaft 474 in the β direction. And reciprocatingly rotate in the γ direction.

  When the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the one hand 434 a of the figure 434 rotates around the support shaft 474 with respect to the figure 434 as the support shaft 474 rotates. That is, when the support shaft 474 rotates clockwise (β direction in the figure), the one hand 434a and the first effect rod 470 are rotated in the β direction with respect to the figure 434 around the support shaft 474 as a rotation center. To do. Further, when the support shaft 474 rotates counterclockwise (γ direction in the drawing), the one hand 434a and the first performance rod 470 are moved in the γ direction with respect to the figure 434 around the support shaft 474 as a rotation center. Rotate. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the first effect 樋 470 is inclined downward toward the first performance exit 476 and the first effect 樋 470 is shown in FIG. 54 (b). Are repeatedly inclined downward toward the second effect 樋 induction port 478.

  If the game ball that won the stage opening / closing device 398 is present on the first stage 樋 470, the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocally rotated clockwise and counterclockwise, Roll on the 1 stage 470 in the left-right direction. In other words, the support shaft 474 rotates in the opposite direction different from the previous rotation direction before the game ball of the first performance rod 470 is guided to the first performance port 476 or the second performance rod guide port 478. As a result, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first performance rod 470. When the support shaft 474 rotates to the rotation limit in the γ direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 54A), the game ball is guided to the first performance port 476. . On the other hand, when the support shaft 474 rotates to the rotation limit in the clockwise direction and is held for a certain period of time (if it is held for a certain period of time in the mode of FIG. 54 (b)), the game ball is in the second stage 樋 induction port 478 Led to.

  When a game ball that rolls on the first performance pole 470 is guided to the first performance exit 476, the game ball is discharged behind the game board 5. On the other hand, when a game ball that rolls on the first effect rod 470 is guided to the second effect rod guide port 478, the game ball falls on the right end 472a of the second effect rod 472, and from the right end 472a to the left end 472b. Roll towards Then, the game ball rolling from the right end 472a toward the left end 472b is guided to the second performance port 480.

  That is, when the support shaft 474 is repeatedly reciprocated in the β direction and the γ direction, the first effect 樋 470 is a game ball that rolls on the first effect 樋 470 as the first effect outlet 476 or the second effect. It swings like a seesaw so as to be guided to one of the ports 480. As a result, only one game ball rolls on the first performance bowl 470 that is swung like a seesaw, so that it is likely to be accepted by the first performance outlet 476 or the second performance outlet 480. Sometimes, the player will feel a sense of thrill, and the excitement will be enhanced.

  Note that the distribution mechanism 438 distributes only one game ball to the effect object 430 even when a plurality of game balls are received from the effect opening / closing device 398. There is only one game ball rolling in a seesaw shape.

  In addition, the effect by the effect using the game ball 430 (that is, the effect of whether the game ball is received at the first performance port 476 or the second performance port 480) is transmitted by the command transmission means 749. Is performed based on the lottery result received by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714.

  Specifically, when performing with the director 430, which one of the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 is to be the winning performance outlet (or an outlier)? Is determined by the effect lottery means 760. On the other hand, the effect display device 115 performs an effect suggesting which one of the first performance exit 476 and the second performance exit 480 is a winning game ball. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which one of the first performance outlet 476 and the second performance outlet 480 is a winning game ball. Therefore, when an effect by the effect-use accessory 430 is being performed, the player can easily grasp which performance exit is the winning performance exit, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a short win or a small hit, a game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 470 is hit. The stage is directed so that it is led to the stage of the stage and the side of the stage that has been decided. On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is out of play, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 470 is out of play. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the determined exit. In this way, the winning lottery means 760 determines the winning performance point and the off-performing performance port for each performance by the effect material 430. In other words, the winning performance outlet and the extraordinary performance outlet are variable. Thereby, a monotonous game can be avoided, and when a performance is performed by the performance object 430, the player is attracted attention to which performance exit is a hit, and the interest is enhanced.

  In addition, “winning performance exit” means a performance exit indicating that the lottery result by the lottery means may be advantageous to the player, and “out of performance exit” means the lottery means. It is a performance exit that shows that the lottery result by is more unfavorable than the result advantageous to the player. In the present embodiment, “the lottery result by the lottery means may be a result advantageous to the player” means “short win or short in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710”. It means “winning the jackpot”. That is, “possibility” means that if the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short hit, a probable game state is generated, which is advantageous to the player. Can do. In addition, if it is a small hit, it is based on the fact that it cannot be said that the result is advantageous to the player because the normal gaming state continues.

  In addition, the effect using the game ball by the effect object 430 is that the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is short win or small hit, This is performed after a series of opening / closing operations (two opening / closing operations in the present embodiment) of the effect opening / closing device 398 by the opening / closing operation control means 744 is completed. Specifically, after the short win game and the small hit game are executed, the symbols of the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 after the occurrence of the next gaming state are changing (the first special symbol display). This is performed after the lighting / flashing display of the symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is started until the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is displayed. In this specification, the time required for symbol variation is referred to as variation time.

  The game balls that have won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened and held are held by the distribution mechanism 438 until the effect by the effecting accessory 430 is performed. It falls to the accessory rotating body 432 from the drop opening 536b at the timing when the production is performed.

  It should be noted that a certain amount of time or more is required to produce an effect using the game ball by the effect object 430. On the other hand, when the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 and the second special symbol determination unit 714 is not accompanied by a so-called reach effect, details will be described later. The variation time varies depending on the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713. For example, if the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 or more, the change time is relatively short. If the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is 1 or less, the first special symbol is set. The fluctuation time is longer than when the number of holds by the hold counter 703 is 2 or more. Similarly, if the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 immediately after the start of fluctuation is 2 or more, a relatively short fluctuation time is obtained. If the number of holdings by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is 1 or less, the second special symbol holding counter 713 has a second holding time. The fluctuation time is longer than when the number of holds by the symbol hold counter 703 is 2 or more. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time in the reach production and the fluctuation time in the case where the number of holdings by the special symbol hold counters 703 and 713 is 1 or less are longer than the time required for the production using the game ball by the production role 430. It is getting longer. On the other hand, the variation time when the number of holds by the special symbol hold counters 703 and 713 is 2 or more is shorter than the time required for the play using the game ball by the play accessory 430. Therefore, for the effect using the game ball by the effect agent 430, when the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is derived to the first special symbol display 84, and the second special symbol display 82. If the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is derived, it is executed when the condition that the reach occurs or the number of reservations by the special symbol reservation counters 703 and 713 is 1 or less is satisfied. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is long hit, the effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is 15 rounds or more. To be done. Here, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed up to two rounds by the opening / closing operation control means 744, and the game that won the effect opening / closing device 398 at the timing when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 was executed. All the balls are discharged behind the pachinko machine 1 by the sorting mechanism 438. After the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed for two rounds, the opening / closing operation control means 744 continues the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 until the 14th round. Since the opening / closing operation of the device 398 is not performed, a game ball cannot be received in the effect opening / closing device 398. Then, after the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is performed, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is performed again by the opening / closing operation control means 744 only for the first round of the 15th round. The game balls received in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round are held by the distribution mechanism 438 until the effect using the game balls by the effect actor 430 is started. It falls to the accessory rotating body 432 from the drop opening 536b at the timing when the performance is performed.

  Here, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is a long win, the timing at which an effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is performed. As described above, it is after the 15th round in the long game. Specifically, it is performed at any timing from when a game ball is won to the effect opening / closing device 398 until a game state that occurs after the end of the long hit game is started. Therefore, if, for example, a probability variation game state occurs after the long hit game, an effect using the game ball by the effect accessory 430 is performed at least before the probability variation game state occurs.

  Further, in the effect display device 115, when the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 is short win or small hit, and after the long hit gaming state occurs Special effects will be performed before the game state occurs. Thereby, when a special effect is performed on the effect display device 115, the player has a higher expectation that a jackpot gaming state will be generated, and the interest will be enhanced.

  As described above, the game ball rolling on the first performance pole 470 is changed to the first performance exit 476 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 according to the determination of the lottery result. The performance is performed so as to be guided to the second performance exit 480. When a special effect is performed on the effect display device 115, the game ball rolling on the first effect 樋 470 is guided to the winning performance exit, and the special effect is not performed on the effect display device 115. You will be guided to the exit. Therefore, when the effect by the effect item 430 is being performed, the player plays the game with a sense of expectation that the game ball will be received at the winning performance exit.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the determination of the lottery result by the first special symbol success / failure determination unit 704 or the second special symbol success / failure determination unit 714 is a short win or a small hit, the game opening / closing device 398 is played with a game ball. If is not accepted, the effect using the game ball is not performed. Accordingly, the player is willing to win a game ball in the effect opening / closing device 398 when the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened. Thereby, it is possible not only to see the unilateral performance from the pachinko machine 1, but also to have an emotion that the player himself participates in the game, and the interest is enhanced. Furthermore, since the accessory guidance path 436, the first effect kite 470, and the second effect kite 472 are all made of a transparent member so that the game balls rolling on them can be seen, the game balls produce the effect. Since it is possible to grasp a series of trends from winning the opening / closing device 398 to being accepted by the first performance exit 476 or the second performance exit 480, the interest is further enhanced.

  Note that the members of the accessory guide path 436, the first effect rod 470, and the second effect rod 472 may be transparent to such an extent that the game balls rolling on them can be visually recognized. That is, a semi-transparent member may be used as long as it can visually recognize the rolling game ball.

[About the display area of the effect display device]
This will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. FIG. 55 and FIG. 56 are views of the effect display device as viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 55, the effect display device 115 includes a first determination result display area 115a, a second determination result display area 115b, a common symbol display area 115c, and a hold display area 1150. .

  The first determination result display area 115a corresponds to the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700, more specifically, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 displayed on the first special symbol display unit 84. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The second determination result display area 115b corresponds to the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710, more specifically, the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 displayed on the second special symbol display unit 86. This is the area where the results are displayed.

  The first determination result display area 115 a and the second determination result display area 115 b are arranged in the lower left area of the effect display device 115. Each has a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of colors, and a lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710 according to the display pattern displayed after performing a predetermined effect. The result is derived. However, the lottery results are not derived simultaneously in the first determination result display area 115a and the second determination result display area 115b.

  The common symbol display area 115c is an area for deriving one of the lottery results of the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710. In the common symbol display area 115c, one symbol group composed of a plurality of (for example, three) symbol strings is displayed. After the variation effect of this one symbol group is performed, the combination of symbols that have stopped is displayed. The lottery result is derived. The variation effect time of one symbol group is the same as or substantially the same as the above-described variation time. The common symbol display area 115c occupies at least two-thirds or more of all display areas in the effect display device 115. The first determination result display area 115a, the second determination result display area 115b, and the hold display area 1150 are clearly partitioned. Thus, the player grasps the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 by a combination of one symbol group displayed in the common symbol display area 115c.

  The lottery result derived to the common symbol display area 115c is determined based on the game state (first game suppression state, second game suppression state) determined according to a later-described symbol random number acquired at the time of the big win. The start memory (game on the first start port 390 side) and the start memory of the second special symbol (game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394) are derived in priority order. That is, since the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 are not derived simultaneously, one symbol group includes the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 700. It functions as a common symbol for deriving a lottery result in the symbol lottery means 710. Thereby, even if the lottery is performed by both the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the second special symbol lottery means 710, it becomes a very clear configuration as seen from the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. .

  The hold display area 1150 is arranged in the lower right area of the effect display device 115. The hold display area 1150 has eight hold storage display sections, a first hold storage display section 1150a to an eighth hold storage display section 1150h, arranged in a line in the left-right direction. In addition, the first reserved storage display unit 1150a, the second reserved storage display unit 1150b, the third reserved storage display unit 1150c, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1150d, the fifth reserved storage display unit 1150e, the sixth The on-hold storage display unit 1150f, the seventh on-hold storage display unit 1150g, and the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1150h are regularly arranged in this order in the left-right direction, and the derivation to the common symbol display area 115c is as described above. Derived in the order listed. Thereby, the order derived | led-out to the common symbol display area 115c can be grasped | ascertained clearly.

  That is, each of the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h in the on-hold display area 1150 holds the lottery (game on the first start port 390 side) by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 ( This is an area where the hold of the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side) can be displayed one by one. The hold display area 1150 displays the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 in a manner that can be easily grasped visually. Therefore, by referring to the hold display area 1150, the player can check the current total number of reserved special symbols (total number of start memories).

  Note that the random number held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (the lottery process by the first special symbol lottery means 900) may be referred to as the start memory of the first special symbol (or the hold of the first special symbol). . In addition, the random number held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 (the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 910) may be referred to as the start storage of the second special symbol (or the holding of the second special symbol). .

  In this embodiment, the upper limit value (first predetermined number) of holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 and the upper limit value (second predetermined number) of holding by the second special symbol holding counter 713 are the same. Specifically, the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are both “4” based on the pre-suspended digestion (“3” based on the post-suspended digestion). Therefore, the hold display area 1150 also has eight hold storage display sections 1150a to 1150h in order to be able to display the maximum holdable number (here, eight) including both special symbol hold counters 703 and 713. ing.

  The reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h are regularly arranged in a straight line in a line in this order in the left-right and up-down directions, and the lottery result is derived in the area where the decorative symbol 1153 is displayed (common symbol display region). Are derived according to this order. That is, the lottery hold corresponding to each hold storage display unit from the first hold (hold corresponding to the first hold storage display unit 1150a) to the end hold (for example, the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h) in order. It will be derived in the order of the hold. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp the order in which the lottery results are derived in the common symbol display area. It is to be noted that the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h are regularly displayed in this order in a straight line connected in a line in the left-right direction in the normal gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state. Although the time-short gaming state will be described later, eight on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h are displayed side by side vertically.

  Each of the reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h in the hold display area 1150 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713. Is displayed in any one of the second display modes indicating that the image is displayed. Since each of the storage storage display units 1150a to 1150h is a linear display unit that is regularly arranged in a line, when both the first display mode and the second display mode are displayed, The display mode and the second display mode are regularly displayed in a straight line in a row. Each of the reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h has either the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 when neither the first display mode nor the second display mode is shown. Are also displayed in a non-display mode indicating that they are not on hold (that is, nothing is displayed for the hold and a background image is displayed).

  Each display mode will be described. In FIG. 55, the display modes of the first reserved storage display unit 1150a and the second reserved storage display unit 1150b are the first display modes. Further, the third reserved storage display unit 1150c is the second display mode. Further, the display mode of the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d to the eighth hold storage display unit 1150h is a non-display mode. However, the fourth reserved storage display unit 1150d to the eighth reserved storage display unit 1150h in this non-display mode are indicated by white two-dot chain lines for convenience, but are not displayed so that the background image is actually displayed. This is an embodiment (the same applies to FIGS. 56 and 58 to 60).

  In the present embodiment, the first display mode indicates that an image in which white numerals are written in a red background frame is shown, and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. The second display mode means that a character is displayed and held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. In this way, the display mode is different between the display mode that means being held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the display mode that is held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. .

  In FIG. 56, all of the first on-hold storage display unit 1150a to the eighth on-hold storage display unit 1150h are not displayed. Here, the non-display mode means that neither the first display mode nor the second display mode is displayed. In the present embodiment, the background image is left as it is in each of the reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h. Is displayed. That is, when all of the reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150 are in the non-display mode, information related to the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not displayed.

[Functional configuration of display device control board]
FIG. 57 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the display device control board in the peripheral board. As shown in FIG. 57, the display device control board 116 includes a first special symbol image display control means 851, a second special symbol image display control means 852, an effect image display control means 800, and a merge hold display control means 860. And a merged reservation order storage means 870, a first special symbol reservation number storage means 872, a second special symbol reservation number storage means 874, and an effect reservation count means 855. The merge hold display control means 860 further includes a holdable information image display control means 8601, a first hold information image display control means 8602, a second hold information image display control means 8603, an identification code image display control means 8604, and a merge hold order. Image display control means 8605 is included. The display device control board 116 receives a command transmitted from the main control board 131 via the command receiving means 750 of the peripheral control board 662.

  The first special symbol image display control means 851 derives and displays the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 after performing a predetermined effect in the first determination result display area 115a.

  The second special symbol image display control means 852 derives and displays the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 after performing a predetermined effect in the second determination result display area 115b.

  The effect image display control means 800 specifies that the command receiving means 750 has won the first start opening 390 and the second and third start openings 392, 394 from the main control board 131. One of the lottery results of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived and displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. However, the effect image display control means 800 has a lottery process (game on the first start opening 390 side) by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and a lottery process (second and third start openings) by the second special symbol lottery means 710. 392 and 394 side games) are put on hold, the first game state (first game suppression state, second game suppression state) determined according to a later-described symbol random number acquired at the time of jackpot One of the lottery process by the special symbol lottery means 700 and the lottery process by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is selectively performed.

  In the common symbol display area 115c, when a predetermined effect for deriving a lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 (that is, a variable display of symbols) is performed, the second special symbol lottery means 710 A predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result is not performed. Further, when the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is performed, the predetermined effect for deriving the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is not performed.

  The merge hold display control means 860 is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the derivation order of the lottery results derived by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived in the common symbol display area 115c. The hold number information and the hold number information held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are displayed and controlled so that they can be recognized in the hold display area 1150. In this embodiment, since the start memory of one special symbol is derived in preference to the start memory of other special symbols according to the gaming state, the derivation order of the lottery results displayed in the hold display area 1150 and the hold As for the number information, the one special symbol is displayed on the front side in the hold display area 1150 with respect to the other special symbols, and details will be described later.

  Further, the merge hold display control means 860 performs display control so that the hold related information relating to the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 can be recognized in the hold display area 1150.

  Here, the “holding related information” is, for example, the holding number information indicating the number held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second special symbol holding counter 713, the first special symbol holding counter 703 or the second Holdable information indicating that the special symbol hold counter 713 can hold, the lottery result based on the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700) and the second special symbol A lottery result based on hold by the hold counter 713 (that is, a lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710) corresponds to a hold derivation order indicating the order in which the lottery result is drawn to the common symbol display area 115c.

  Further, the holdable information image display control means 8601 is configured so that each of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 has a predetermined first value for the holdable information which is one of the hold related information. Despite being able to hold up to an upper limit of a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a second predetermined number (for example, 4), only the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703 can be held up to the first predetermined number. Is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The first hold information image display control means 8602 and the second hold information image display control means 8603 are each a hold number information and a second special symbol applied to the first special symbol hold counter 703 which is one of the hold related information. The number-of-holds information relating to the hold counter 713 is displayed in the hold display area 1150.

  The identification code image display control means 8604 displays the number-of-holds information on the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed by the first hold information image display control means 8602 with a predetermined identification code. Of course, the number information of the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation counter 713 displayed by the second reservation information image display control means 8603 may be displayed with a predetermined identification code.

  The merge reservation order image display control means 8605 is derived to the common symbol display area 115c when the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are 1 or more. The derivation order is displayed recognizable.

  The merging hold order storage means 870 stores the derivation order of the lottery results by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 derived to the common symbol display area 115c. Specifically, in principle, information for specifying that the command receiving means 750 has won each of the start ports 390, 392, 394 is stored based on the order received from the main control board 131. However, regardless of the order of reception, the derivation order of the winning information (starting memory) related to one special symbol is ahead of the winning information (starting memory) related to another special symbol according to the gaming state. Remember.

  The first special symbol holding number storage means 872 receives a command from the main control board 131 for the command receiving means 750 to specify that “the first starting port 390 has been won”, and is still drawn in the common symbol display area 115c. The number of results that are not derived and displayed is stored. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the first special symbol reservation counter 703.

  The second special symbol holding number storage means 874 receives a command from the main control board 131 for specifying that the command receiving means 750 “wins the second and third starting openings 392 and 394” and is still a common symbol. The number of lottery results not being derived and displayed is stored in the display area 115c. This number corresponds to the number of reservations in the second special symbol reservation counter 713.

  The production hold count means 855 will be described in detail later, but when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special production until the change based on the hold that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. This is a counter for holding display.

[About the display mode in the hold display area]
Next, specific effects performed in the hold display area 1150 of the effect display device 115 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 are diagrams showing effects in the hold display area. In FIGS. 58 to 60, when the reserved storage display units 1150a to 1150h are in the non-display mode, they are indicated by dotted lines.

  In the following description, the direction (left side in this case) toward the first hold storage display unit 1150a corresponding to the upstream side of the lottery result derivation order among the hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h is “ The direction toward the eighth reserved storage display unit 1150h that is downstream in the lottery result derivation order (here, the right side) may be referred to as “rear” of shift display described later.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when both the number of holds held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the number of holds held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 are zero, the hold display area 1150 (holding storage display units 1150a to 1150h) are all hidden.

  In this state, when a game ball wins at the first starting opening 390 and is held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 “has won the first starting opening 602”). Is received from the main control board 131), the first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the leftmost end of the hold display area 1150 is controlled from the non-display mode to the first display mode. (See FIG. 58 (b)). Thereby, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “1”.

  Further, when the game ball continuously wins at the first start port 390 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the second hold storage display portion 1150b in the hold display area 1150 is changed from the non-display mode to the first display. Display control is performed in the form (see FIG. 58C). In the same manner, each time the game ball continuously wins at the first start opening 390 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the third hold storage display unit 1150c and the fourth hold storage display unit 1150d is sequentially controlled from the non-display mode to the first display mode.

  Thus, the start memory of the first special symbol is accumulated and displayed so as to be added toward the end side (the right end in the figure) in the hold display area 1150. When the number of reservations by the first special symbol reservation counter 703 becomes N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the first special symbol in the hold display area 1150. The first display mode is displayed adjacent to N (up to 4) in a row.

  Similarly, although not shown, when both the number of holdings held by the first special symbol holding counter 703 and the number of holdings held by the second special symbol holding counter 713 are zero, the second start port 392 Alternatively, every time a game ball wins a prize at the third start opening 394 and is held by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (specifically, the command receiving means 750 wins a prize at the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394. (Every time a command for specifying “what has been done” is received from the main control board 131), the non-display mode is the second display mode in order from the first hold storage display unit 1150a located at the leftmost end of the hold display area 1150. The display is controlled. When the number of reserves by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is N (N is a natural number not less than 1 and not more than the first predetermined number), it corresponds to the start memory number of the second special symbol in the hold display area 1150 The first display mode is displayed adjacent to N (up to 4) in a row.

  When there are a plurality of start memories of the first special symbol, the derivation order in which the lottery results of the start memory are derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h. That is, the command receiving means 750 is led out to the common symbol display area 115 c based on the winning order to the first starting port 390 received from the main control board 131. Similarly, when there are a plurality of start memories of the second special symbol, the derivation order in which the lottery result of the start memory is derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h. That is, the command receiving means 750 is led to the common symbol display area 115c based on the winning order to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 received from the main control board 131.

  When the variation for deriving the lottery result based on the start memory displayed on the first hold memory display unit 1150a is started, the display mode of each hold memory display unit is the previous hold memory display. The display is shifted. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 58 (c), when the variation of the decoration symbol is started based on the first hold of the first special symbol, the first display mode of the second hold storage display unit 1150b is The first display mode of the first on-hold storage display unit 1150a is shifted forward and the first display mode of the second on-hold storage display unit 1150b is set to the non-display mode. Here, “forward shift display” means that the display mode of the one hold storage display unit moves to the previous hold storage display unit when the one hold storage display unit is used as a reference. It is displayed as a display mode in the hold storage display unit.

  Hereinafter, in the hold display area 1150, when the special symbol start memory is digested (the lottery process for the special symbol start memory is performed), the head hold memory display unit (first hold memory) Deletion of the display mode of the display unit 1150a) and shift display of the display mode in the other storage storage display unit to the front are performed. As a result, the player visually confirms that the number of holds (starting memory number) has decreased in accordance with the digestion of the starting memory of each special symbol, and that the symbol variation based on the starting memory of each special symbol has been performed. I can grasp it.

  As described above, when there are a plurality of start memories of the first special symbol, the display order in the hold display area 1150 (that is, the lottery result derivation order in the common symbol display area 115c) is Match the winning order. In addition, when there are a plurality of start memories of the second special symbol, the display order in the hold display area 1150 (that is, the lottery result derivation order in the common symbol display area 115c) is the second start port 392 or the third This matches the winning order of the start port 394. On the other hand, when both the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are held, the display order in the hold display area 1150 (that is, the derivation of the lottery result in the common symbol display area 115c). As for (order), which of the special symbols is prioritized for start-up memory differs depending on the game state (first game suppression state, second game suppression state).

  In the present embodiment, the above-described second game suppression state in which the games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 are suppressed (from the viewpoint of the probability variation function and the time reduction function, either the probability variation function or the time reduction function). Is controlled to the normal gaming state in which the game is not activated, or the short-time gaming state in which only the short-time function is activated without the probability variation function being activated, the first special symbol start memory (game on the first start port 390 side) The symbol variation based on (hold) is executed in preference to the symbol variation based on the start memory of the second special symbol (game holding on the second and third start ports 392 and 394).

  On the other hand, in the above-described first game suppression state in which the game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed (from the viewpoint of the probability variation function and the time reduction function, the probability variation game state in which the probability variation function and the time reduction function operate). When controlled, the symbol variation based on the start memory of the second special symbol (game holding on the second and third start ports 392, 394 side) is the start memory of the first special symbol (the first start port 390 side) This is executed with priority over symbol variation based on Therefore, in the following, the start memory and the first special symbol of the first special symbol are divided into the case of being controlled to the normal gaming state, the case of being controlled to the probability variation gaming state, and the case of being controlled to the short-time gaming state. The display mode of the hold display area 1150 when there are two special symbol start-up memories will be described.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are displayed together when being controlled in the normal gaming state will be described. In FIG. 58 (c) described above, since the hold storage display units 1150a and 1150b are in the first display mode, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “2”.

  In this way, when the start memory of the first special symbol is held, if the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 and is held by the second special symbol hold counter 713, the hold display In the area 1150, the first one of the reserved storage display sections in the empty area that is in the non-display mode is controlled from the non-display mode to the second display mode. Here, the third hold storage display unit 1150c is changed from the non-display mode to the second display mode (see FIG. 59A). In the same manner, each time the game ball continuously wins at the first start opening 390 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the non-display mode is sequentially changed from the hold storage display unit of the earliest free area. The second display mode is set (see FIG. 59C).

  On the other hand, when the game ball is won at the first start opening 390 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 in the state where the start memory of the first special symbol is held, the first special symbol hold counter 703 holds the first The second display mode is shifted and displayed as the display mode of each subsequent hold storage display unit, and the display mode of the hold storage display unit located immediately before the hold storage display unit serving as the second display mode is the first display mode. 1 display mode. For example, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390 in the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), the second display mode of the third hold memory display unit 1150c is the rear as the display mode of the fourth hold memory display unit 1150d. The third hold storage display unit 1150c is controlled to be displayed in the first display mode (see FIG. 59B). As described above, “shifted display backward” means that the display mode of the one storage storage display unit moves to the subsequent storage storage display unit when the one storage storage display unit is used as a reference. It is displayed as a display mode in the hold storage display unit. In the same manner, each time the game ball continuously wins at the first start opening 390 and is sequentially held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the second display mode in the hold storage display unit is displayed in the rearward shift display. Display control is performed so that the first display mode is added immediately before the second display mode.

  Regardless of the gaming state, the derivation order in which the lottery result of the start memory of each special symbol is derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h. That is, in the hold display area 1150, in accordance with the digestion of the special symbol start-up memory, the display mode of the top hold storage display unit (first hold storage display unit 1150a) is deleted, and other hold storage display units The display mode is shifted forward. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, as is clear from the fact that the first display mode is always displayed on the hold storage display unit before the second display mode in the hold display area 1150, the second special symbol hold Even if the hold by the counter 713 is performed before the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the start memory of the first special symbol is preferentially digested over the start memory of the second special symbol. In other words, as long as there is a hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the second special symbol is not digested until only the start memory of the first special symbol is digested, and only the start memory of the first special symbol continues to be digested.

  In this way, when controlled to the normal gaming state, even if the start memory of the second special symbol is previously held, the start memory of the first special symbol is stored in the hold display area 1150 in the second special symbol. It is accumulated and displayed so as to be added in front of the hold display. Thereby, not only that the start memory number has increased in response to the start memory of the first special symbol being suspended, but that the derivation order has priority over the second special symbol for the first special symbol, The player can grasp visually.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a mode in which the start memory of the first special symbol and the start memory of the second special symbol are displayed together when being controlled to the probability variation gaming state will be described. In FIG. 59 (c) described above, since the hold storage display units 1150a and 1150b are in the first display mode, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the first special symbol hold counter 703 is “2”. In addition, since the hold storage display units 1150c to 1150e are in the second display mode, it can be recognized that the number of holds in the second special symbol hold counter 713 is “3”.

  In the probability variation gaming state, unlike the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the derivation of the lottery result is executed with priority on the second special symbol rather than the first special symbol. Therefore, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state to the probability changing gaming state in the state where the starting memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held in FIG. 59 (c), FIG. ), The display order of the first display mode and the second display mode in the hold display area 1150 is switched. As a result, in the normal gaming state, the first display mode is displayed in front of the second display mode in the hold display area 1150, whereas in the probability variation gaming state, the second display mode is forward of the first display mode. Is displayed (see FIG. 60B).

  Then, in a state where the start memory of the second special symbol is held, when a game ball wins at the first start port 390 and is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the first special symbol hold counter is displayed. One display mode is shifted and displayed as the display mode of each subsequent storage storage display unit, and the display mode of the storage storage display unit located immediately before the storage storage display unit serving as the first display mode is the first display mode. 2 display modes. Further, when the game ball is won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 and the second special symbol hold counter 713 holds it in a state where the start memory of the first special symbol is put on hold, the hold display area In 1150, the first one of the reserved storage display sections in the empty area that are in the non-display mode is controlled from the non-display mode to the first display mode.

  Regardless of the gaming state, the derivation order in which the lottery result of the start memory of each special symbol is derived to the common symbol display area 115c is derived in the order of the on-hold storage display units 1150a to 1150h. That is, in the hold display area 1150, in accordance with the digestion of the special symbol start-up memory, the display mode of the top hold storage display unit (first hold storage display unit 1150a) is deleted, and other hold storage display units The display mode is shifted forward. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, as is clear from the fact that the second display mode is always displayed on the hold storage display unit before the first display mode in the hold display area 1150, the first special symbol hold Even if the hold by the counter 703 is performed before the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 703, the start memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the start memory of the first special symbol. In other words, as long as there is a hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713, the hold by the first special symbol hold counter 713 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the first special symbol is not digested until only the start memory of the second special symbol is digested, and only the start memory of the second special symbol continues to be digested.

  Thus, when controlled to the probability variation gaming state, even if the start memory of the first special symbol is previously held, the start memory of the second special symbol is stored in the hold display area 1150 in the first special symbol. It is accumulated and displayed so as to be added in front of the hold display. Thereby, not only that the start memory number has increased in response to the start memory of the second special symbol being suspended, but that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol in terms of the derivation order, The player can grasp visually.

  In the short-time gaming state, as described above, as in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol is preferentially derived from the first special symbol, but the holding display in the holding display area 1150 is displayed. The mode is different from the normal gaming state. That is, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state or the probability variation gaming state to the short-time gaming state, the first display mode and the second display mode are arranged side by side in the hold display area 1150 as shown in FIG. Display control is performed as described above. Then, an arrow image as shown in the figure is displayed to indicate which special symbol is changed based on the start memory. Thereby, it is possible to visually grasp that the game state is different from the normal game state and the probability variation game state.

  In the short-time gaming state, similarly to the normal gaming state, even if the holding by the second special symbol holding counter 713 is performed prior to the holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703, the first special symbol start-up memory is stored. Is preferentially digested over the start-up memory of the second special symbol. In other words, as long as there is a hold by the first special symbol hold counter 703, the hold by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is not released. Therefore, the start memory of the second special symbol is not digested until only the start memory of the first special symbol is digested, and only the start memory of the first special symbol continues to be digested.

  In this way, when controlled to the short-time gaming state, the lottery results are preferentially derived from the second special symbol over the first special symbol, and the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state are displayed on hold. By changing the on-hold display mode of the area 1150, the player can visually grasp that the short-time gaming state is being performed. Further, by referring to the arrow image as shown in the figure, it is possible to visually grasp which special symbol is changed based on the start memory.

  Next, various control processes executed on the main board 600 according to the game progress of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

[Main system processing]
First, a description will be given based on FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of main system processing executed by the CPU mounted on the main control board of the main board.

  As shown in FIG. 61, when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 602 (see FIG. 51) first executes a power-on process (step S10). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 606 (see FIG. 51) is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data is stored in the RAM 606. A process for returning to the state at the time of power failure occurrence (recovery process) is executed according to the backup data stored, and if the backup data is abnormal, the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is erased and the device setting related to the CPU 602 (normal Initial settings and interrupt timing settings). If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. If the RAM erase switch for instructing the erase of the backup data stored in the RAM 606 is turned on in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initialization is performed. If backup data is not stored in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131 in the power-on process, the RAM 606 is cleared and normal initial setting is performed. In the power-on process, a power-on command indicating that the main control board 131 (see FIG. 51) has been activated can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 662 (see FIG. 52) when normal initial setting is executed. The process of setting to is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 662 that the main control board 131 has been activated. Note that the backup data is also stored in the RAM 606 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the amusement store is closed or the like, and when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started again, the power supply Processing at the time of execution is executed.

  When the power-on process (step S10) ends, the CPU 602 starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for gaming. At the start of this loop processing, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S20). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by a power supply board (not shown). That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Power is supplied to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 131 is stopped is transmitted. Is done. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in step S20, a process at the time of power failure occurrence is executed (step S40).

  When the power cut occurs, the operation of the gaming machine is performed before the power failure when the power supply voltage supplied to the power board after the power failure is restored (24V in this embodiment) (hereinafter referred to as “power recovery”). In order to start from the state, the state at the time of occurrence of a power failure is stored in the RAM 606 as backup data. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  If the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S20 (NO in step S20), that is, if the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the non-winning random number update for updating the random number used in the game Processing is performed (step S30). Note that the random numbers updated in the non-winning random number update process will be described later.

[Power failure occurrence processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing when a power-off occurs. As described above, the power interruption occurrence process (step S40) is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main system process (YES in step S20). First, the CPU 602 performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S42). Then, the checksum of the RAM 606 is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S44). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM 606 before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Next, the CPU 602 sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 606 (step S46). When the above processing is completed, the CPU 602 prohibits access to the RAM 606 (step S48) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for stopping power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the process described above cannot return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the CPU 602 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed, but is not updated when the process when the power is cut off is entered. As a result, even when the power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and the infinite loop of FIG. 62 is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period of time, and the CPU 602 is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, a timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 of the main board 600 during execution of the main system process. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 602 executes the process from step S60 to step S270 after executing the register standby process (step S50).

  In the sensor monitoring process in step S60, the various sensors described above (gate sensor 630, first start port sensor 644, second start port sensor 646, third start port sensor 648, effect opening / closing device count sensor 572, jackpot game) A process of monitoring the detection signal of the switchgear count sensor 640 or the like) is executed.

  In the winning random number update process of step S70, a process of updating a random number used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the winning random number update process is different from the random number updated in the non-winning random number update process. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the winning random number updating process may be updated in the non-winning random number updating process.

  In the payout control process in step S80, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control board 197 based on the signal detected in the sensor monitoring process (step S60).

  In the normal symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process in step S90, the control process related to the normal symbol display 82 is executed based on the signal detected from the gate sensor 630 in the sensor monitoring process (step S60). The process for performing the opening / closing control of the movable piece 396 is executed.

  In the special symbol / special electric accessory control process in step S100, a series of processing from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the start of the winning game is executed, and the stage winning prize opening 398a and the jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a (whichever The processing for performing the opening / closing control of FIG.

  In the output data setting process of step S260, a process of generating a command to be transmitted from the main control board 131 to the peripheral control board 662 is executed based on information determined in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S100). .

  In the command transmission process of step S270, a process of transmitting the command set in the output data setting process (step S260) to the peripheral control board 662 is performed. When the processing from step S60 to step S270 is executed, the register return processing (step S280) is executed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Here, various random numbers that are updated by the CPU 602 mounted on the main control board 131 in the above-described non-winning random number update processing (step S30) and winning random number update processing (step S70) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game,
・ Random number for determining whether or not to start a big hit game or a small hit game, and a game on the first start port 390 side is a game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side The first restraining symbol that suggests that the game will be executed as a post-rotation, and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 will be executed as the post-rotation of the game on the first start port 390 side The symbol random number used for the symbol lottery in which one of the second suppression symbols that suggests is determined, and the reach fluctuation when it is determined that neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started in the big hit determination A random number for reach determination used to determine whether or not to be used, and a variation pattern of a special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 and the second special symbol display 86 Variation pattern random number, and - a pair of determining whether the movable piece 396 is controlled in an open state (normal symbol per determination) normal symbol hit determination random number etc. used in the random number such are prepared.

  Note that the variation pattern of the special symbol may be determined using the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol controlled to be displayed by the effect display device 115 may be determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the winning random number update process, whether or not to determine whether or not the winning determination random number, the design random number, and the pair of movable pieces 396 related to the start of the big hit game or the small hit game are in an open state in which a game ball can be easily received. The random number for judgment per ordinary symbol related to whether or not is updated. That is, the random numbers used for starting the jackpot game and determining whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 396 to be opened are updated every 4 ms as a fixed timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that the hit game is started, probability to determine that the pair of movable pieces 396 are controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period in each random number can be made constant, and the game It is possible to prevent a person from becoming disadvantaged.

  On the other hand, in the non-winning random number update process, the reach determination random number and the fluctuation pattern random number are updated regardless of the occurrence of the winning gaming state and the display result of the normal symbol. Note that the random numbers updated on the main control board 131 are not limited to those described above. In the non-winning random number updating process, when the counter that updates the random number for determining whether or not the circuit completes one round, the determination is made to start counting next. The initial value determination random number and the like for determining the initial value of the random number are also updated.

  In the present embodiment, as means for obtaining the random number for determination of success / failure, two means, a random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 and a random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712, are provided. It is good also as a structure which provides this.

[Special symbol / Special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol / special electric accessory control process. In this special symbol / special electric accessory control process, first, first, second, and third start-up prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. Specifically, as will be described later, it is determined whether or not a game ball is received in the first start port 390, the second start port 392, and the third start port 394, and a series of processing is performed based on this. Once the first, second, and third start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process flag is checked (steps S120 to S230), and the process corresponding to the process flag is performed.

  When the first, second, and third start opening winning processes (step S110) are finished, first, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120). If the processing flag is 0 (in step S120). YES) A variation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), settings for starting the variation display of the special symbol are performed. As will be described in detail later, it is determined whether to start the big hit game or the small hit game, and the processing flag is updated to “1”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 in step S120 (NO in step S120), the process proceeds to step S140.

  In step S140, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). If the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 and the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is determined, and the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern. A correspondingly set fluctuation time (the time from the start of the special symbol fluctuation display to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86) is set in the timer. The processing flag is updated to “2”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 in step S140 (NO in step S140), the process proceeds to step S170.

  In step S170, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). If the process flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the process during change (step S180) is executed. In the changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol in the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is determined based on the time-out. The fluctuation display of is stopped. At this time, if it is determined that the big hit is made in the variation start process (step S130), the process selection flag is updated to “3”, and if it is determined that the big hit is made, the process selection flag is set to “4”. , And if neither the big hit or the small win is determined, the processing selection flag is updated to “0”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 in step S170 (NO in step S170), the process proceeds to step S190.

  In step S190, it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S190). If the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), a big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the jackpot type (long hit or short hit) is determined, and the opening / closing operation of the stage jackpot 398a and / or jackpot game jackpot 400a is controlled according to the jackpot type. The number of rounds, the opening time and the number of game balls to be awarded are set, and the processing flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). If the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game process, the number of times of opening and the opening time for controlling the opening operation of the effect large winning opening 398a are set, and the processing flag is updated to “6”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), the process proceeds to step S230.

  In step S230, it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S230). If the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), a special electric utility jackpot control process (step S240) is executed. In the special electric utility jackpot control process, a stage winning prize opening 398a and a jackpot gaming prize winning opening 400a based on the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the opening time, and the number of game balls received. When the jackpot game is finished, it is determined whether or not to operate the probability variation function and the time reduction function, and the process flag is updated to “0”.

  On the other hand, if the process flag is not 5 in step S230 (NO in step S230), the special electric accessory small hit control process (step S250) is executed. In the special electric accessory small hitting control process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 398a for production is controlled based on the number of opening times, the opening time and the limited number set in the small hitting game process (step S220). When the small hit game ends, processing for updating the processing flag to “0” is performed.

  When any of the various processes from step S130 to step S250 is executed, the special symbol / special electric accessory control process is terminated.

[Random number storage means for special symbols]
Next, the special symbol random number storage control by the holding order storage means will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage area related to the hold order. A RAM 606 (see FIG. 51) provided in the CPU 602 of the main control board 131 includes a special symbol random number storage area 6061 and a processing area 6062. Various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, and the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648 Various types of data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired based on the detection in the above are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 by the hold control unit 790. The special symbol random number storage area 6061 is divided into eight storage areas from a first storage area 6061a to an eighth storage area 6061h. The first storage area 6061a, the second storage area 6061b, the third storage area 6061c, The fourth storage area 6061d, the fifth storage area 6061e, the sixth storage area 6061f, the seventh storage area 6061g, and the eighth storage area 6061h are stored in this order.

  Each of the eight storage areas from the first storage area 6061a to the eighth storage area 6061h and the processing area 6062 is a random number storage area for determination of success / failure, a random number storage area for post-holding determination, and a special symbol type storage area. It has a storage area. The determination random number storage area is an area for storing a determination random number used for determining whether to start a big hit game or a small hit game. In addition, the after-holding-point determination random number storage area includes the first suppression symbol and the second suppression symbol as stop symbols that appear when a jackpot is won by the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. This is an area in which symbol random numbers used for the determination process of which symbol to use is stored. In the special symbol type storage area, whether the success / failure determination random number and the symbol random number are data acquired by detecting the game ball in the first starting port sensor 644, the second starting port sensor 646 or the third This is an area for storing whether the data is acquired by detecting the game ball in the start port sensor 648. In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination random number and the design random number are extracted by the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644, the first special symbol type is set as the second start port sensor 646 or the second start number sensor 644. If it is extracted by the detection of the game ball by the 3 start sensor 648, the second special symbol type is stored.

  When the first start port sensor 644 detects a game ball, the first special symbol per-determination random number extraction means 702 extracts the winning / failure determination random number and the design random number. The extracted random numbers for success / failure determination and the design random numbers are respectively stored in the random number storage area for determination of success / failure and the random number storage area for determination after the hold destination by the hold control unit 790. Further, the first special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  When a game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 646 or the third start port sensor 648, a random number for judging the second special symbol is extracted in the same manner as when the first start port sensor 644 detects a game ball. A means 712 extracts a random number for determination of success / failure and a design random number. The extracted random numbers for success / failure determination and design random numbers are stored in the randomness storage region for determination of success / failure and the random number storage region for determination after the hold destination, respectively. Further, the second special symbol type is stored in the special symbol type storage area.

  The processing area 6062 is an area that is read when the determination results of various data are derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86. In the present embodiment, reading of various data stored in the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is restricted, and various data stored in the processing area 6062 is determined, and the determination result Is derived to the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86.

  Note that the processing region 6062 is not necessarily provided. For example, the reading of various data stored in each of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is normally restricted, and is stored in the first storage area 6061a only when the change of the special symbol is started. Only various data may be read.

  In addition, when the change of the special symbol is started, a shift process of various data stored in each storage area is performed. Details of this shift processing will be described later.

  By the way, the holding control means 790 of the present embodiment has different processing procedures for controlling random number storage depending on the game state (first game suppression state, second game suppression state). In other words, when the random number is extracted by the random number extracting means 702 for determination per first special symbol or the random number extracting means 712 for determination per second special symbol, the hold control means 790 according to this embodiment is in the first game suppression state ( It is determined whether the game is controlled to a probable gaming state or a second gaming restraint state (a normal gaming state or a short-time gaming state). As a result, if the second game suppression state (the normal game state or the short-time game state) is controlled, the second special figure suppression memory control (first special figure priority memory control) is performed, while the first game suppression state If controlled to (probability game state), the first special figure suppression storage control (second special figure priority storage control) is performed.

  In the second special figure suppression storage control (first special figure priority storage control), various random numbers (referred to as first random number data) extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702 and the second special figure control. Various random numbers (referred to as second random number data) extracted by the per-symbol determination random number extracting means 712 are used as the heads of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 (that is, the first storage area 6061a side). ) Are stored in the order of extraction. However, when the second random number data is already stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 when the first random number data is extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extracting means 702, the second random number is stored. The data is shifted one by one to each area on the tail side (that is, the eighth storage area 6061h side), and the first random number data is stored in an area before the second random number data. Thus, in each of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first random number data is obtained from the second random number data regardless of which of the first random number data and the second random number data is acquired first. In addition, the plurality of first random number data and the plurality of second random number data are stored so as to be arranged in the order of extraction.

  In addition, when the game state shifts from the first game suppression state (probability variation game state) to the second game suppression state (normal game state or short-time game state), a special symbol random number is used as the first special figure priority storage control. Rearrangement control of the first random number data and the second random number data stored in the storage area 6061 is performed. In the rearrangement control of the random number data in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first random number data is an area ahead of the second random number data so that the first random number data is derived before the second random number data. (In other words, the storage order of the first random number data and the second random number data is changed so that the second random number data is stored in the area behind the first random number data). Thereby, as described above, the hold display mode displayed in the hold display area 1150 is also switched in accordance with the transition of the gaming state to the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state.

  In the first special figure suppression storage control (second special figure priority storage control), various random numbers (referred to as first random number data) extracted by the first special symbol determination random number extraction means 702, and the second special figure control. Various random numbers (referred to as second random number data) extracted by the per-symbol determination random number extracting means 712 are used as the heads of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061 (that is, the first storage area 6061a side). ) Are stored in the order of extraction. However, when the first random number data is already stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 when the second random number extraction unit 712 extracts the second random number data, the first random number is stored. The data is shifted one by one to each area on the tail side (that is, the eighth storage area 6061h side), and the second random number data is stored in an area before the first random number data. Thereby, in each of the areas 6061a to 6061h of the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the second random number data is obtained from the first random number data regardless of which of the first random number data and the second random number data is acquired first. The first random number data and the plurality of second random number data are stored in order of extraction, respectively.

  In addition, when the game state shifts from the second game suppression state (normal game state or short-time game state) to the first game suppression state (probability change game state), the special symbol random number is used as the second special figure priority storage control. Rearrangement control of the first random number data and the second random number data stored in the storage area 6061 is performed. In the rearrangement control of the random number data in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the second random number data is an area ahead of the first random number data so that the second random number data is derived before the first random number data. (In other words, the storage order of the first random number data and the second random number data is changed so that the first random number data is stored in the area behind the second random number data). As a result, as described above, the hold display mode displayed in the hold display area 1150 is also switched in accordance with the transition of the game state to the probability change game state.

[First, second and third start-up winning prizes]
Next, the first / second / third start opening winning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up winning process.

  In the first, second, and third starting opening winning process, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a second starting opening 392 or a third starting opening 394 (step S1101). Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal is output from second start port sensor 646 or third start port sensor 648. At this time, if a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 646, it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392, and if a detection signal is output from the third start port sensor 648, It is determined that the game ball has won the third starting port 394. If no detection signal is output from any of the second start port sensor 646 and the third start port sensor 648, no game ball has won a prize in either the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 (step (NO in S1101).

  When it is determined in step S1101 that a game ball has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, various data (randomness number for determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired and provided in the RAM 606. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1102). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1102), the CPU 602 performs a second hold storage process (step S1103). In the second hold storage process, various data (random determination number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is stored as a special symbol random number. This is a process of adding 1 to the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 while storing it in the area 6061. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, a random number for determination of success / failure is stored in the random number storage region for determination of success / failure; , Remember each.

  Various data (second random number data) stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the second reserved storage process of step S1103 is the free area of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). The smallest n is stored in the area, and then the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and the process proceeds to step S1104.

  However, as described above, the first special figure suppression storage control (second special figure priority storage control) is performed when the first game suppression state (probability variation game state) is being controlled. At this time, in the second reserved storage process of step S1103, if the first random number data is already stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first random number data is stored one by one (that is, the eighth storage Shift to each region 6061a to 6061h on the region 6061h side). Then, the second random number data is stored in the empty area formed by this shift control. Thereby, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the second random number data is stored in the storage area on the head side of the first random number data.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1101 that no game ball has won any of the second start port 392 and the third start port 394 (NO in step S1101), and in step S1102, the second special symbol hold counter. When it is determined that the counter value 713 has reached the upper limit of 4 (NO in step S1102), the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, the CPU 602 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first start port 390 (step S1104). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, and when a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 644, a game ball wins the first start port 390. (YES in step S1104). If a detection signal is not output from the first start port sensor 644, it is determined that a game ball has not won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104).

  When it is determined in step S1104 that a game ball has won at the first starting port 390, various random numbers (randomness numbers for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) are acquired, and a first special symbol hold counter provided in the RAM 606 is obtained. It is determined whether the counter value of 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (step S1105). Note that the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means 702 for determination per first special symbol.

  If it is determined in step S1104 that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit of 4 (YES in step S1105), the CPU 602 performs a first hold storage process (step S1106). In the first hold storage process, various data (random determination random number, symbol random number, special symbol type) acquired by winning a game ball in the first start port 390 are stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. In this process, 1 is added to the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703. More specifically, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, a random number for determination of success / failure is stored in the random number storage region for determination of success / failure; , Remember each.

  Various data (first random number data) stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 in the first reserved storage process of step S1106 is the free area of the first storage area 6061a to the nth storage area (n is an integer). The smallest n is stored in the area, and then the process proceeds to step S1104. For example, if the first storage area 6061a is a free area, it is stored in the first storage area 6061a. If the first storage area 6061a is not a free area and the second storage area 6061b is a free area, it is stored in the second storage area 6061b. If the first storage area 6061a and the second storage area 6061b are not empty areas and the third storage area 6061c is an empty area, the CPU 602 stores various data in the third storage area 6061c, and ends the processing.

  However, as described above, the first special figure priority memory control is performed when the second game suppression state (the normal game state or the short-time game state) is being controlled. At this time, in the first reserved storage process of step S1106, if the second random number data is already stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the second random number data is stored one by one (that is, the eighth storage). Shift to each region 6061a to 6061h on the region 6061h side). Then, the first random number data is stored in the empty area formed by this shift control. Thus, in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, the first random number data is stored in the storage area on the head side of the second random number data.

  When the CPU 602 determines in step S1104 that no game ball has won the first start port 390 (NO in step S1104), and in step S1105, the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is an upper limit value of 4. When it is determined that the value has been reached (NO in step S1105), the process ends.

  The counter value stored in the first special symbol hold counter 703 or the second special symbol hold counter 713 is the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 acquired in step S1104 or step S1101 (that is, , 8 of the storage areas 6061a to 6061h, the number of storage areas in which various data are stored).

  In step S1102 and step S1105, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value, and the first start If the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the upper limit when a game ball is won in the mouth 390, the various data acquired in step S1101 or step S1104 are discarded (first special symbol hold). A game ball won in the first starting port 390 when the counter value of the counter 703 is the upper limit value, and a second winning port 392 when the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 is the upper limit value A game ball is called an invalid ball).

  When it is determined that a game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, it is not always necessary to acquire various types of data (random number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) in step S1101. There is no problem between step S1101 and step S1103. For example, various data may be acquired after determining that the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102 without acquiring various data in step S1101, or in step S1103. You may make it acquire by a 2nd pending | holding memory | storage process.

  Similarly, when it is determined that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 390, acquisition of various data (randomness number for success / failure determination, symbol random number, special symbol type) is not necessarily performed in step S1104; What is necessary is just to perform between step S1106. For example, without acquiring various data in step S1104, it is possible to acquire various data after determining that the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit value in step S1102, or in step S1106 You may make it acquire by a 1st pending | holding storage process.

  In this way, in the first, second, and third start opening prize processing, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the second start opening 392 or the third start opening 394, and the second special opening is determined. If the count value by the symbol hold counter 713 is less than the upper limit, storage processing of various data acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is performed. After that, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won at the first start opening 390, and if the count value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is less than the upper limit, the game ball has won at the first start opening 390. Thus, the storage processing of the various data acquired is performed, and the series of processing ends. Accordingly, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously (within the same 4 ms interrupt process). Is a special symbol in which various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is ahead of various data acquired by winning a game ball at the first starting port 390. Stored in the random number storage area 6061. That is, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determination means. The jackpot determination by 714 is performed prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. As a result, the determination result by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is the determination result by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704. First, it is displayed on the second special symbol display 86 and the common symbol display area 115c. In particular, during the short-time game, since the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 720 is a lottery advantageous to the player, the pair of movable pieces 396 are frequently opened and closed, and the game ball is won at the third start opening 394. It becomes easy. However, when the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 and the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 are performed almost simultaneously, the second special symbol success / failure determining means 714 By performing the jackpot determination by the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 prior to the jackpot determination by the first special symbol winning / decision means 704, the game ball is won in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 during the short-time game. It is possible to avoid as much as possible the various data that have been discarded, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU 602 executes a series of processes in steps S1104 to 1106 after executing a series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103. Instead, the CPU 602 executes steps S1104 to S1106. After executing the series of processes, the series of processes in steps S1101 to S1103 may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the number of various data stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061 (that is, the sum of the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713). Is referred to as “starting memory number”.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the change start process.

  In the variation start process (step S130) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the start memory number is 0 (step S1301). If the starting storage number is not 0 (NO in step S1301), the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted (step S1302). In this shift process, various data (corresponding to the first random number data or the second random number data described above) stored in the first storage area 6061a are stored in the processing area 6062, and the nth storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ This is a process of storing various data stored in 8) in the (n−1) th storage area (2 ≦ n ≦ 8). When various data is stored only in the first storage area 6061a (when the second storage area 6061b to the eighth storage area 6061h are free areas), the various data stored in the first storage area 6061a. Is stored in the processing area 6062 only. If the start memory is 0 in step S1301 (YES in step S1301), the process is terminated.

  More specifically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state, the first special figure priority storage control described above is executed, so that the first random number data is stored in the special symbol random number storage area 6061. First, the second random number data is stored so as to be later. Therefore, in the shift process (step S1302), the first random number data is always stored in the processing area 6062 before the second random number data. Thereby, the random number (first random number data) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390 is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. Even if it is acquired after the random number (second random number data), it is preferentially read from the special symbol random number storage area 6061 to the processing area 6062, and further, it is determined whether or not a big hit described later is won It will be used for processing.

  Further, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the second special figure priority storage control described above is executed, so that the second random number data is first in the special symbol random number storage area 6061, and the first random number data is later. It is memorized to become. Therefore, in the shift process (step S1302), the second random number data is always stored in the processing area 6062 before the first random number data. Thereby, the random number (second random number data) acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 390. Even if it is acquired later than the random number (first random number data), it is preferentially read from the special symbol random number storage area 6061 to the processing area 6062, and further, it is determined whether or not a big hit described later is won It will be used for processing.

  After performing the shift process in step S1302, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 is the second special symbol type (step S1303). At this time, if it is the second special symbol type (YES in step S1303), the second special symbol flag is turned ON (step S1303), and the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 is decremented by 1 ( Step S1305) and the process proceeds to Step S1308. If the type stored in the special symbol type storage area of the processing area 6062 determined in step S1303 is the first special symbol type (NO in step S1303), the first special symbol flag is turned on (step S1303). Along with S1306), the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 is decremented by 1 (step S1307), and the process proceeds to step S1308.

  In step S1308, the CPU 602 determines whether or not the probability variation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740 (step S1308). If the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S1308), the special symbol probability variation per-hour determination table 708 is selected (step S1309), and if the probability variation function is not activated (NO in step S1308), special. The symbol normal time determination table 706 is selected (step S1310). Then, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311).

  Note that the jackpot determination in step S1311 is performed by the first special symbol determination unit 704 if the first special symbol flag is ON, and the second special symbol determination unit if the second special symbol flag is ON. 714.

  If the CPU 602 determines that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit in step S1311 (YES in step S1311), the jackpot flag is turned on (step S1311), and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is set (step S1313). ). Specifically, it is determined by referring to the determination table selected in step S1309 or step S1310 and the random number for success / failure determination whether the result of the jackpot determination is a long hit. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S1313), the long hit flag is turned ON (step S1314), then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318), and the process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1313 that it is not long hit (NO in step S1313), the short hit flag is turned ON (step S1315), and then the processing flag is updated to “1” (step S1318). finish. If it is determined that the big hit determination in step S1311 is not a big hit (NO in step S1311), the small hit determination is performed based on Table 1 (step S1316). If it is determined that the small hit is determined in the small hit determination (YES in step S1316), the small hit flag is turned on (step S1317), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process is terminated. . If it is determined that the small hit is not a small hit (NO in step S1316), the process proceeds to step S1318, the processing flag is updated to “1”, and the process ends.

  In the present embodiment, after the special symbol random number storage area 6061 is shifted in step S1302, the judgment table selected in step S1310 (special symbol normal hour judgment table 706 or special symbol probability variation judgment per time). The jackpot determination is performed with reference to the table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the processing area 6062 (step S1311), but is not limited thereto. For example, the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the determination table (special symbol normal time determination table 706 or special symbol probability change time determination table 708) and the random number for determination of success / failure stored in the first storage area 6061a, Thereafter, the special symbol random number storage area 6061 may be shifted. At this time, the validity determination random number stored in the first storage area 6061a can be referred to only when the change starts.

  Details of the jackpot determination and the small hit determination are as described above with reference to Table 1 and Table 2.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per first special symbol length. FIG. 70 is a table showing variation patterns selected in the first special symbol length per hour pattern table setting process. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the hour variation pattern table setting process per second special symbol length. FIG. 72 is a table showing the variation patterns selected in the second special symbol length per-hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 74 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 75 is a table showing the variation patterns selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 77 is a list chart showing a variation pattern selected when reach is determined in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 79 is a list chart showing a variation pattern selected when it is determined to be reach in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. FIG. 80 is a list chart showing variation patterns selected when reach is not determined in the first special symbol loss variation pattern table setting process and the second special symbol loss variation pattern table setting processing.

  Each variation table shown below stores a command, a lottery result, a variation time, a variation name (variation content), and a probability that the variation content of the variation number is selected in association with the variation number. The “variation content” refers to the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 and the sound effect or music output from the speakers 18 and 57 in correspondence with the effect content.

  In the variation pattern setting process of FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1510). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is derived based on the variation of the special symbol this time. If it is determined that the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S1510), it is next determined whether or not the long hit flag is ON (step S1520). That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determined in step S1510 is a long hit. If it is determined that the long winning flag is ON (YES in step S1520), it is then determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1530). That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation is based on a winning / not-determining random number extracted based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1530), the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540) is performed. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1540), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating (that is, whether or not the time reduction game is being executed by the time reduction game execution means 742), and the probability change function. Whether or not it is in operation (that is, whether or not the probability variation game is being executed by the probability variation game execution means 740) and the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortening length) And the second suppression symbol (which is also the symbol per normal length in this embodiment), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol length is selected according to which length is per symbol.

  If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1530), the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550) is performed. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1550), it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating, whether or not the probability variation function is operating, and the first suppression symbol (this embodiment). Then, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol length according to whether the symbol is a probability variation symbol) or the second suppression symbol (which is also a normal symbol in this embodiment). Select.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that the long hit flag is not ON (ie, short hit) (NO in step S1520), short hit variation pattern table setting processing (step S1560) is performed. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is operating and whether the probability variation function is in operation, and the short hit time variation pattern table is selected according to each gaming state. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1520 that there is no long hit (that is, a short hit), it is not determined whether or not the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. Accordingly, when a short win occurs in response to the winning of the game ball at the first starting port 390, and in response to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the short hit is generated. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1510 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1510), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1570). If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1570), a small hit hour variation pattern table setting process (step S1580) is performed. In the small hit hour variation pattern setting process, it is determined whether or not the short time function is in operation and whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, and a variation pattern table at the small hit time corresponding to each gaming state is selected. .

  Note that if it is determined in step S1570 that it is a small hit, similarly to the case where it is determined in step S1520 that it is not a long hit, the current variation is based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port sensor 644. It is not judged whether it is a thing. Accordingly, when a small hit occurs in response to a game ball winning at the first start port 390, and a small hit according to a game ball winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. In any case, the same variation pattern table is selected.

  If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1570), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol flag is ON (step S1590). If it is determined that the first special symbol flag is ON (YES in step S1590), a first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process (step S1600) is performed. In the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated and whether or not the probability variation function is activated, and then whether or not reach variation is performed is determined by lottery ( Hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”. In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 606, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short-time function is activated, whether the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (see FIG. 53). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the first special symbol deviation is selected.

  If it is determined in step S1590 that the first special symbol flag is not ON (NO in step S1590), the second special symbol out-of-shift pattern table setting process (step S1610) is performed. In the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting processing, it was first determined whether or not the time-shortening function is operating and whether or not the probability variation function is in operation. Thereafter, whether or not to change the reach is determined by lottery (hereinafter, this lottery is referred to as “reach lottery”). In the reach lottery, a reach determination random number is acquired, the acquired reach determination random number is stored in the RAM 606, and the determination value set in a predetermined reach determination table matches the acquired reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not reach variation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the short time function is activated, whether the probability variation function is activated, whether or not reach variation is performed, and the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (see FIG. 53). Based on this, the variation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol deviation is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is set, the process advances to step S1620 to determine a variation pattern. In determining the variation pattern, first, a variation display random number is acquired. Based on the obtained variation display random number, one of the variation patterns set in the variation pattern table set in step S1540, step S1550, step S1560, step S1580, step S1600 or step S1610 is selected. A variation pattern is determined (step S1620).

  Each variation pattern is set with a variation time and a command. When the variation pattern is determined (step S1620), the determined variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630). Then, a command corresponding to the variation pattern set as the selection value is set as an effect command transmitted to the peripheral control board 662. When the variation pattern is set as a selection value (step S1630), the variation time corresponding to the set variation pattern is set in the timer (step S1640). That is, the variation time of the special symbol is set in a timer provided in the RAM 606 mounted on the main control board 131. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S1650), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  Next, the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 69 and FIG. In the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 69, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S 15401). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 15401), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S 15402). Specifically, using a random number, the symbol type per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) The table 1 is selected if it is a symbol per short length with probability variation, and the table 2 is selected if it is a symbol per normal length. (See FIG. 70).

  If it is determined in step S 15401 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S 15401), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether it has been performed (step S15403). If it is determined that the probability variation function has not been activated (YES in step S15403), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low is selected (step S15404). Specifically, using a random number, the symbol type per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) (If it is a symbol per length with probability variation, select table 3; if it is a symbol per normal length, select table 4) .

  If it is determined in step S15403 that the probability variation function is not inoperative, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S15403), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per long when the time-short function is activated and at high probability is selected. (Step S15405). Specifically, using a random number, the symbol type per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) The table 5 is selected if it is a symbol per short length with probability variation, and the table 6 is selected if it is a symbol per normal length. .

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15402, step S15404, and step S15405, the first special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When table 1 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the variation number 13 per normal length of variation number 10 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variation number 15, per song reach B length of variation number 17 (via song reach A), per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variation number 19, Variation per song reach D length (variation number 21) per song reach D, per song reach B first half length, variation number 28 per song reach B second length, variation number 33 per song reach C first half length Per song reach C second half length of number 35, per first half length of song reach D of variation number 40, per second half length of song reach D of variation number 42, and variation number 4 Of the chances (per probable length of change), change one of the fluctuation patterns to 500/4000, 3500/6000, 5000/4000, 8000/4000, 10,000 / 4000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/4000, 4000/64000, and 3000/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 500/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 0AH corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as the effect command, and 21500 ms is set as the variation time value in the timer. When the normal length per unit is selected, the reach variation is executed after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and then the stop symbol is long-performed without executing the super reach effect. Display to be an aspect. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is used as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 2 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as table 1 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation numbers 26, 28, 33, 35, 40, and 42 are selected is 4000/64000 in the table 1 and 4500/64000 in the table 2. The probability that the variation number 45 is selected is 3000/64000 in the table 1, but not selected in the table 2. Then, similarly to the case where the table 1 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 3 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on this acquired variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Per song reach B in the second half of number 28, per song in the first half of song reach C in variation number 33, per song in the second half of song reach C in variation number 35, song reach D in the first half length of variation number 40, and song of variation number 42 One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 10500/64000, 11000/64000, and 11000/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the per-half length of song reach B is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 10500 of 64000, command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per first half length of song reach B is set as a production command and the variation time value is 41100 ms. Is set to the timer. When this song reach B first half per length is selected, the variation of reach is executed after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), and the character moves on the stage as the song (B) is played. The super-reach effect of the singing mode is performed, and then the stop symbol is displayed so as to be the long hit mode.

  When the table 4 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 3 is selected with the same probability. As in the case where the table 3 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 5 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, per song tune B completion of variation number 51 (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door revival length per 2 revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), per song revive length of the first song reach C door of variation number 61, per second revival length of song reach C door of variation number 62, and song reach C door 3 of variation number 63 Per revive length of song, per reach of song reach D with variation number 69 (probability variation), per revival length of song reach D door with variation number 70, per revival length of song reach D door with variation number 71, and , One of the fluctuation patterns among the third revival length of the song reach D door of the movement number 72 is 30000/60000, 500/4000/000, 500/64000, 1000/64000, and 10,000 / 4000, respectively. , 250/4000/250, 6/4000, 5500/4000, 10,000 / 4000, 250/4000, 250/4000, and 5500/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B per run length with a probability of 30000/60000 is selected as a variation pattern, command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B finish length is set as a production command and a variation time value is 55000 ms. To the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 6 is selected in the first special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a fluctuation time value in the timer. In this song reach B completion, the super reach in the form in which the character is singing on the stage with the song (B) after the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change is displayed. Then, although the stage door closes, the performance that the performance and the character display are not interrupted is repeated three times, and after the song (B) has been played, the stop symbol is displayed in a long-hit manner.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 6 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 5 is selected. That is, per song reach B door revival length, per song revival door B revival length, song reach B door third revival length, and song reach C completion Per song revival length, singing reach C door second revival length, singing reach C door third revival length, singing reach D door revival length, per song reach D completion, per revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 6, these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. In the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 71, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Is determined (step S15501). If it is determined that the time shortening function is not activated (YES in step S15501), a variation pattern table corresponding to the type of symbol per long when the time shortening function is not activated is selected (step S15502). Specifically, using the design random number, the type of symbol per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) The table 7 is selected if the symbol is a symbol per length with a probability variation, and the table 8 is selected if the symbol is a regular symbol per length. (See FIG. 72).

  If it is determined in step S15501 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15501), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S15503). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15503), a variation pattern table is selected according to the type of per-length when the short-time function is activated and when the probability is low (step S15504). Specifically, using the design random number, the type of symbol per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) The table 9 is selected when the symbol is a symbol per length with a probability variation, and the table 10 is selected when the symbol is a regular symbol per length. .

  If it is determined in step S15503 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state is selected (NO in step S15503), the variation pattern table corresponding to the type per length at the time of short-time function activation and high probability is selected. (Step S15505). Specifically, using the design random number, the type of symbol per length is the first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, it is also a symbol per probability shortened length) and the second suppression symbol (normal in this embodiment) The table 11 is selected if the symbol is a symbol per length with a probability variation, and the table 12 is selected if the symbol is a regular symbol per length. .

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S15502, step S15504, and step S15505, the second special symbol length per variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 7 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, a variation number 78 per normal length of the variation number 75 is obtained. Per song reach A normal length, per song reach A long length of variation number 80, per length of song reach B (via song reach A) of variation number 82, per length of song reach C (via song reach A) of variation number 84, One of the variation patterns among the length of song reach D (via song reach A) of variation number 86 is 900/4000, 3800/64, 6000/6000, 12000/6000, and 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 20000 / minute and 21300/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal pattern is selected with a probability of 900/60004 as the variation pattern, the command 51H corresponding to the variation pattern per normal length is set as an effect command, and the variation time value is set to 15400 ms in the timer. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 8 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, the same variation pattern as the table 7 is selected with the same probability. However, the probability that the variation number 82 is selected is 12000/14000 in the table 7, but 15000/64000 in the table 8. Further, the probability that the variation number 86 is selected is 21300/64000 in the table 7, but 18300/64000 in the table 8. As in the case where the table 7 is selected, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 9 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, per song completion B completion of the variation number 51 (common) , Variation number 52 per song revive B door first revival length, variation number 53 singing reach B door second revival length, variation number 54 singing reach B door third revival length, variation number 60 Per song reach C completion (probable change), song reach C door with change number 61, first resurrection length, song reach C door with variable number 62, second resurrection length, song reach C door with change number 63 third Per revive length, per revival of 69 song reach D with change number 69 (probable change), per revival length of song reach D door with change number 70, per revival length of song reach D door with change number 71, and per change number Of the two song reach D doors per 3rd revival length, one of the fluctuation patterns is 26500/64000, 500/44000, 500/44000, 1000/64000, 15000/64000, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 250/500, 6/4000/2000, 6/4000/4000, 15000/64000, 250/64000, 500/64000, and 2000/6000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, per song reach B completion length is selected with a probability of 26500/64000, command 33H corresponding to the selected variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as a production command, and 55000 ms is set as a timer for the variation time value. Set to. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 11 is selected in the second special symbol length per hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, variation per song reach B first half length of variation number 26 Number 28 per song reach B second half length, number 33 first song reach C per first half length, number 35 song reach C per second half length, number 40 song reach D first half length, and number 42 song reach One of the fluctuation patterns per second half of reach D has a probability of 13750/64000, 13750/64000, 10,000 / 64000, 10,000 / 64000, 8250/64000, and 8250/64000, respectively. Select with. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when per song reach B length is selected with a probability of 13750/64000 as a variation pattern, command 1AH corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B length is set as a production command and 41100 ms as a variation time value is set as a timer. Set to.

  When the table 10 is selected in the second special symbol length hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern per song reach B completion length of the variation number 51 is always selected without obtaining the variation pattern random number. Then, the command 33H corresponding to the variation pattern per song reach B completion length is set as an effect command, and 55000 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer.

  Thus, the content of the variation pattern when the table 10 is selected is different from the content of the variation pattern when the table 9 is selected. That is, per song reach B door revival length, song reach B door revival length, song reach B door 3 revival length, and song reach C completion per selection. Per song revival length, singing reach C door second revival length, singing reach C door third revival length, singing reach D door revival length, per song reach D completion, per revival length Since neither the song reach D door second revival length nor the song reach D door third revival length is selected on the table 10, these variation patterns are displayed on the effect display device 115. If this is done, the per unit length of probability change is fixed.

  Next, the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 75. In the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 73, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742 ( Step S15601). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15601), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15602). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 13 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 75).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S15601), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740 It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S15603). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15604). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 14 is selected (see FIG. 75).

  If it is determined in step S15601 that the time-shortening function is not inactive (NO in step S15603), a variation pattern table is selected when the time-shortening function is activated and the probability variation function is activated (step S15605). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 15 is selected (see FIG. 75).

  When the table 13 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern with the chance of variation number 43 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 2BH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. At the chance (short win), after the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit without the reach effect. As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the short-time function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one type of short hit display mode for chance chances is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 described later.

  When the table 14 is selected in the short hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of the variation number 23 and the song reach of the variation number 30 are obtained. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, 20000/64000, and 20000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and out of song reach D intro with variation number 37. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 24000/64000, command 17H corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . If this song reach B intro is selected, the decorative design is displayed on the production display device 115 variably, and then the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach production. And stop display in a different short hit mode. Similarly, the variation pattern of the song reach C intro and the song reach D intro is also selected with a probability of 20000/60000, and the commands 1EH and 25H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands, and the variation time value Set 24100 ms in the timer.

  When the table 15 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is obtained, and based on the obtained variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door short number of variation number 47, variation number 48 song reach B door per 3rd short, variable number 56 song reach C per 1 door short, variable number 57 song reach C door 3rd per short, number 65 song reach D door 1 per door One of the variation patterns among the per unit short and the third per unit of the song reach D door of variation number 66 is 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 19000/64000, and 4000/4000, respectively. , 19000/64000, and 4000/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first short per is selected with a probability of 14000/64000, the command 2FH corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first short is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door first short hit is selected, after the decorative design is variably displayed on the production display device 115, the song (B) is played and the super reach of the character singing on the stage is displayed. Then, the door of the stage is closed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a short hit manner different from the long hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, and a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a corresponding variation time value is set in the timer.

  Next, the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. In the small hitting time variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 74, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is not activated, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742 ( Step S15801). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S15801), a variation pattern table in the case where the time reduction function is not activated is selected (step S15802). That is, when the time-short game is not executed by the time-short game execution means 742, the table 16 is selected regardless of whether or not the probability-change game is executed by the probability-change game execution means 740 (see FIG. 75).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15801), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, whether or not the probability variation game is not executed by the probability variation game execution means 740. Is determined (step S15803). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S15803), a variation pattern table is selected when the time reduction function is activated and the probability variation function is not activated (step S15804). That is, when the time-short game is executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is not executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 17 is selected (see FIG. 75).

  If it is determined in step S15801 that the time reduction function is not inactive (NO in step S15803), a variation pattern table at the time of time reduction function activation and probability variation function activation is selected (step S15805). That is, when the time-short game is being executed by the time-short game execution means 742 and the probability change game is being executed by the probability change game execution means 740, the table 18 is selected (see FIG. 75).

  When the table 16 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, the variation pattern having the chance of variation number 44 is selected with a probability of 100% (that is, always). Then, the command 2CH is set as an effect command, and 24600 ms is set as a variation time value in the timer. In this embodiment, the change pattern of the chance number with the change number 44 is the same as the change pattern of the chance number with the change number 43. As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the time-shortening function is not activated and the probability changing function is not activated, only one kind of small hit display mode is stored in the display mode storage unit 830 described later.

  When the table 17 is selected in the small hit hour variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the song reach B intro of variation number 24 and the song reach of variation number 31 are acquired. Any variation pattern is selected with a probability of 40000/64000, 12000/64000, and 12000/64000, respectively, out of C intro and song reach D intro with variation number 38. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 40000/60000, the command 18H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the selected song reach B intro miss is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value as a timer. set. In this embodiment, the singing reach B intro of the variation number 24, the singing reach C intro of the variation number 31, and the singing reach D intro of the variation number 38 are respectively separated from the singing reach B intro of the variation number 23. It is the same mode as the variation pattern of the out of the song reach C intro of the variation number 30 and the out of the song reach D intro of the variation number 37.

  When the table 18 is selected in the short hit variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the first song reach B door of the variation number 49, the variation number 50 song reach B door per small, variable number 58 song reach C door first small hit, variable number 59 song reach C door second small hit, variable number 67 song reach D door first One variation pattern among the small hits and the second small hit of the song reach D door of the variation number 68 is 17000/64000, 14500/64000, 5000/64000, 11250/64000, Select with a probability of 5000/64000 and 11250/64000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the song reach B door first small hit is selected with a probability of 17000 of 64000, the command 31H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern per song reach B door first small is set as a production command and the fluctuation time A value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. In addition, in this embodiment, the song reach B door 1 small hit per variation number 49, the song reach B door small per 50 variation number, the song reach C door 1 small per variation number 58, variation number The variation patterns of the 59 song reach C door second small hit, the variation number 67 song reach D door first small hit, and the variation number 68 song reach D door second small hit are the variation numbers, respectively. 47 song reach B doors per short short, variable number 48 song reach B doors per 3 shorts, variable number 56 song reach C doors per short, variable number 57 song reach C doors per 3 shorts The variation pattern is the same as the variation pattern per short of the song reach, the short reach of the song reach D door of the variation number 65, and the short variation of the song reach D door of the variation number 66.

  Next, the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 76, 77, and 80. FIG. In the first special symbol out-of-design variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 76, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game is being executed by the time-shortening game execution means 742. Judgment is made (step S16001). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S 16001), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S 16003). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value. . If a win is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16003), and the table 19 (see FIG. 77) is selected (step S16004).

  In the present embodiment, the reach determination value is 0 to 25 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is “0”. Here, since the reach determination value is 0 to 23 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is “1”, compared with the case where the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0 (the reach determination value is 0 to 25). Low win probability in reach lottery. In addition, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of holds of the first special symbol is “2”, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holds of the first special symbol is 0 and 1. In addition, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is “3”, the winning probability in the reach lottery is larger than when the number of holdings of the first special symbol is 0, 1, and 2. Low.

  When it is determined in step S16003 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16003), the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the first special symbol hold counter 703) One of the tables 25 to 27 (see FIG. 80) is selected according to the counter value) (see FIG. 53) (step S16005). Specifically, if the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”, the table 25 is selected. If the reserved number of the first special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “2”, the table 26 is selected. If the reserved number of the first special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “3”, the table 27 is selected.

  Note that “the number of reserved first special symbols” means the number of reserved lotteries by the first special symbol lottery means 700 in the present embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, the determination of success / failure by the first special symbol determination / rejection determination means 704 is suspended. The number of holdings for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of reservations for the first special symbol. Instead of this, when a game ball wins the first starting port 390, the acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the random number extracting means for determination 702 for the first special symbol may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of random numbers for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per first special symbol 702 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol. Further, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the random number for determination of success / failure is acquired by the random number extraction means for determination of first special symbol 702, and the random number for determination of success / failure acquired by the first special symbol determination unit 704 is determined. However, it may be suspended to display the determination result on the first special symbol display 88. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the first special symbol display 88 of the determination result by the first special symbol determination unit 704 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the first special symbol.

  In this way, when the time-shortening function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the first special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is more likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the first special symbol hold is smaller. There is a correlation that the more the number of reserved special symbols is, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved first symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning per long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest .

  If it is determined in step S16001 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S16001), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S16017). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16017), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16018). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is performed in the same manner as the determination of whether or not the reach variation is performed when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16003, step S16007, step S16011, step S16014). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16018), and the table 20 (see FIG. 77) is selected (step S16019).

  When it is determined in step S16018 that the reach variation is not to be executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16018), the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the first special symbol hold counter 703) The table 28 or 29 (see FIG. 80) is selected according to the counter value) (see FIG. 53) (step S16020). Specifically, the table 28 is selected if the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”. If the reserved number of the first special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “2” or “3”, the table 29 is selected.

  If it is determined in step S16017 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16017), it is determined whether or not the reach variation is to be executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16021). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16021), and the table 21 (see FIG. 77) is selected (step S16022). However, since the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1 when the time-shortening function is activated and the probability-changing mechanism is not activated, that is, when the probability-changing gaming state is not, the reach variation is smaller than when the time-shortening function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16021 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16021), the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the first special symbol hold counter 703) 53) and the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713 (see FIG. 53), details will be described later). One of the tables 35 to 37 (see FIG. 80) is selected in accordance with the total number of holds (step S16023). Specifically, the table 35 is selected if the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”. If the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “2”, the table 36 is selected. If the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “3” to “7”, the table 37 is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16004, step S16005, step S16019, step S16020, step S16022, and step S16023, the first special symbol outlier variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 19 (see FIG. 77) is selected in the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, the variation number 8 is out of normal (1 Pre-design), variation number 9 out of normal (after one design), variation number 11 song reach A out (before encore), variation number 12 out of song reach A (after encore), variation number 14 song reach A long Deviating, singing reach B of variation number 16 (via singing reach A), detaching singing reach C of variation number 18 (via singing reach A), losing singing reach D of variation number 20 (via singing reach A), variation number 22 Singing reach B intro of change number 25, singing reach out of the first half of variation number 25, singing reach out of the second half of variation number 27, singing reach C intro of variation number 29, variation number 32 Out of the first half of the song reach C, out of the second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34, out of the song reach D of the variation number 36, out of the first half of the song reach D of the variation number 39, and out of the second half of the song reach D of the variation number 41 One of the fluctuation patterns is changed to 19000/14000, 14000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/64000, 4000/44000, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000/300, 64000, respectively. Select with a probability of 7000/6000, 2100/64000, 2100/64000, 3000/64000, 225/4000, 225/4000, 3000/6000, 225/4000, and 225/4000. . Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the normal deviation of the variation number 8 (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 19000 of 64000, the command 08H corresponding to the variation pattern of the normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command and the variation time Set the timer to 15600 ms. When the variation pattern of the normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol which is not a win, and is one symbol before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reach). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 20 (see FIG. 77) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B intro of the variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, Out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, Out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, Out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, The second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34 One of the fluctuation patterns of 100, 64000, 64000, and 65,000, respectively, out of the song reach D intro of variation number 36, out of the first half of song reach D of variation number 39, and out of the second half of song reach D of variation number 41. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when singing reach B out-of-track is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 100/64000, the command 16H corresponding to the variation pattern of singing reach B out-of-tro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time timer. Set to. When this song reach B intro is selected, the intro of the song (B) is played with the reach effect after starting the change of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 10), but before the singing starts. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a so-called unreachable manner different from both the big hit and the small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, and the command of the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and the variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 21 (see FIG. 77) is selected in the first special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of the first one, the first song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 are 40000/60000 and 64,000 minutes, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of song reach B door is selected as a variation pattern with a probability of 40000/64000, command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of song reach B door first image is set as a production command and the variation A time value of 21800 ms is set in the timer. When this song reach B door 1 off is selected, after the decoration pattern displayed on the production display device 115 (see FIG. 10) starts to change, the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the stage door is closed, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a so-called reach-removed manner in which the long hit, short hit and small hit are different. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is also selected with a probability of 12000 of 14000, and the commands 37H and 40H of the selected variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  In the first special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, when the table 25 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the normal variation with the variation number 1 is always selected, and the table 26 (see FIG. 80) is selected. When the table 27 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the shortened variation 2 of the variation number 3 is always selected. Further, when the table 28 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the probability variation shortening variation 1 of the variation number 6 is always selected, and when the table 29 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the probability variation shortening variation of the variation number 7 is always performed. 2 variation patterns are selected. When the table 35 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time fluctuation with the fluctuation number 8 is always selected, and when the table 36 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the short time fluctuation 1 with the fluctuation number 9 is always selected. When the variation pattern is selected and the table 37 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 2 of the variation number 10 is always selected.

  That is, in the first special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, when the reach variation is not performed, the variation pattern is set in accordance with the number of retained first special symbols (that is, the counter value by the first special symbol retaining counter 703). Will be selected. In the above variation pattern, after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner different from long hit, short hit and small hit without accompanying reach effect.

  Accordingly, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value 11000 ms is set in the timer. If the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 2, select the change pattern of the change 1 with the change number 2 and set the command 02H as the production command, and set the timer value to 9500 ms as the change time value. set. If the number of the first special symbol hold immediately after the start of the change is 3, select the change pattern of the shortened change 2 of the change number 3 and set the command 03H as the effect command and set the change time value to 7500 ms as the timer. set.

  Also, in the probability variation gaming state, when the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of variation is 0 or 1, the probability variation shortened variation 1 of variation number 6 is selected, the command 06H is set as an effect command, and the variation Set 7500 ms as a time value in the timer. If the number of retained symbols in the first special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 2 or 3, select the variable change shortening change 2 of the change number 7, set the command 07H as the production command, and set the time of change 5500ms as the timer. set.

  However, when the reach variation is not performed in the short-time gaming state, the variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the variation is 0 or 1, the short-time variation of variation number 8 is selected, the command 08H is set as an effect command, and the variation time value 11000 ms is set in the timer. When the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 2, the time shortening change 1 of the change number 9 is selected, the command 09H is set as the production command, and the change time value is set to 7500 ms in the timer. . When the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 3, the time shortening change 2 of the change number 9 is selected, the command 10H is set as the effect command, and the change time value is set to 5500 ms in the timer. .

  Next, the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process will be described based on FIG. 78, FIG. 79, and FIG. In the second special symbol out-of-symbol variation pattern table setting process of FIG. 78, the CPU 602 first determines whether or not the time-shortening function is inactive, that is, whether or not the time-shortening game execution means 742 is executing a time-shortening game. Judgment is made (step S16101). If it is determined that the time reduction function is not activated (YES in step S16101), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed (step S16103). Specifically, one reach random number is acquired from the reach random numbers from 0 to 240, and so-called reach lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acquired reach random number corresponds to a predetermined reach determination value. . If the reach lottery is won, it is determined that the reach change is executed (YES in step S16103), and the table 22 (see FIG. 79) is selected (step S16104).

  In the present embodiment, the reach determination value is 0 to 25 when the number of reserved special symbols is “0”. Here, since the reach determination value is 0 to 23 when the number of the second special symbol hold is “1”, compared with the case where the hold number of the second special symbol is 0 (the reach determination value is 0 to 25). The winning probability in the reach lottery is low. In addition, since the reach determination value is 0 to 21 when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is “2”, the winning probability in the reach lottery is lower than when the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 0 and 1. In addition, since the reach determination value is 0 to 15 when the number of holds of the second special symbol is “3”, the winning probability in the reach lottery is larger than when the number of holds of the second special symbol is 0, 1, and 2. Low.

  When it is determined in step S16103 that the reach variation is not executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16103), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( The table 30 or 31 (see FIG. 80) is selected according to the counter value) (see FIG. 53) (step S16105). Specifically, if the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”, the table 30 is selected. If the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is “2” or “3”, the table 31 is selected.

  In the present embodiment, “the number of second special symbol hold” means the number of lottery hold by the second special symbol lottery means 710. That is, in this embodiment, although the random number for success / failure determination is obtained by the random number extraction means 712 for determination per second special symbol, the determination of success / failure by the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714 is suspended. The number of reservations for determination of success / failure by the determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of reservations for the second special symbol. Instead of this, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the second special symbol determination random number extracting means 712 may be suspended. . In this case, the number of suspensions of acquisition of the random number for success / failure determination by the random number extraction means for determination per second special symbol 712 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol. Further, when a game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the second special symbol hit determination random number extracting means 712 acquires the pass / fail determination random number and the second special symbol pass / fail determination means 714 Although it is determined whether or not the obtained random number for determining whether or not is correct, displaying the determination result on the second special symbol display 86 may be suspended. In this case, the number of suspensions of display on the second special symbol display 86 of the determination result by the second special symbol determination unit 714 corresponds to the number of suspensions of the second special symbol.

  Thus, when the time reduction function is not activated, the reach lottery between the number of the second special symbol hold and the winning probability in the reach lottery is more likely to win the reach lottery as the number of the second special symbol hold is smaller. 2 There is a correlation that the more the number of reserved special symbols, the more difficult it is to win a reach lottery. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the number of reserved second symbol symbols is 3, for example, the expectation of winning per long hit, short hit or small win increases, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest .

  If it is determined in step S16101 that the time-saving function is not inactive, that is, it is in the time-saving gaming state (NO in step S16101), whether or not the probability variation function is inactive, that is, the probability-changing game is executed by the probability-changing game executing means 740. It is determined whether or not the state is not performed (step S16117). If it is determined that the probability variation function is not activated (YES in step S16117), it is determined whether or not reach variation is performed (step S16118). The determination as to whether or not to execute the reach variation is the same as the determination of whether or not to execute the reach variation when the time reduction function is not activated (step S16103, step S16107, step S16111, step S16114). Depending on the result. If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16118), and the table 23 (see FIG. 79) is selected (step S16119).

  When it is determined in step S16118 that the reach variation is not to be executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16118), the number of second special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713 ( One of the tables 32 to 34 (see FIG. 80) is selected according to the counter value) (see FIG. 53) (step S16120). Specifically, if the number of reserved special symbols immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”, the table 33 is selected. If the reserved number of the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “3”, the table 34 is selected.

  Further, if it is determined in step S16117 that the probability variation function is not inactive, that is, the probability variation gaming state (NO in step S16117), it is determined whether or not reach variation is executed as in the case where the time reduction function is not activated. (Step S16121). If winning is determined in the reach lottery, it is determined that the reach variation is executed (YES in step S16121), and the table 24 (see FIG. 79) is selected (step S16122). However, since the reach judgment value is only 0 and 1 when the time-shortening function is activated and the probability-changing mechanism is not activated, that is, when the probability-changing gaming state is not, the reach variation is smaller than when the time-shortening function is not activated. The probability of being executed is very low. As a result, when the reach variation is executed when the short-time function is activated and the probability variation mechanism is not activated, the expectation of winning the long hit, short hit or small hit increases, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  When it is determined in step S16121 that the reach variation is not to be executed, that is, if the reach lottery is not won (NO in step S16121), the number of first special symbols held immediately after the start of the variation (that is, the first special symbol hold counter 703) 53)) and the total number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation (that is, the counter value of the second special symbol holding counter 713 (see FIG. 53)). Then, any one of the tables 35 to 37 (see FIG. 80) is selected (step S16123). Specifically, the table 35 is selected if the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “0” or “1”. If the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “2”, the table 36 is selected. If the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol immediately after the start of fluctuation is “3” to “7”, the table 37 is selected.

  When each variation pattern table is selected in step S16104, step S16105, step S16119, step S16120, step S16122, and step S16123, the second special symbol out-of-design variation pattern table setting process is terminated.

  When the table 22 (see FIG. 79) is selected in the second special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and based on the acquired variation pattern random number, a normal deviation (1) of the variation number 73 is obtained. Pre-design), variation number 74 out of normal (after one design), variation number 76 song reach A out (before encore), variation number 77 out of song reach A (after encore), variation number 79 song reach A long Out of the song reach B of the variation number 81 (via song reach A), the song reach C of the variation number 83 (via song reach A), or the song reach D of the variation number 85 (via song reach A) These fluctuation patterns are 27500 / 64,000, 27500/64000, 2000/64000, 2000/44000, 64000, respectively. 100 of the 400,64000 minutes of 4400,64000 minutes, and, selected in 100 probability of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when a normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected with a probability of 27500 of 64000, the command 49H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal deviation (one symbol before) is set as an effect command, and the variation time value is 9500 ms. Set to timer. When the variation pattern of this normal deviation (one symbol before) is selected, the reach variation is executed after the decoration symbol displayed on the effect display device 115 starts to be varied, and thereafter, it is neither long hit, short hit or small hit. It is an aspect, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the symbol immediately before the reach symbol (for example, symbol 6 when symbol 7 is reached). Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with their respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When table 23 (see FIG. 79) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and song reach B intro of variation number 22 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. Out of the first half of the song reach B of the variation number 25, Out of the second half of the song reach B of the variation number 27, Out of the song reach C of the variation number 29, Out of the first half of the song reach C of the variation number 32, The second half of the song reach C of the variation number 34 One of the variation patterns of the singing reach D in the singing reach D of the variation number 36, the singing reach out of the first half of the singing reach D of the variation number 41, and the losing of the second half of the singing reach D of the variation number 41, respectively. 25,000 / min, 25000/64000, 50/64000, 3450/64000, 345/64000 , 3450 of 50,64000 minutes of 64000 minutes, and, to select with a probability of 3450 of 64000 minutes. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when song reach B intro miss is selected with a probability of 100/44000, command 16H corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of song reach B intro is set as a production command, and 25700 ms is set as a variation time value in a timer. . When this variation pattern of the song reach B intro is selected, the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the intro of the song (B) is performed with the reach effect. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, other variation patterns are selected with respective probabilities, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time value corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer.

  When the table 24 (see FIG. 79) is selected in the second special symbol variation pattern table setting process, a variation pattern random number is acquired, and the song reach B door of variation number 46 is acquired based on the acquired variation pattern random number. The variation patterns of the first one, the first song reach C door with the variation number 55, and the first variation of the song reach D door with the variation number 64 are 40000/60000 and 64,000 minutes, respectively. Select with a probability of 12000 and 12000 of 14000. Then, a command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set as an effect command, and a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the timer. For example, when the first pattern of the song reach B door is selected with a probability of 40000/64000 as the variation pattern, the command 2EH corresponding to the variation pattern of the first song reach B door out of the first set is set as a production command. Then, 21800 ms is set in the timer as the variation time value. When this song reach B door 1 is selected, the decorative design displayed on the effect display device 115 is displayed in a variable manner, and then the song (B) is played and the character is singing on the stage. After that, the stage door is closed, and the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner different from the long hit, short hit and small hit. Similarly, the variation pattern of the first singing reach C door and the first singing reach D door is selected with a probability of 12000/64000, and the commands 37H and 40H corresponding to the variation pattern are set as production commands. At the same time, 18600 ms is set in the timer as the fluctuation time value.

  In the second special symbol deviation fluctuation pattern table setting process, when the table 30 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the fluctuation number 1 is always selected, and the table 31 (see FIG. 80) is selected. The variation pattern of the shortening variation 3 of the variation number 4 is always selected. When the table 32 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the probability variation of the variation number 5 is always selected, and when the table 33 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the probability variation shortening variation 1 of the variation number 6 is always selected. When the variation pattern is selected and the table 34 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the probability variation shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is always selected. When the table 35 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the fluctuation pattern of the short time fluctuation with the fluctuation number 8 is always selected, and when the table 36 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the short time fluctuation 1 with the fluctuation number 9 is always selected. When the variation pattern is selected and the table 37 (see FIG. 80) is selected, the variation pattern of the short shortening variation 2 of the variation number 10 is always selected.

  That is, in the second special symbol out-of-fluctuation variation pattern table setting process, when the reach variation is not performed, the variation pattern is set in accordance with the number of second special symbols held (that is, the counter value by the second special symbol holding counter 713). Will be selected. In the above variation pattern, after the start of variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the effect display device 115, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner different from long hit, short hit and small hit without accompanying reach effect.

  Accordingly, in the normal gaming state, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of the change is 0 or 1, the normal change of the change number 1 is selected, the command 01H is set as an effect command, and the change time value 11000 ms is set in the timer. If the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 2 or 3, the change pattern of the shortened change 3 of the change number 4 is selected, the command 04H is set as an effect command, and the change time value is 5500 ms. Set to timer.

  Also, in the probability variation gaming state, when the number of holdings of the second special symbol immediately after the start of variation is 0 or 1, the probability variation variation of variation number 5 is selected, command 05H is set as an effect command, and variation time value Is set to 9500 ms in the timer. When the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of the variation is 2, the probability variation shortening variation 1 of the variation number 6 is selected, the command 06H is set as the effect command, and the variation time value is set to 7500 ms in the timer. . When the number of holds of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the variation is 3, the probability variation shortening variation 2 of the variation number 7 is selected, the command 07H is set as the effect command, and the variation time value is set to 5500 ms in the timer. .

  However, when the reach variation is not performed in the short-time gaming state, the variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reservations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Therefore, in the short-time gaming state, when the number of holdings of the first special symbol immediately after the start of the variation is 0 or 1, the short-time variation of variation number 8 is selected, the command 08H is set as an effect command, and the variation time value 11000 ms is set in the timer. When the number of retained first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 2, the time shortening change 1 of the change number 9 is selected, the command 09H is set as the production command, and the change time value is set to 7500 ms in the timer. . When the number of reserved first special symbols immediately after the start of the change is 3, the time shortening change 2 of the change number 9 is selected, the command 10H is set as the effect command, and the change time value is set to 5500 ms in the timer. .

  As described above, the variation pattern setting process described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 85 is summarized as follows. .

  In the lottery performed by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is a long win, the first display mode determining means 810 uses the first special symbol image display control means 851 to display the common symbol display area 115c. The table (one of Tables 1 to 6) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A predetermined per-length display mode is selected and determined from the long-per-row display modes stored in the table (step S1540). Each of the tables 1 to 6 stores a plurality of per-length display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the jackpot is won, and the winning jackpot is short hit, the first display mode determining means 810 is the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851. The display mode to be displayed on the table is determined based on the gaming state when the short win is won (one of the tables 13 to 15) stored in the short win display mode stored in a predetermined short win The display mode is selected and determined (step S1560). Each of the tables 13 to 15 stores a plurality of short hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost, and the small win is won, the first display mode determining means 810 displays the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851. The display mode is changed to a predetermined small hit display mode from among the small hit display modes stored in a table (any one of the tables 16 to 18) determined based on the gaming state when winning the small hit. The selection is determined (step S1580). Each of the tables 16 to 18 stores a plurality of small hit display modes.

  In the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the first special symbol image display control means 851 displays a display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c. Outgoing stored in a table (one of tables 19 to 21, 25 to 29, 35 to 37) determined based on the gaming state at the time of being performed (ie, when the lottery result is out) A predetermined out-of-reach display mode or out-of-reach display mode is determined from the display mode or out-of-reach display mode (step S1600). Specifically, in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700, a lottery (step S16003, step S16018, step S16021) is performed to determine whether or not a reach effect is to be performed when a lottery is lost. When the reach lottery is lost, one of the tables 25-29, 35-37 is selected based on the counter value of the first special symbol hold counter 703 (step S16005, step S16020, step S16023). When the reach lottery is won, the tables 19 to 21 are selected (step S16004, step S16019, step S16022). That is, when the lottery is lost, one of the tables 25-29, 35-37 is selected based on the number of holds, and the out-of-display mode stored in the selected table is displayed. When the reach lottery is won, the predetermined reach out display mode is selected from the plurality of reach out display modes stored in the tables 19 to 21.

  When the jackpot is won in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the winning jackpot is a long win, the second display mode determining means 820 is made the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852. The table (one of Tables 7 to 12) determined based on the game state when winning per long and the type per long (per short length or normal length per probability change) A special display mode per length is selected and determined from the special display modes per length stored in the table (step S1550). Each of the tables 7 to 12 stores a plurality of special display modes per length.

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the jackpot is won and the winning jackpot is short hit, the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852, Similarly to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the one special symbol lottery means 700 is short-winning, the gaming state when the short-winning is won Is determined to be any one of the tables 13 to 15, and a predetermined short hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1560).

  The first special symbol is displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the second special symbol image display control means 852 when the big bonus is lost in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710 and the small bonus is won. Similarly to the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the first special symbol image display control means 851 when the lottery result by the lottery means 700 is a small hit, it is based on the gaming state at the time of winning the small hit. One of the tables 16 to 18 is determined, and a predetermined small hit display mode is selected and determined from the determined tables (step S1580).

  In the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, when the big win is lost, and even when the jackpot is also lost, the second special symbol image display control means 852 displays the display mode displayed in the common symbol display area 115c by the lottery. Outgoing display mode or reach stored in a table (one of tables 22 to 24, 30 to 37) determined based on the gaming state when played (ie, when the lottery result is out) A predetermined out display mode or reach out display mode is determined from the out display modes (step S1600). Specifically, in the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710, a lottery (step S16103, step S16118, step S16121) is carried out as to whether or not a reach effect is to be performed when a lottery is won. When it is out of the reach lottery, one of the tables 30 to 37 is selected based on the counter value of the second special symbol hold counter 713 (step S16105, step S16120, step S16123), and the reach lottery is selected. When winning, tables 22-24 are selected (step S16104, step S16119, step S16122). That is, when the lottery is lost, one of the tables 30 to 37 is selected based on the number of holds, and the out-of-display mode stored in the selected table is displayed. When the reach lottery is won, the predetermined reach out display mode is selected from the plurality of reach out display modes stored in the tables 22 to 24.

  It should be noted that the short win display mode and the small win display mode are not limited to the same display mode in the case of being based on the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 and in the case of being based on the lottery by the second special symbol lottery means 710. However, the display modes may be very similar to each other, for example, the variation times are slightly different.

  In the present embodiment, “immediately after the start of variation” means immediately after the first special symbol counter or the second special symbol counter is subtracted in the variation start process (step S130).

[In-flight processing]
Next, the changing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process. In the changing process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (step S1801). That is, it is determined whether either the first special symbol display 84 or the second special symbol display 86 is changing. If it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (NO in step S1801), the changing process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the special symbol is changing (YES in step S1801), the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the variable time has ended. That is, it is determined whether or not the variation time set in the timer has elapsed in the variation pattern setting process. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in step S1802), the changing process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in step S1802), the special symbol fluctuation is stopped (step S1803). That is, the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (both see FIG. 53) in the changing one of the first special symbol indicator 84 or the second special symbol indicator 86. A result is derived and displayed, and a change stop command is output to the peripheral control board 662.

  When the variation of the special symbol is stopped (step S1803), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S1804). That is, as a result of the fact that the current fluctuation is stopped and the lottery result is derived, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is started. If it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S1804), the processing flag is updated to “3” (step S1805), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1804), it is next determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1806). That is, it is determined whether or not the small hit game is started as a result of the current fluctuation being stopped and the lottery result being derived. If it is determined that the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “4” (step S1807), and the changing process is terminated. If it is determined that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in step S1806), the processing flag is updated to “0” (step S1808), and the changing process is terminated.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, an example of the jackpot game start process will be described based on FIG. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. In this jackpot game start process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation (step S2001). Specifically, whether or not the probability variation game execution means 740 controls the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 714, that is, the first special symbol success / failure determination means 704 and the second special symbol success / failure determination means 704. It is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure by the symbol success / failure determination means 714 (both refer to FIG. 53) is made based on the special symbol probability change time determination table 708. If it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation (YES in step S2001), the operation of the probability variation function is stopped (step S2002), and the process proceeds to step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation function is not in operation (NO in step S2001), the process directly proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the time reduction function is operating. Specifically, whether or not the short-time game execution means 742 controls the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 (see FIG. 53), that is, whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 determines whether or not the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 It is determined whether or not to make a determination based on the determination table. If it is determined that the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S2003), the operation of the time reduction function is stopped (step S2004), and the process proceeds to step S2005. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving function is not operating (NO in step S2003), the process directly proceeds to step S2005.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether or not it is a long hit. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the long hit flag is ON. If it is determined that it is per long (YES in step S2005), the number of rounds per long, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to 15 rounds, for example, the opening time per round is set to 30 seconds, the limited number is set to 9 pieces, and the opening / closing device to be opened is for production in the first round and the second round, for example. The opening / closing device 398 is set, the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is set for the 3rd to 14th rounds, and the effect opening / closing device 398 (see FIG. 10) is set for the 15th round. If it is determined that it is not long hit, the number of short hit rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number are set, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set. Specifically, the number of rounds is set to, for example, 2 rounds, the opening time per round is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 9, and the opening / closing device to be opened is set to, for example, the production opening / closing device 398 .

  When the number of rounds, the opening time per round, the limit number, and the opening / closing device to be opened are set in either step S2006 or step S2007, the processing flag is updated to “5” (step S2008), and the jackpot game starts The process ends.

[Small hit game start processing]
Next, based on FIG. 83, an example of a small hit game start process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. In the small hit game starting process, first, the number of small hits released, the opening time per time, the limit number, and the opening device to be opened are set (step S2201). Specifically, for example, the number of times of opening is set to 2, for example, the opening time per time is set to, for example, 0.3 seconds, the limited number is set to, for example, 9, and the opening device to be opened is set in the effect opening / closing device 398. Thereafter, the process flag is updated to “6” and the small hit game start process is terminated.

[Special electric utility jackpot control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric utility jackpot control process. First, in the special electric utility jackpot control process, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2401). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is open. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2401), then whether or not the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 (the effect opening / closing device 398 or the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400) has elapsed. Is determined (step S2402). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the opening time of the switchgear 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2402), the switchgear 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2402 that the opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2402), it is determined whether a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2403). . Specifically, the limited number of game balls set in the jackpot game start process are the opening / closing device 397 in which the opening operation is executed (when the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed, the opening / closing device for the effect) 398, when the opening / closing operation of the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is being executed, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 has been accepted. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 that is performing the opening operation (YES in step S2403), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2404), and the special electric accessory big hit control process is performed. finish. If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has not received a limited number of game balls (NO in step S2403), the special electric accessory big hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2401), it is determined whether a predetermined number of rounds has been reached (step S2405). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds set in the jackpot game start process has been reached. If it is determined that the predetermined number of rounds has not been reached (NO in step S2405), a predetermined opening device among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400 is opened (step S2406). The special electric utility jackpot control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2405 that the predetermined number of rounds has been reached (YES in step S2405), the jackpot flag is turned off (step S2407), and it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation ( Step S2408). Specifically, using a design random number, it is determined whether or not the first start symbol 390 side is a first control symbol that suppresses the game, and as a result, when it is determined that it is the first control symbol Judged to be accompanied by probability fluctuation. If it is determined that the jackpot is accompanied by a probability fluctuation (YES in step S2408), the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S2409), and then it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit. Specifically, if the long hit flag is ON, it is determined that the long hit is reached. If it is determined that it is a long hit (YES in step S2410), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2411), then the time reduction function is activated (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  If it is determined in step S2401 that it is not long hit (NO in step S2410), the short hit flag is turned off (step S2413), and then it is determined whether or not the winning operation is in the short-time function operation (step S2414). That is, when the short hit is made, the short hit flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to step S2414 to determine whether or not the short time function is in operation. If it is determined that the winning function is in operation (YES in step S2414), the operation of the shortening function is started (step S2412), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  Returning to step S2408, if it is determined that the jackpot is not accompanied by probability fluctuation (NO in step S2408), the long hit flag is turned off (step S2415), the operation of the time reduction function is started (step S2416), and the time reduction function is activated. The prescribed number of operations (for example, 100 times) is set (step S2417), and the process proceeds to step S2418.

  In step S2418, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special symbol electric accessory big hit control process is terminated. The special electric accessory is a concept including an effect opening / closing device 398, a jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400, an effect opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 568, and a jackpot gaming opening / closing device opening / closing solenoid 642.

[Special electric accessory small hit control processing]
Next, an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special electric accessory small hit control process. In this special electric accessory small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined limited number of game balls have been received by the opening / closing device 397 (step S2501). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the limit number (for example, 9) of game balls set in the small hit game start process has been received by the opening / closing device 397. If it is determined that a limited number of game balls are not received by the opening / closing device 397 (NO in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2502). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2502), a predetermined opening / closing device (for example, the opening / closing device for effect 398) is opened (step S2503) among the effect opening / closing device 398 and the jackpot gaming opening / closing device 400. ), The special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2502), it is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device (for example, the effect opening / closing device 398) has elapsed (step S2504). . Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening time (for example, 0.3 seconds) set in the small hit game start processing has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time of the predetermined opening / closing device 397 has not elapsed (NO in step S2504), the special electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined in step S2504 that the predetermined opening time of the opening / closing device 397 has elapsed (YES in step S2504), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2505), and it is determined whether a predetermined number of times of opening has been reached. (Step S2506). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) set in the small hit game start procedure. At this time, if it is determined that the predetermined number of times of opening has not been reached (NO in step S2506), the electric accessory small hit control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of times of opening / closing device 397 has reached a predetermined number of times of opening (YES in step S2506), the process proceeds to step S2509.

  Returning to step S2501, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 has received a limited number of game balls (YES in step S2501), it is determined whether the opening / closing device 397 is open (step S2507). If it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is open (YES in step S2507), the opening / closing device 397 is closed (step S2508), and the process proceeds to step S2509. Returning to step S2507, if it is determined that the opening / closing device 397 is not open (NO in step S2507), the process directly proceeds to step S2509.

  In step S2509, the processing flag is updated to “0”, and the special electric accessory small hitting control process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the opening time of the switchgear is set to 0.3 seconds, for example. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the maximum number of winnings (for example, 9) has been won in the switchgear. If the maximum number of winnings has been won, it is small even if the predetermined number of times of opening (for example, 2) has not been reached. The hit game ends. However, since the opening time of the switchgear in the small hit game is set so that it is extremely difficult to win the maximum number of winnings, in most cases the predetermined number of opening without winning the maximum winnings The switchgear will be opened (for example, twice).

[About priority change]
Here, the state control is performed for the first game suppression state in which the game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed and the second game suppression state in which the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side is suppressed. This processing procedure will be described in detail.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the design random number at the time of winning the jackpot is the first suppressed random number, a predetermined period after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is performed (this implementation In the embodiment, at least the period until the jackpot is won again is controlled as the first game suppression state in which the game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed.

  During the period controlled as the first game suppression state, the game on the first start port 390 side is executed as a post-rotation of the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 by the above-described control after the suspension. Will come to be. Therefore, as long as the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is held, the game on the first start port 390 side and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side Only the games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 are executed.

  Furthermore, during the same period, the first start port 390 is increased by increasing the frequency of opening and closing the pair of movable pieces 396 (operation between the open state and the closed state) (by operating the time reduction function). A control (second game continuation control) is performed so that the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394, which is digested prior to the game on the side, is not suspended. Note that this second game continuation control is realized by performing the success / failure determination by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 based on the normal symbol time / short time determination table (table with a short lottery time and high winning probability) 727. ing.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol random number at the time of winning the jackpot is the second suppressed random number, a predetermined period after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning is performed (in this embodiment, at least the jackpot is won). The period until winning again) is controlled as the second game suppression state in which the games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 are suppressed.

  During the period controlled as the second game suppression state, the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is executed as a post-rotation of the game on the first start port 390 side by the above-described control after the suspension. Will come to be. Therefore, as long as the game on the first start port 390 side is put on hold, the first start port of the game on the first start port 390 side and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side will be described. Only the game on the 390 side is executed.

  Furthermore, during the same period, the pair of movable pieces 396 are opened / closed (open state) only for the first predetermined period after the control to the second game suppression state (for example, the period until 100 lottery games are performed). The first start port while saving the game hold on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side by increasing the frequency of operation (operation between the first and second closed states) (by operating the time reduction function) Control (second game saving control) that enables the game on the 390 side to be executed is performed. This second game saving control is realized by performing the determination of success / failure by the normal symbol success / failure determination means 724 based on the normal symbol time / short time determination table (table with a short lottery time and high winning probability) 727. ing.

  As described above, the design random number (the first special symbol display 84, the first design symbol display 84, the first design symbol display 84, the first design symbol display 84) (2) In addition to the symbols displayed on the special symbol display 86, it is also performed according to the symbols that are used as the criteria for determining the symbols displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 115). By simply looking at the type of symbol used for symbol display (decorative symbol display), it becomes possible to recognize in advance the future of the reservation digestion. Thereby, even if the advance and the turn related to the above-mentioned hold digestion are changed frequently, the player can appropriately perform the game corresponding to the advance and the stop related to the stop digestion without being confused. .

  In addition, in this embodiment, a first game suppression state in which a game on the first start port 390 side is suppressed, and a second game suppression state in which a game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side is suppressed. Among these, only one winning probability (2/631) determined in advance in the first game suppression state can be changed to a higher probability (20/631).

  That is, in this case, the above-mentioned advance is performed only when the game execution on the first start port 390 side is suppressed and the first game control state is controlled so that only the games on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 can be executed. A setting change to a higher probability of a predetermined winning probability can be expected. In other words, when the game execution on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is suppressed and the game is controlled to the second game suppression state in which only the game on the first start port 390 side can be executed, It is impossible to expect a setting change to a higher probability of a predetermined winning probability. Therefore, in both the game on the first start port 390 side and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side, the game performance in which the determination of the jackpot is performed with the predetermined one winning probability. While maintaining the above, it gives an impression that the game on the first start port 390 side is disadvantaged by a low winning probability, and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 side has a high win probability It will be possible to give the impression of being favored.

[About fluctuation time]
First, a case will be described where both the time-saving function and the probability changing function are controlled to the normal gaming state in which they are not activated. In the normal gaming state, the time-shortening function does not operate, so that the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 rather than winning the first starting port 390. That is more difficult.

  In such a normal game state (second game suppression state), when the draw result of the first special symbol is out and the reach effect is not performed, the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 or 1 is 11000 ms (normal number 1) Fluctuation), the fluctuation time when the holding number is 2 is 9500 ms (normal shortening fluctuation 1 of fluctuation number 2), and the fluctuation time when the holding number is 3 is 7500 ms (normal shortening fluctuation 2 of fluctuation number 3). In addition, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is out of reach and the reach effect is not performed, the fluctuation time when the holding number is 0 or 1 is 11000 ms (normal fluctuation of fluctuation number 1), and the holding number is 2 or 3 The fluctuation time is 5500 ms (normally shortened fluctuation 2 of fluctuation number 3). In other words, in the case of detachment without a reach effect, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of holding of the first special symbol is smaller, and the variation time of the second special symbol is smaller as the number of holding of the second special symbol is smaller become longer. Here, if both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. . Accordingly, in the case of a departure without a reach effect, the start-up memory of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the number of holdings decreases. It is easy to generate a state in which the is held, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 is more difficult to win than the first starting port 390, but the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is preferentially performed over the lottery process for the start memory, the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol will be performed quickly despite winning the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. As a result, the start memory of the second special symbol is difficult to accumulate (that is, it is difficult to maintain the hold state for the start memory of the second special symbol). Then, the number of holds of the second special symbol (second display mode) is not easily accumulated and displayed in the hold display area 1150, and the player holds the maximum number of holds (here, 8) to satisfy the player. It becomes difficult to give.

  In that regard, in the normal gaming state according to the present embodiment, the lottery process for the start memory of the first special symbol is performed in preference to the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol, so that the hold display In the area 1150, the number of holdings (second display mode) for the start memory of the second special symbol is likely to be accumulated (that is, the holding state of the start memory of the second special symbol is easily maintained), It can give satisfaction. On the other hand, the lottery process for the start memory of the first special symbol based on winning in the first starting port 390 that is relatively easy to win is facilitated, and the generation of invalid balls is suppressed for the first special symbol. A decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  Next, a description will be given of the case where the time-varying function and the probability-changing function are controlled to the probability-changing gaming state in which both are operated. In the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation function operates, so that it is easier to win a big hit than the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Further, since the time-shortening function is activated in the probability variation gaming state, the second starting port 392 is easier to win than the first starting port 390 for the game ball that is driven toward the gaming area 37. As a result, the second The winning frequency at the start port 392 is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It should be noted that the ease of winning a prize at the first start port 390 and the third start port 394 is unchanged regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  In such a probability variation game state (first game restrained state), when the draw effect of the first special symbol is out and the reach effect is not performed, the variation time when the number of holdings is 0 or 1 is 7500 ms (the probability variation of variation number 6). The fluctuation time when the shortening fluctuation 1) is 2 or 3 is 5500 ms (probability fluctuation shortening fluctuation 2 of fluctuation number 7). Also, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is off and no reach effect is performed, the fluctuation time when the number of holds is 0 or 1 is 9500 ms (variable change of fluctuation number 5), and the fluctuation when the number of holds is 2 The time is 7500 ms (probable variation shortening variation 1 of variation number 6), and the variation time when the number of holdings is 3 is 5500 ms (probability variation shortening variation 2 of variation number 7). In other words, in the case of detachment without a reach effect, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of holding of the first special symbol is smaller, and the variation time of the second special symbol is smaller as the number of holding of the second special symbol is smaller become longer. Here, if both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. . Therefore, in the case of a departure without a reach effect, the start-up memory of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is made by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the number of holdings decreases. This makes it easy to maintain the state of holding, and can suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the probability variation game state, the probability variation function is activated, so it is easy to win a big win. It is preferable to generate a jackpot game at an early stage. Therefore, in the probability variation gaming state, the second start symbol 392 or the third start port 394 is easier to win than the first start port 390 due to the operation of the time shortening function, so the start memory of the second special symbol is stored in the first special symbol. The digestion was given priority over the starting memory. In addition, in the case of detachment without a reach effect for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation time is relatively short as long as the number of holdings is the same as in the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. It was made to become. As a result, in the probability variation gaming state, the number of lotteries per unit time increases compared to the normal gaming state and the short-time gaming state. Can be made. Then, the player can fully enjoy the excitement of the probability-changing gaming state, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, it is preferable that the lottery process based on the second special symbol is set so that the ratio of winning the probability variation jackpot with the activation of the probability variation function in the jackpot is higher than the lottery processing based on the first special symbol. It is. As a result, in the probability variation gaming state, the probability of winning the probability variation is increased by preferentially digesting the start memory of the second special symbol over the start memory of the first special symbol, and the probability variation gaming state is continuously generated. This is because the probability can be increased.

  Next, a case will be described in which the short-time gaming state is activated but the probability changing function is not activated, and is controlled to the short-time gaming state. In the short-time game state, the short-time function is activated, so that the game ball that is driven toward the game area 37 is easier to win in the second start port 392 than in the first start port 390. As a result, the second start The winning frequency to the mouth 392 is higher than that in the normal gaming state. It should be noted that the ease of winning a prize at the first start port 390 and the third start port 394 is unchanged regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated.

  In such a short game state (first predetermined period after being controlled to the second game restrained state), if the lottery result of the first special symbol is out and the reach effect is not performed, and the lottery result of the second special symbol is When the reach effect is not performed, the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 or 1 is 11000 ms (short fluctuation when the fluctuation number is 8), and the fluctuation time when the holding number is 2 is 7500 ms (shortening when the fluctuation number is 9) Fluctuation 1), the fluctuation time when the number of holds is 3 is 5500 ms (short fluctuation fluctuation 2 of fluctuation number 10). In other words, in the case of detachment without a reach effect, the variation time of the first special symbol becomes longer as the number of holding of the first special symbol is smaller, and the variation time of the second special symbol is smaller as the number of holding of the second special symbol is smaller become longer. Here, if both the hold of the first special symbol and the hold of the second special symbol become 0, neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is changed, and the interest is lowered. . Accordingly, in the case of a departure without a reach effect, the start-up memory of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set by increasing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the number of holdings decreases. It is easy to generate a state in which the is held, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the short-time gaming state, the third starting port 394 is easier to win than the first starting port 390, but the starting memory of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the starting memory of the first special symbol. Then, at the time when the short-time gaming state is ended and the state is shifted to the normal gaming state, the number of starting memories held in the first special symbol is almost held up to an upper limit value (here, four), while the second special symbol is held. There is a tendency that the number of symbols stored in the starting memory is small (for example, one or two). In this way, when the transition from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state is made, if the number of reserved start memory for the first special symbol is almost the upper limit and the number of reserved start memory for the second special symbol is small, Even if the ball is fired toward the game area, the number of invalid balls tends to increase. This is because, in the normal gaming state, it is more difficult to win the third starting port 394 than the first starting port 390, and thus it is more difficult to place the starting memory of the second special symbol on hold than the starting memory of the first special symbol. Because it becomes. Therefore, when the number of holdings of the starting memory of the first special symbol is almost the upper limit and the number of holdings of the starting memory of the second special symbol is small, there are many players who perform so-called stoppages, Occupancy rate decreases. Furthermore, even for the player, there is an irritation to the stop-off even though the start-up storage of the second special symbol is small. In view of the above, when the short-time gaming state is ended and the normal gaming state is entered, it is preferable that the start-up memory of the second special symbol is held to substantially the upper limit value (four here).

  In that regard, in the short-time gaming state according to the present embodiment, the lottery process for the start memory of the first special symbol is performed in preference to the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol, so the short-time gaming state is ended. Then, when the game state is shifted to the normal game state, it is possible to make a state in which the hold of the start memory of the second special symbol is accumulated as much as possible (in some cases, the state is accumulated up to the upper limit value). As a result, when the short-time gaming state is ended and the normal gaming state is entered, the base game with the total reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being held to almost the upper limit value (eight in this case). The state can also be started, and a decrease in the game can be suppressed. Since the normal gaming state is started with the reserved balls of the second special symbol that are difficult to be held at least in the normal gaming state being held to almost the upper limit value (four in this case), the decrease in interest is suppressed. The

  In the short-time gaming state, as in the normal gaming state, as long as the first special symbol starting memory (holding by the first special symbol holding counter 703) exists, the second special symbol starting memory (second special game) (The hold by the symbol hold counter 713) is not released, but the first display mode and the second display mode are not continuously displayed in a row as in the normal gaming state, The first display mode and the second display mode are displayed side by side. This is to make it easier for the player to grasp the start memory number of the first special symbol (so-called holding number) and the start memory number of the second special symbol in the short-time gaming state. That is, in the short-time gaming state, the player's attention tends to be attracted by the starting memory number of the second special symbol, so the starting memory number of the first special symbol and the starting memory number of the second special symbol are clearly defined. It is preferable for the player to be able to grasp. In the short-time gaming state, the player's attention is attracted by the starting memory number of the second special symbol. In the short-time gaming state, the starting memory of the first special symbol is maintained while maintaining the upper limit of the starting memory number of the second special symbol. This is because, when the lottery process is preferentially performed, the start memory number of the second special symbol is likely to become the upper limit when shifting from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, it is not necessary to clearly grasp the starting memory number of the first special symbol and the starting memory number of the second special symbol.

  In the short-time gaming state, the first starting port 390 is less likely to win the game ball than the third starting port 394, so the lottery process of the first special symbol is prioritized over the lottery process of the second special symbol. Then, there may be a discussion about whether the lottery process and, as a result, the change in the special symbol is interrupted. However, in the short-time game state, even if the start memory of the first special symbol is no longer held, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 392 is promoted, so the lottery process for the start memory of the second special symbol Can be conducted without interruption, so there is no room for such discussion.

[Variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86 to FIG. 88, a variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153 displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described. The decorative symbols are composed of a plurality of symbol sequences. In this embodiment, the left symbol sequence 1153a displayed on the left side as viewed from the player, the middle symbol sequence 1153b displayed in the middle as viewed from the player, And, it is composed of three symbol rows of right symbol row 1153c displayed on the right side as viewed from the player.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a decorative symbol when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means is derived to the effect display device. That is, FIG. 86 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 86 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 during change, and FIG. 86 (C) is a decorative symbol. FIG. 86D shows a mode after the fluctuation stop of 1153, FIG. 86D shows a mode for deriving that it is reach, and FIG. 86E shows a mode during the change of the decorative pattern 1153 after reach. FIG. As shown in FIG. 86 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the variation in which the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols that are not related at all is the “reach” in this embodiment. It is “out-of-range fluctuation without production”. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), when the stop symbol in the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol in the right symbol row 1153c are the same, reach is derived, and as shown in FIG. 86 (E). Only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different is the “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment, and the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b. The variation of the decorative symbol 1153 when all the symbol columns 1153b stop at the same symbol is the “big hit variation” in the present embodiment.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, the decorative mode of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll that scrolls in the vertical direction regardless of whether or not the time reduction function is activated. It is a fluctuation.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a variation of the decorative symbol pattern when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means is off when the time-shortening function is not activated. That is, FIG. 87 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect before the start of change of the decorative symbol 1153, FIG. 87 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect during the change of the decorative symbol 1153, and FIG. 87 (C) is reach. FIG. 87 (D) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a certain situation, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 87 (B), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is such that the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are substantially at the same position as the stop position (the position shown in FIG. 87 (A)) before the change starts. While rotating, the front and back surfaces are alternately displayed while staying, and the middle symbol row 1153b is scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the vertical direction as in the mode shown in FIG. 86 (B). Then, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c stop rotating almost simultaneously, and then the middle symbol row 1153b stops.

  Although not shown, the fluctuation in which the stop symbols in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols that are completely unrelated to each other is referred to as “displacement fluctuation without reach effect” in this embodiment. It is. On the other hand, when the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are always the same symbol, the reach is derived as shown in FIG. 87 (C), and further, as shown in FIG. 87 (D). Only the symbol row 1153b scrolls. As a result, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), when only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b is different, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect” in the present embodiment. If the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b all stop at the same symbol due to the scroll variation shown in FIG. 87 (D), the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit” in this embodiment. Fluctuation ".

  Here, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is derived to the effect display device 115 when the short-time function is activated is the effect of the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 being the effect display. This is almost the same as the variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 in the case of being derived to the device 115. That is, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is a scroll variation in which the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c scroll in the vertical direction (more specifically, the direction from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). It is. And it stops in order of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b.

  Thus, if the time-shortening function is not activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115, and the second special symbol lottery means 710. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device 115 is different. On the other hand, if the time reduction function is activated, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710. Is the same as the variation pattern of the decorative symbol 1153 when the symbol is derived to the effect display device 115.

  As described above, if the time reduction function is not activated, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 is derived to the effect display device 115 and the lottery result by the second special symbol lottery means 710 is displayed on the effect display device 115. The variation pattern of the decorative design 1153 differs depending on the derived case. Also, a display mode of information indicating that the information is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703 displayed in the hold display area 1150 and a second special symbol hold counter 713 displayed in the hold display area 1150 It is also different from the display mode of information indicating that there is.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a variation pattern of the decorative symbols when the lottery result is derived to the effect display device when the lottery result by each special symbol lottery means is short hit or small hit. That is, when the lottery result is a short hit or a small hit, both of the lotteries have the same table 13 regardless of whether the lottery is by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Since it is selected, the same variation mode is performed.

  88 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative pattern 1153 before the start of change, FIGS. 88 (B) to (G) are diagrams showing an aspect of the decorative pattern 1153 during change, and FIG. 88 (H) is It is a figure which shows the aspect after the fluctuation | variation stop of the decoration design 1153. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 changes in the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c in the vertical direction (more specifically, from the top to the bottom as viewed from the player). This is a scroll fluctuation that scrolls in the direction of heading. As shown in FIG. 88D, after the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c are displayed larger than the display of the middle symbol row 1153b, the wife runs and stops in the left symbol row 1153a (see FIG. 88D). 88 (E)), and then the wife runs to the right symbol row 1153c (see FIG. 88 (F)) and stops (FIG. 88 (G)). As shown in FIG. 88 (G), the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b is scrolled vertically. The aspect to do is reach variation that may be won per short hit, small hit or probable length. As shown in FIG. 88 (H), when the “legend” symbol stops in the middle symbol row 1153b, the occurrence of the short hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, or the long hit gaming state is determined.

[About sub-main processing]
Next, processing executed by the CPU 664 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 94. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady processing.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control board 662 performs an initial setting process (step S310). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S310) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set is started (step S312).

  In this embodiment, the CPU 664 generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady treatment. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms While the progress flag T is set, the 16 ms progress flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S312 (the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S314), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S316).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the effect display device 115 and the panel decoration lamp 690 and the like via the display device control board 116 and the lamp driving board 688 is executed based on the command received from the main control board 131, respectively. Is done. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to step S312 again, and each time the 16 ms elapse flag T is set (that is, every 16 ms), the above-described steps S314 and S316 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S312 (when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the CPU 664 executes the processes of steps S320 to S420. In the command analysis process in step S320, the command received from the main control board 131 is analyzed. In the effect control process in step S340, the control process related to the effect display device 115 is executed based on the effect command related to the variation pattern received by the command receiving means 750.

  In the sound control process in step 360, a control process related to the speakers 18 and 57 for generating a sound effect (for example, BGM or sound) is executed. In this sound control process, a process of changing the BGM according to the gaming state or the mode of the effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is performed.

In the lamp control processing in step S380, control processing related to the panel decoration lamp 690 and the center decoration lamp 304 is performed. In the information output process in step S400, a command related to the variation pattern, a command related to the start winning to each start port 390, 392, 394 and other display commands are transmitted to the display device control board 116, and each lamp is turned on / off. A turn-off command is transmitted to the lamp driving board 688. In the random number update process of step S420, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S340) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S320-step S420 in a 16 ms regular process is complete | finished within 16 ms. Even if 16 ms or more is required from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms has elapsed since the start of the 16 ms steady process (command in step S320). Do not execute from analysis processing. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S312 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the 16 ms steady process ends, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S330) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 ms steady process.

  FIG. 91 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the CPU 664 first determines whether a command has been received from the main control board 131 (step S321). In this embodiment, when a command is received from the main control board 131, other processes such as a 16 ms steady process are interrupted to generate a command reception interrupt, and the received command is received by the RAM 668 mounted on the peripheral control board 662. Save in the receive command storage area. The received command storage area is stored in each area corresponding to the order of command reception. Then, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the reception command is stored, the reception command having the reception order in the reception command storage area is read (step S322).

  It is determined whether or not the read received command is a start opening prize command (step S323), and if the read reception command is a start opening winning command (YES in step S323), it is determined whether or not it is a first start opening effective prize. (Step S324). If it is the first start opening effective winning (YES in step S324), the first starting opening effective winning flag is turned ON (step S325). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  In step S324, if it is not the first start opening valid winning (NO in step S324), it is determined whether or not the second / third starting opening is effective (step S326), and the second / third starting opening effective winning is determined. If there is (YES in step S326), the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are turned ON (step S327). Then, the command analysis process ends.

  Whether or not the first start opening valid winning is determined is whether or not the start opening winning command (see step S323) received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first starting opening 390 has been won. When the start opening prize command received from the main control board 131 is a command indicating that the first start opening 390 has been won, it is stored by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 (see FIG. 57). This is when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is less than the upper limit first predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). That is, when a game ball is received at the first starting port 390, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (that is, the count number by the first special symbol hold counter 703 is the first count). Regardless of whether or not the predetermined number has been reached, a command indicating that a game ball has been received (winned) is received at the first start port 390 transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749). To do. At this time, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and the first start opening is awarded. On the other hand, if the number of first special symbol reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 reaches the first predetermined number, the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 stores the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872. The number of special symbols held is maintained (that is, not added). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received at the first start opening 390 is received, the first start opening effective winning is not achieved. Thus, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) receives a command indicating that a game ball has won a prize at the first start opening 390 regardless of whether or not the first start opening is a valid winning. When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved number storage means 872 is less than the first predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the first start opening effective winning is achieved. If the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol stored number storage means 872 has reached the first predetermined number (that is, if it is not added), it will not be an effective prize. Further, the counter value by the first special symbol hold counter 703 and the hold number by the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 are the same value.

  Similarly, the second and third starting opening valid winnings are the same as the first starting opening effective winnings, in which the starting opening winning command received from the main control board 131 (see step S323) is the second starting opening 392 or the third starting opening prize. This is a command indicating that a winning has been made at the start port 394, and means that the number of second special symbol reservations stored by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) is added. That is, when a game ball is received at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the command receiving means 750 determines whether or not the command receiving means 750 has been counted by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (that is, the second special symbol hold counter 713). The second start port 392 or the third start port transmitted from the main control board 131 (command transmission means 749) regardless of whether the count number by the second control number reaches the second predetermined number (4 in the present embodiment). In 394, a command indicating that the game ball has been accepted (winned) is received. At this time, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. 1 is added to the number of reserved special symbols, and a second start opening effective winning is obtained. On the other hand, if the number of second special symbol reservations stored in the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number, the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 stores the second number. The number of special symbols held is maintained (that is, not added). At this time, even if a command indicating that the game ball has been received by the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is received, the second start port effective winning is not achieved. As described above, the peripheral control board 662 (command receiving means 750) indicates that the game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 regardless of whether or not the second start port is effective. Receives the indicated command. Then, when the number of reserved special symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved number storage means 874 is less than the second predetermined number (that is, when 1 is added), the second start opening effective winning is achieved, and the second When the number of reserved special symbols stored in the special symbol reserved number storage means 874 reaches the second predetermined number (that is, when the number is not added), the prize is not valid. The counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 and the hold number by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 are the same value.

  In step S323, if the received command is not a start opening prize command (NO in step S323), it is determined whether or not the command received in step S321 is an effect command (step S328). If the command received in step S321 is an effect command (YES in step S328), the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned on (step S329), and the command analysis process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command received in step S321 is not an effect command (NO in step S328), the flag corresponding to the received command is turned on (step S330), and the command analysis process is terminated.

  FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process, the CPU 664 executes processes in steps S342 to S348.

  In the first, second, and third start opening effective winning memory processing of step S342, the first special symbol reservation number is stored based on the presence or absence of the effective winning at the first starting opening 390, and the second start opening 392 or the second start opening 392 is stored. Based on the presence / absence of an effective winning at the 3 start opening 394, the second special symbol holding number is stored and an effect process related to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening effective winning is executed. Details will be described later.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process in step S344, setting for starting the decorative symbol variation display is performed if an effect command is received. Specifically, the variation pattern of the decorative symbol and the stop symbol are determined according to the effect command. Details will be described later.

  In the decoration symbol variation stop process in step S346, when a variation confirmation command is received from the main control board 131, a control command is transmitted to the display device control board 116 to confirm the variation display of the decoration symbol on the effect display device 115. I do.

  In the jackpot display process of step S348, in response to the jackpot start command transmitted from the main control board 131, a display indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state or a display in the jackpot gaming state (for example, round display or the like) on the effect display device 115. Control is performed.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of the first, second, and third start-up effective winning memory processing. In the first, second, and third starting opening valid winning storage processing of FIG. 93, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON (step S3421). That is, in step S325, if the first start opening valid winning flag is ON, it is determined that the first starting opening effective winning flag is ON. If the first start opening valid winning flag is ON (YES in step S3421), the first special symbol hold number is incremented by one (step S3422), and the first special symbol hold number display command, that is, the first special symbol is displayed. The number of reservations of the first special symbol stored in the number-of-holds storage unit 872 (see FIG. 29) is set (step S3423). Then, the first start port effective winning flag is turned OFF (step S3424).

  After turning off the first start opening effective winning flag in step S3424 or if the first starting opening effective winning flag is OFF in step S3421 (OFF in step S3421), then the second and third starting openings It is determined whether or not the winning flag is ON (step S3425). That is, in step S327, if the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, it is determined that the second and third starting opening effective winning flags are ON. If the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are ON (YES in step S3425), the second special symbol reservation number is incremented by one (step S3426), and the second special symbol reservation number display command, ie, the first The number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage number storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) is set (step S3427). Then, after performing the second and third starting opening effective winning effect processing (step S3428), the second and third starting opening effective winning flags are turned OFF (step S3429), and the first, second and third starting are performed. The mouth valid winning memory process is terminated. In step S3425, the first, second, and third start-port effective winning storage processes are also ended when the second / third start-port effective winning flag is OFF (NO in step S3425).

  Here, the second and third starting opening valid winning effect processing in step S3428 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing.

  In the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a short-time gaming state (step S34281). If the current gaming state is not the short-time gaming state (YES in step S34281), it is determined whether or not the production point P is less than the upper limit of 10 points (step S34282). At this time, if the effect point P is less than 10 points (YES in step S34282), one point is further stored in the current effect point P (that is, one point is added or accumulated) (step S34283), The display of the production point P is set (step S34284). In the present embodiment, the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state corresponds to a normal gaming state and a gaming state in which only the probability changing function is activated and the short-time function is not activated (for example, a gaming state after the end of the short game).

  By the way, as described above, in the gaming state that is not the short-time gaming state, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting port 390 than the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, while in the short-time gaming state, It becomes easier for the game ball to win the third start port 394 than the first start port 390. If the current gaming state is the short-time gaming state, the effect point P is not stored even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394 (NO in step S34281). . This is a privilege for winning at a starting opening where it is difficult for a game ball to win as will be described later, if the stage point P is to be given until winning at the second starting opening 392 and the third starting opening 394 in such a short gaming state. This is because the meaning of the production point P is lost.

  The production point P is a point stored in response to the winning of a game ball at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. In the present embodiment, 1 point is stored each time one game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. That is, the production point P is a quantitative representation of the expected value for displaying the special production. In other words, every time a game ball wins in the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the effect point P is incremented by one, and the effect point P after storage is a predetermined upper limit value (this implementation) In the form, it is possible to store up to 10 points).

  Here, the special effect is composed of a special first effect and a special second effect, and corresponds to the special effect game mode in the present invention. The special first effect is an effect that is displayed on the effect display device 115 when the effect point P reaches 10 points, and the special second effect is the basis for storing 10 points of the effect points P (in other words, This is an effect that is displayed at the timing when the variation display of the second and third starting opening effective winnings is performed). That is, the special second performance is special at the timing when the variation pattern based on the second and third start opening effective winnings is displayed when the effect point P becomes 10 points by the second and third starting opening effective winnings. This is to produce a production. Therefore, when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made, the number of holds by the first special symbol reservation number storage means 872 or the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 is 1 or more and the production point P is 10 points. The special first effect is displayed immediately when the effect point P reaches 10 points, while the special second effect is suspended when the second and third start opening valid winnings are made. It is displayed after the change display that has been performed ends. Thereby, when the effect command received in step S3201 is stored in the received command storage area at the time when 10 effect points P are stored, the effect command P is received first. While the variable display related to the effect command is being performed, the special first effect is continuously performed.

  After setting the display of effect points P in step S34284, it is determined whether 10 points of effect points P have been stored (step S34285). Here, if 10 points of effect points P are stored (YES in step S34285), the second special symbol hold number is set in the effect hold counter (step S34286), and the special first effect flag is turned ON (step S34286). Step S34287), the second and third start opening effective winning effect processing is terminated.

  In step S34286, the second special symbol hold number is set in the production hold counter when the second and third start opening effective winnings are displayed in a variable manner based on which 10 production points P are stored. This is to perform the special second effect.

  Further, when it is determined in step S34281 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S34281), when it is determined in step S34282 that the effect point P is 10 (NO in step S34282), the effect point P in step S34285. When it is determined that the value is not 10 (NO in step S34285), the second and third starting opening effective winning effect processing is ended.

[Decoration pattern change start processing]
Next, a decorative symbol variation start process and a process executed in the process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing in the decorative symbol variation start processing. In the present embodiment, processing for setting an almighty symbol (A symbol) as a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is performed based on a variation pattern that stops and displays the chance eye. Here, setting the almighty symbol (A symbol) means replacing a part of the decorative symbol 1153 with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Processing related to this almighty symbol (A symbol) is A mode setting processing. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hitting A symbol usage count setting process in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 2R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 99 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the A symbol usage count setting process per 15R in the variation pattern determination and A mode setting process. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating an example of A symbol consumption processing in variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing. FIG. 101 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a chance time A symbol consumption process. FIG. 102 and FIG. 103 are diagrams showing an example of a table for determining the number of A symbols set when the chance eye is stopped. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the number of consumptions of the A symbol. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the setting of the almighty symbol (A symbol) for a part of the decorative symbol 1153. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing an example of the special effect lottery process in the decorative symbol variation start process. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the effect point storage process. In the present embodiment, in addition to an aspect (see step S34283 in FIG. 94) in which one effect point P is added in response to the fact that the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON, also in the decorative symbol variation start process Production points P may be added.

  In the decorative symbol variation start process of FIG. 95, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the variation pattern reception flag is ON (step S3441). If the variation pattern reception flag is ON (YES in step S3441), it is determined whether or not the time-saving gaming state is set (step S3442).

  If it is determined in step S3442 that the game is not in the short-time gaming state (YES in step S3442), special effect lottery processing is performed (step S3443), and whether or not the variation pattern related to the effect command received in step S321 is a winning variation pattern. It is determined (step S3444).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3442 that the game is in the short-time gaming state (NO in step S3442), the special effect lottery process is omitted and the process proceeds to step S3444. Details of the special effect lottery process will be described later. As described above, during the short-time gaming state, even if a game ball wins at the second starting port 392 and the third starting port 394, the effect point P is not stored. A special effect lottery process for performing various effects related to the effect point P is omitted. In addition, during the short-time gaming state, not only the effect points P are not stored, but also the storage status of the effect points P is not displayed. Thereby, even if a game ball wins in the 2nd starting port 392, the fall of the interest by not having the production point P stored can be suppressed.

  If it is determined in step S3444 that the pattern is a winning variation pattern (YES in step S3444), a corresponding winning stop symbol determining process is performed (step S3445). In this stop symbol determination process, if long hit, it is determined whether or not the first suppression flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is set, and if the first suppression flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is set, a predetermined probability Is determined as a stop symbol for the first suppression symbol (which also functions as a so-called probability variation symbol in this embodiment). If the first suppression flag (probability variation jackpot flag) is not set, it is always for the second suppression symbol (this implementation In this form, it is determined to be a so-called non-probable variation symbol function) stop symbol. If it is a short hit or a small hit, the stop symbol for short hit / small hit is determined. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern is a deviation (NO in step S3444), a stop symbol of the deviation symbol is determined (step S3446).

  When the stop symbol is determined in step S3445 or step S3446, variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing are executed (step S3447). This variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing will be described later. Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern reception flag is turned OFF (step S3448). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the production hold counter is 0 (step S3449). If the production hold counter is not 0 (YES in step S3449), the fluctuation display (that is, the fluctuation display started from now) is the first. 2. It is determined whether or not the variation is based on the third start opening valid winning (step S3450).

  In step S3450, if the change display to be started is a change based on the second and third start opening effective winnings (YES in step S3450), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter (step S3451), and the decorative symbol change is made. End the start process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3449 that the production hold counter is 0 (NO in step S3449), and when it is determined in step S3450 that the variation is based on the first start opening effective winning (step S3450). NO in
Finishes the decorative symbol variation start process without performing the subtraction process (step S3451) of the effect suspension counter.

  If the variation pattern reception flag is OFF in step S3441 (NO in step S3441), the decorative symbol variation start process is terminated as it is.

[Variation pattern determination and A mode setting process]
In the variation pattern determination and A mode setting processing of FIG. 96, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not it is not in time (step S34471). If it is not non-time saving, that is, if it is not a time saving gaming state (YES in step S34471), the process proceeds to step S34472. On the other hand, if the time is short, that is, if it is a time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to step S34479.

  If it is determined that the time is short, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a small hit chance (step S34472). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (small hit) of the variation number 44. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed (step S34473), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The small hitting A symbol usage number setting process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the small hit chance (NO in step S34472), the process advances to step S34474.

  In step S34474, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 2R (step S34474). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (short hit) of the variation number 43. If it is determined that the variation pattern is the 2nd chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The processing for setting the number of A symbols used per 2R will be described later. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern is not the 2R chance (NO in step S34474), the process proceeds to step S34476.

  In step S34476, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a chance per 15R (step S34476). This determination processing is to determine whether or not the variation pattern is the chance number (per probability variation length) of the variation number 45. Here, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is the 15th chance per 15R (YES in step S34476), the hour A symbol usage number setting process is executed per 15R (step S34477), and the process proceeds to step S34479. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is not the chance per 15R (NO in step S34476), the A symbol consumption process is executed (step S34478), and the process proceeds to step S34479. The A symbol usage count setting process and the A symbol consumption process per 15R will be described later.

  In step S34479, the received variation pattern is set. Thereafter, the variation pattern determination and the A mode setting process are terminated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the chance variation pattern has been received (steps S34472, S34474, and S34476). A setting process is performed.

  As described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c, and only the middle symbol column 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction. This is a reach variation that may be won per small hit or probable change (see FIG. 88 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, occurrence of a short hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, or a long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 88H).

  In the present embodiment, after the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is an almighty symbol (A It is replaced with (design). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 86 and the like, the decorative design 1153 is composed of numeric symbols “1” to “8” and a pattern corresponding to the numeric symbol. Each of the numerical patterns “1” to “5” corresponds to a pattern composed of a diva character image and the like. "Corresponds to a picture composed of a character image or the like. The aspect ratio of the pattern to the numerical design is about 2.7 times, and the area ratio of the pattern to the numerical design is about 7 times. In the present embodiment, some of the “Song”, “Princess”, and “Legend” designs corresponding to the number designs “6” to “8” are replaced with the design “A” composed of character images and the like. Thus, a part of the decorative design 1153 is replaced with the almighty design (A design). Thereby, even if it is an almighty symbol (A symbol), it will have the same number symbol as an original symbol, and the order of the symbol row | line containing an almighty symbol (A symbol) can be grasped | ascertained. As a result, it becomes easier to predict the formation of the reach mode in the low-speed scroll fluctuation performed in the stop display. In addition, since the picture is larger than the number design, the replacement with the almighty design (A design) becomes easy to understand. As a result, the variable display using the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes highly interesting. In the present embodiment, only the design is replaced. However, if the numerical information indicated by the numerical design is not changed, for example, the replacement of the numerical design that changes the appearance may be performed.

  Then, in a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), either the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a or the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c is the almighty symbol (A symbol). In such a case, control is always performed so that the reach mode is generated. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, the greater the number of decorative symbols 1153 replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol), the greater the player's expectation for reach or win, and the lowering of interest can be suppressed. When the occurrence of the gaming state per probability variation length is confirmed, the stop symbol in the variable display from which the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is derived is a predetermined probability variable jackpot symbol ("1" in this embodiment). , “1”, “1”).

  The A symbol usage number setting process sets the quantity of the decorative symbol 1153 to be replaced with this almighty symbol (A symbol). In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) are replaced with almighty symbols (A symbol).

  Here, the A symbol usage number setting process will be described. In the A symbol usage number setting process, as described above, the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process in FIG. 97, the 2R hour A symbol usage number setting process in FIG. 98, and the 15 A hour hour A symbol in FIG. Use number setting processing is included.

[A symbol use count setting process for small hits]
In the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 97, the CPU 664 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344731). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state (step S344732). The low probability state means that it is not a probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344473), a lottery is performed from the low probability → small hitting table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344733), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344735). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the low probability state (NO in step S344732), that is, if it is the probability variation gaming state (non-notification probability variation gaming state), high probability → small hitting time based on the remaining number of A symbols A lottery is performed from the table (step S344734), and the number of A symbols is set (step S344735). When the number of A symbols is set, the small hitting A symbol number setting process is terminated. An example of the low probability → small hitting time table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → small hitting time table is shown in FIG.

[A symbol usage count setting process per 2R]
In the hour A symbol usage count setting process per 2R in FIG. 98, the CPU 664 first executes the chance A symbol consumption process (step S34451). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344752). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344752), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 2R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344753), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344755). On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not low probability (NO in step S344475), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table based on the number of remaining A symbols (step S344754), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34475). S344755). When the number of A symbols is set, the A symbol number setting process is ended per 2R. An example of the low probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → 2R per hour table is shown in FIG.

[A symbol usage count setting process per 15R]
In the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 15R in FIG. 99, the CPU 664 first executes a chance A symbol consumption process (step S344747). This chance A symbol consumption process will be described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is in a low probability state (step S344772). If it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344747), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344773), and the number of A symbols is set ( Step S344775). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not a low probability state (NO in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table based on the remaining number of A symbols (step S344774), and the number of A symbols is set (step S34477). S344775). When the number of A symbols is set, the hour A symbol number setting process is terminated per 15R. An example of the low probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG. An example of the high probability → 15R per hour table is shown in FIG.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is set by executing the A symbol usage number setting process (see FIGS. 97 to 99). Here, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the tables (FIGS. 102 and 103) based on the gaming state. In these tables, the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is generally increased when the gaming state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, by setting the number of almighty symbols (A symbol), for example, an expectation for a probable game state (short hit) can be given, which contributes to the suppression of the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the A symbol usage number setting process, the predetermined decorative symbol 1153 is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) by the number set in the table. That is, in the replacement to the almighty design (A design), the replacement is performed by determining only the set number. Thereby, the replacement of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively simple, and the processing load is reduced. Moreover, since the number of almighty symbols (A symbols) is not uniform, the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined with reference to the tables (see FIGS. 102 and 103), the determination process of the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is relatively easy. As a result, it is relatively easy to distribute the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) according to the gaming state and the like.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol usage number setting process, as described above, the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 97, the 2 A hourly A symbol usage number setting process of FIG. 98, and the 15R of FIG. Time A symbol usage number setting processing is included. Then, in each process, it is determined whether or not the state is a low probability state, and a table is selected. Specifically, in the small hitting time A symbol usage number setting process, if it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344732), a lottery is selected from the low probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 102 (a)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the low probability state (NO in step S344732), a lottery is performed from the high probability → small hitting time table (see FIG. 102B) (step S344734). In addition, in the time A symbol usage count setting process per 2R, if it is determined that the state is in a low probability state (YES in step S344752), a lottery is performed from the low probability → attack probability time table (see FIG. 102C) On the other hand, when it is determined that the state is not in the low probability state (NO in Step S344475), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 2R per hour table (see FIG. 102 (d)) (Step S344754). Further, in the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 15R, if it is determined that the state is a low probability state (YES in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the low probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 103 (a)). On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not in the low probability state (NO in step S344472), a lottery is performed from the high probability → 15R per hour table (see FIG. 103 (b)). Thereby, the game state can be estimated to some extent from the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol). As a result, the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) itself is highly interesting, and the player can be expected to expect a big hit game.

  Further, as described above, the “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol row 1153c, and only the middle symbol row 1153b scrolls in the vertical direction is short. It is a reach fluctuation that may be won per hit, small hit or probable length (see FIG. 88 (G)). Then, when the “legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the occurrence of the short hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state, or the long hit gaming state is determined (see FIG. 88H). Then, after the “Legend” symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row 1153b, the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol). Is done. In this way, the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is performed with the execution confirmation of the short hit game and the execution confirmation of the small hit game as a trigger. That is, there is a case where replacement to an almighty symbol (A symbol) is performed in response to a transition from a low probability state to a high probability state. Therefore, for the player, the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol) and the variable display using the almighty symbol (A symbol) become interesting, and it can be reliably prevented that the variable symbol display becomes monotonous. .

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 96, when the execution of the small hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the small hit chance (YES in step S34472), the small hit hour A symbol usage number setting process is performed. It is executed (step S34473). On the other hand, when the execution of the short hit game is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the second chance per 2R (YES in step S34474), the A symbol usage number setting process per 2R is executed (step S34475). The set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined depending on which process is executed. As a result, it is possible to infer whether or not it is an advantageous state (high probability state due to short hits), and the player feels “hot” even by the replacement effect to the almighty symbol (A symbol) Is possible.

  For example, in the A symbol usage number setting process, looking at a table that is referred to when the state is in a low probability state, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is low in the low probability → small hit time table of FIG. When “0”, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is not set to “6”. In contrast, in the low probability → accuracy table of FIG. 102 (c), when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0”, the probability of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 5/100. The number of settings is “6”. As a result, when 6 almighty symbols (A symbol) are set in the low probability state where the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0”, it is determined from the effect mode that the short hit (per 2R) is established. To do. Thereby, the gaming state (high probability state) can be determined based on the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol), and a sense of superiority can be given to the player. And since the execution confirmation of the short hit game can be quickly grasped, the game can be enjoyed with a sense of security.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 96, when execution of the game per long is confirmed, that is, when the variation pattern is the chance per 15R (YES in step S34476), the A symbol usage number setting process per 15R Is executed (step S34477). As a result, the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is determined according to the execution confirmation of the long hit game, so the probability variation per length is suddenly derived from the same effects as the short hit game or the small hit game. become. As a result, the player can be delighted. In addition, if the selection probability of the set number is made different from the short hit game or the small hit game, it becomes possible to infer whether or not it is an advantageous state (determined state of the long hit game) When replacing the almighty symbol (A symbol), it is possible to generate a sense of expectation for the jackpot that "Is it already hit?"

  For example, among the tables in FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “4” only in the low probability → 15R hour table shown in FIG. With the probability, the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “5”. As a result, when five almighty symbols (A symbol) are set in a low probability state where the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “4”, it is per probability variation length (per 15R) from the production mode. Determine. Thereby, it is possible to quickly grasp the execution confirmation of the long hit game according to the number of settings of the almighty symbol (A symbol), and it is possible to enjoy the game with a sense of superiority and a sense of security.

[A symbol consumption processing]
In the A symbol consumption process of FIG. 100, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols is 0 (step S344781). This number of A symbols is the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) set previously. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344781), the A symbol used number allocation table A (see FIG. 104) is selected (step S344478), and the process proceeds to step S344791. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344781), the process proceeds to step S344783.

  In step S344783, it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 1. Here, when it is determined that the number of symbols A is 1 (YES in step S344783), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344784). If (YES in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table C (see FIG. 104) is selected (step S344785), and the process proceeds to step S344471. If it is not in the high probability state (NO in step S344784), the A symbol used number allocation table B (see FIG. 104) is selected (step S344786), and the flow proceeds to step S3444471.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 1 in step S34483 (NO in step S34483, that is, if the number of A symbols is 2 or more), it is determined whether or not the number of A symbols is 2 (step). S344787). If it is determined that the number of symbols A is 2 (YES in step S344787), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (non-notification probability variation game state) (step S344788). If YES (YES in step S344788), the A symbol used number allocation table D (see FIG. 104) is selected (step S344789), and the process proceeds to step S3444471. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 2 (NO in step S344787, that is, if the number of A symbols is 3 or more) or if it is determined that the state is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344788), use of A symbol The number distribution table E (see FIG. 104) is selected (step S344790), and the process proceeds to step S344791.

  In step S34491, based on the variation pattern, each of the A symbol used number allocation tables (that is, among the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E, any one of the above-described step S34482, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790) The number of use of A symbol (consumption number) is selected by lottery. Next, the number of A symbols used is set (step S344792), the number of A symbols used is subtracted from the number of A symbols, and the number of A symbols is updated (step S344793). And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

[A symbol consumption process at chance]
In the chance A symbol consumption process of FIG. 101, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the number of A symbols (remaining number) is 0 (step S3447311). If it is determined that the number of A symbols is 0 (YES in step S344731), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 0 (step S344731), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not 0 (NO in step S344731), the process proceeds to step S3447313.

  In step S3447313, it is determined whether the number of A symbols (remaining number) is any of 1 to 3. If it is determined that the number of A symbols is any one of 1 to 3 (YES in step S3447313), the number of A symbol used (consumption number) is set to 1 (step S3447314), and the process proceeds to step S3447316. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of A symbols is not any of 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447313), that is, when the number of A symbols is any of 4 to 6, the number of used A symbols (consumption number). Is set to 2 (step S3447315), and the process proceeds to step S3447316.

  In step S3447316, the number of A symbols is subtracted from the number of A symbols and the number of A symbols is updated. And A symbol consumption processing is complete | finished.

  In this way, in the A symbol consumption process, the number of A symbols used (consumption number) is drawn based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Here, the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined with reference to the table (see FIG. 104) based on the gaming state. Then, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is replaced with the original decorative symbol 1153 for the determined number of consumptions. In other words, when the almighty symbol (A symbol) is consumed, the replacement is performed by determining only the consumption number. Thereby, the process which concerns on consumption of an almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes comparatively easy. In addition, since the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is not uniform, the variable display itself using the almighty symbol (A symbol) is highly interesting. Furthermore, since the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined using the table (see FIG. 104), the determination processing of the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively easy, and it depends on the gaming state, etc. The distribution of the number of consumptions of the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes relatively simple.

  In the A symbol consumption process, the number of A symbols used (consumption number) is drawn based on the variation pattern (step S344791). Specifically, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined corresponding to the variation pattern commands of the variation numbers 8 to 15, 27, 28, 34, 35, 41, and 42 (see FIG. 104). Thereby, an almighty design (A design) can be used (consumed) according to a game, and the variable display using an almighty design (A design) becomes a highly interesting thing.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol consumption process, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is “0” (step S344781), “1” (step S334783), “2” or more (step S344787), In other words, the number of consumption of almighty symbols (A symbols) is determined. Specifically, the A symbol used number allocation tables A to E to be referred to are determined by this case classification (step S344478, step S344785, step S344786, step S344789, step S344790). As a result, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is appropriately consumed in the variation display using the almighty symbol (A symbol), and the interest of the variable symbol display using the almighty symbol (A symbol) is not reduced. .

  When the remaining number is “1” or more, in the A symbol consumption process, it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (steps S344784 and S344788), and the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is determined. Yes. Specifically, when it is in a high probability state (YES in step S344784, YES in step S344788), reference is made to the A symbol use number distribution tables C and D, whereas when it is not in a high probability state (NO in step S344784). In step S344788, NO), reference is made to the A symbol used number allocation tables B and E. This makes it possible to estimate the gaming state to some extent from the number of consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol), and the variable display itself using the almighty symbol (A symbol) becomes highly interesting.

  Furthermore, in the A symbol consumption process, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is "1" and in a high probability state (YES in step S34483, YES in step S344784), A symbol usage number allocation table C is selected (step S344785). In the A symbol use number allocation table C, as shown in FIG. 113, the consumption number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is always allocated to “0” with respect to the variation pattern of “out”. Thereby, in the case of a high probability state, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbols) does not become “0”. Therefore, while the almighty symbol (A symbol) remains, there is a possibility of a high probability state, and the player's sense of expectation can be reliably maintained.

[Setting and consumption mode of almighty design (A design)]
In the present embodiment, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is set in a manner as shown in FIG. That is, the “song” symbol, the “princess” symbol and the “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a shown in FIG. 105 (a), and the “song” symbol, the “princess” symbol and the “legend” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c are almighty. It is a symbol that may be replaced with a symbol (A symbol). Specifically, when the set number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1, the “song” symbol in the left symbol row 1153a is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIG. 105 (b)). When the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 2, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a and the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c are replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (FIG. 105). (See (c)). Similarly, if the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 3, the “Princess” symbol in the left symbol row is further. If the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4, the “princess” in the right symbol row 1153c is further increased. If the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is 5, the “legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a is six, and if the number of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is six, the right symbol column 1153c The “legend” symbol is replaced with the almighty symbol (A symbol) (see FIGS. 105D to 105G).

  When the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed, the almighty symbol (A symbol) is returned to the original symbol. This is the consumption of the almighty symbol (A symbol). The consumption order of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is basically as shown below. For example, when six almighty symbols (A symbol) are set (see FIG. 114 (g)), the “A (8)” symbol in the right symbol row 1153c is first stopped and displayed in the original “legend”. Return to the design (see FIG. 105 (f)). Next, the symbol “A (8)” in the left symbol row 1153a is stopped and returned to the original symbol (see FIG. 105 (e)). Similarly, “A (7)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (7)” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “A (6)” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → “A (” in the left symbol column 1153a 6) The almighty symbol (A symbol) is consumed in the order of the symbol. As described above, the number of consumption of almighty symbols (A symbols) is determined by the table shown in FIG. That is, one or two almighty symbols (A symbol) are consumed in the order shown here by lottery by the table selected from A to E. In addition, there is a possibility that two almighty symbols (A symbol) may be consumed in this order based on the variation pattern per length of variation numbers 10, 13, 15, 28, 35, 42. Yes (see FIG. 104).

  On the other hand, an almighty symbol (A symbol) may be consumed separately from the above order. This is the case based on the variation pattern of the chance numbers of the variation numbers 43, 44, and 45. The process in this case is the chance A symbol consumption process. According to the chance pattern, the “song” symbol is first displayed in the left symbol column 1153a and the “princess” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column 1153c. Therefore, when the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 4 or more (see FIGS. 105 (e) to (f)), the “A (6)” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c The “A (7)” symbol is consumed. In the case of the chance pattern variation pattern, even if the almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c, the consumption process is executed when each almighty symbol (A symbol) is stopped. Thus, the reach mode is not formed, and the above-described game per probability variation length is not executed.

  Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is not 0 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, NO in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 4 to 6, the number of A symbols used is 2 (Step S3447315). When the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) is 1 to 3 (see FIGS. 86 (b) to (d)), the symbol “A (6)” in the left symbol row 1153a is consumed. Therefore, in the chance A symbol consumption process, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3 (NO in step S3447311, YES in step S3447313), that is, if the number of A symbols is 1 to 3, the number of A symbols used is 1 (step S3447315). In this case, the “A” symbol changes to the original symbol when stopped, and the function of the almighty symbol (A symbol) that forms the reach mode is not exhibited.

  From the number of almighty symbols (A symbol) consumed (maximum of two) due to such a chance pattern variation pattern, the remaining number of almighty symbols (A symbol) in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112 (A during temporary stop in the diagram) The number is 4 at maximum.

[Special production lottery processing]
In the special effect lottery process of FIG. 106, the CPU 664 first determines whether or not the effect hold counter is 1 (step S34431). Here, if it is determined that the production hold counter is not 1 (YES in step S34431), whether or not the production point is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points, that is, 7 points or more and 9 points or less. It is determined whether or not (step S34432). If the production hold counter is greater than 1, the production points are 10 points. If the production hold counter is 0, the production points are less than 10.

  If it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point P is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points (YES in step S34432), it is determined whether or not a special effect condition is satisfied (step S34433). On the other hand, when the production point P is within the range of 0 to 6 points (including 0 points and 6 points) or 10 points (NO in step S34432), the special production conditions are satisfied. The special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not there is. That is, if the production point reaches 10 points, the second special symbol hold counter 713 that triggered the 10 points is counted (second special symbol hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). In the variable display performed before the variable display based on the special effect lottery process is terminated without determining whether or not the special effect condition is satisfied. As a result, the special effect in the variable display based on the count by the second special symbol hold counter 713 (holding the second special symbol by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874) that triggered the 10 points wasted. Therefore, it is possible to continue to give the player a sense of expectation over a plurality of variable displays.

  Note that the special effect condition is that the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern, and the effect point P storage performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern. Winning a lottery. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a long hit, or when it is out of reach, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, in the case of variation numbers 11 to 21, 25 to 28, 32 to 35, 39 to 42, and 76 to 86, the effect point P storage lottery is performed. At this time, the probability of winning the effect point P storage lottery is set to, for example, one half as shown in FIG.

  In this way, the effect point is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold (7 points in the present embodiment), and the effect command received in step S321 is a specific variation pattern (that is, the first special symbol image display control means 851 or the second When the special symbol image display control means 852 is a specific fluctuation pattern, the special effect condition is established selectively (that is, when the effect point P storage lottery is won). Therefore, the production points are stored based on the winning of the game ball at the second start opening 392, and the special production conditions are established and the production points are 10 points rather than the accumulated production points reaching 10 points. Less frequently.

  When the special effect condition is satisfied in step S34433 (YES in step S34433), effect point P storage processing is performed (step S34444).

  In the effect point P storage process (step S34444), the storage process is performed so that the effect point P after the storage becomes the upper limit of 10 points. That is, if the production point P before storage is 7 points, 3 points are stored, if the production point P before storage is 8 points, 2 points are stored, and if the production point P before storage is 9 points, 1 point is stored. Stored. In other words, when the above-mentioned special effect condition is satisfied, the quantity necessary for the effect point P to reach a predetermined upper limit (10 points in the present embodiment) is added, and the effect point P after storage is the predetermined value. Increase to the upper limit of.

  Then, after the effect point storage process (step S34444) is performed, the special first effect flag and the special second effect flag are turned ON (step S34445), and the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S34432 that the effect point is less than 7 points or 10 points (NO in step S34432), and when it is determined in step S34433 that the special effect condition is not satisfied (NO in step S34433). ), The special effect lottery process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S34431 that the production hold counter is 1 (NO in step S34431), the variation display (that is, the variation display started from now on) is a variation based on the second and third start opening effective winnings. It is determined whether or not (step S34446). Here, if it is determined that the variation display is variation based on the second and third starting opening valid winnings (YES in step S34446), the special second effect flag is turned on (step S34447) and the effect hold counter is reset. (Step S34448). When the change display is a change based on the first start opening valid winning in step S34446 (NO in step S34446), the special effect lottery process is terminated.

  In this way, in the special effect lottery process of FIG. 106, when the effect hold counter is 1 (YES in S34431), the effect point P reaches 10 points because the effect point P is stored up to 10 points. When the variable display is performed based on the second and third valid winnings that have been triggered (YES in S34446), the flag for performing the special second effect is set to ON and the effect hold counter is reset (S34447). And S34448).

  On the other hand, even if the production hold counter is 0 (that is, when production point P is not stored up to 10 points) (NO in S34431), production point P is greater than 6 points and less than 10 points. (YES in S34432) when the special effect condition is established based on the first, second, and third effective winnings (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made) (YES in S34433) ) In order to perform the special first effect and the special second effect, the effect points P are stored up to the upper limit value, and the special effect flag is set to ON (S34444 and S34445).

  In addition, when the production hold counter is 2 or more (that is, production point P is stored up to 10 points, but before the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points) If the first, second, and third effective winnings are held and the variable display based on the previously held effective winnings is not yet performed) (YES in S34431), the production point P Is 10 points (NO in S34432), each special effect flag remains OFF without being set ON. Then, when the change display is made for all of the other first, second, and third effective winnings that are already held, the effect holding counter becomes 1 (NO in S34431) and the effect point P reaches 10 points. In response to the change display based on the second and third effective winnings, the special second effect is set to ON (YES in S34436 to S34448).

  In other words, the second and third effective prizes that triggered the production point P to 10 points until all of the other first, second and third valid prizes already held are displayed in a variable manner. The change display based on and the execution of the special second effect corresponding thereto are reserved (standby). Therefore, as described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the special first production is performed (S34287 in FIG. 94), and when the production point P is stored up to 10 points, other effective winnings are already put on hold. If it is, the special second effect is not executed until all the other active winnings that have been put on hold are variably displayed (so-called hold-up), so the display of the special first effect and the display of the special second effect There will be a time difference. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production points P are stored up to 10 points based on the second and third effective winnings, if other first, second and third effective winnings are already held, they are put on hold ahead. Even when the special effect condition is satisfied based on the valid winnings made (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the storage of the effect point P and the ON setting of the special effect flag are not performed. Not executed. For this reason, even if the previously held effective prize establishes the special effect condition, the special second effect is not performed based on the previously held effective prize but the effect point P is 10 points. It is executed based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the event. As a result, only the special first effect is displayed over a plurality of variable displays until all the previous holds are consumed, so that the player can obtain the effect point P by the special first effect. It is possible to accurately confirm with a margin that the upper limit has been reached and to play with a sense of expectation until the special second performance is executed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  As described above, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, regardless of whether the effective winning point from which the effect point P storage lottery is performed is the first start opening effective winning or the second / third starting opening effective winning. Special effects are performed. On the other hand, when the special effect is performed because the effect point P reaches 10 points without performing the effect point P storage lottery, the special effect is performed only when the effective winning is the second and third starting opening effective winnings. Is done.

  In addition, when the special first effect and the special second effect are performed, when the effect point P storage lottery is won, both effects are displayed in the same variation, whereas the effect point P storage lottery is performed. If the special effect is performed because the effect point P has reached 10 points, the first special symbol hold number storage means 872 and the second special symbol hold number storage means when the effect point P reaches 10 points. Depending on the number of holds held by 874, both effects are not always displayed in the same variation. Specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the display of the special first production is started, and the variable display based on the second and third effective winnings that triggered the production point P to 10 points. When it is performed, the special second effect is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect point P is stored (added) in response to the fact that the second / third start opening valid winning flag is ON or the effect point P storage lottery is won, and this effect is performed. When the point P reaches the upper limit value, the special effect flag (the special first effect flag and / or the special second effect flag) is turned on, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, according to the fact that the second and third starting opening valid winning flags are ON or the winning of the production point P storage lottery, the puzzles are combined, and when this puzzle is completed, the special production flag is set. It may be. In addition, a plurality of predetermined missions are cleared one by one in response to the fact that the second and third start opening valid winning flags are set or the stage point P storage lottery is won, and all the predetermined missions are cleared. The special effect flag may be turned on when the is cleared. That is, a condition for setting the special effect flag is set, and this condition is cleared according to whether the second and third start opening effective winning flags are ON or the effect point P storage lottery is won. Any configuration may be used as long as the direction approaches.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery result is derived by the variable display by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710, and the special effect is displayed separately from the variable display. Not limited to this. For example, you may make it derive | lead-out the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means 700 or the 2nd special symbol lottery means 710 by special production.

  Next, an aspect in which the effect point P is stored and displayed on the effect display device 115 will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of the effect points P that is performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON. FIG. 109 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage display mode of effect points P performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery.

  The effect display device 115 includes an effect point display area 1154 as shown in FIGS. In the effect point display area 1154, an effect point 1 display unit 1154a to an effect point 10 display unit 1154j composed of 10 frames are displayed, and the display color in the frame changes every time the effect point P is stored. . Therefore, the player refers to the effect point display area 1154, so that both the achievement upper limit, which is the maximum value at which the effect points P can be stored, and the progress status, which is the accumulated value of the currently stored effect points P, are displayed. It is possible to grasp at the same time. For example, when the production point P is 0, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), the frames of the ten display units 1154a to 1154j are all displayed in the same color as the background color (in the drawing, for convenience, white Is displayed).

  In this effect point display area 1154, effect points P are stored and displayed one by one as the game ball wins the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, but the second special symbol hold number storage Regardless of the number of reservations of the means 874 and the maximum number of reservations (four in this case), up to ten effect points P that can be displayed on the display units 1154a to 1154j can be stored and displayed.

  First, the storage display mode of the production point P performed in response to the second / third start opening valid winning flag being ON will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108A shows an initial state (that is, a state where both the number of holdings and the effect point P are 0).

  When the game ball wins the first start opening 390, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the third hold storage display portion 1150a is held by the first special symbol hold counter 703. Are displayed in the display mode. On the other hand, the display colors are all maintained in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j. This indicates that the production point P is maintained at 0.

  When the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, as shown in FIG. While the 2nd display mode is displayed, the display color in the frame of the production | presentation point 1 display part 1154a changes. Note that the display colors in the frames of the effect point 2 display unit 1154b to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are maintained. Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P is 1.

  As described above, when the game ball wins the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect points P are stored one by one, and the stored effect points P are displayed with an indicator. On the other hand, when the game ball wins the first start port 390, the effect points P are not stored. That is, when the game ball wins at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the effect point P for displaying a predetermined special effect is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special effect, and can visually confirm that the player has won the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394. That is, when a player wins a game ball to the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the winning is not only an opportunity for internal processing such as a win determination or a variable display, but the player himself / herself plays a game ball. Since it is possible to visually grasp the production point P that has been won and stored, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation and sense of security.

  Further, since the game balls are less likely to win the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 than the first start port 390 (except for the short-time game state), the second start port 392 or the third start port 392. When the game ball is won in 394, the production point P is stored as a privilege for the player. Thereby, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation when the game ball is won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, which is difficult to win.

  In addition, the display of the effect point display area 1154 is based on the storage status of the effect points P (the progress status for performing the special effect) according to the winning of the game balls to the start openings 390, 392, 394, and the special effect is performed. It may be displayed up to a predetermined achievement upper limit. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start opening 390, the effect point P may be increased, or the effect point P may be increased even if it is not reserved by the special symbol reservation number storage means 872, 874. Also good.

  FIG. 108 (d) is a diagram showing that the production points P are 9 points. That is, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 9 display unit 1154i have changed, and the display color in the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j is the same color as the background color. At this time, when the game ball is effectively won at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394, the display color within the frame of the effect point 10 display unit 1154j changes as shown in FIG. 108 (e). Thereby, the player can grasp that the production point P has reached the upper limit of 10 points. In the hold display area 1150, the number of holds by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is displayed in a stored state. In FIG. 108 (e), the 3rd storage storage display part 1150c changes from a 1st display mode to a 2nd display mode.

  When the effect point P reaches 10 points, a character appears above the effect point display area 1154. Then, the hold based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that caused the production point P to reach 10 points is displayed on the third hold storage display unit 1101c in FIG. 108 (e). The character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 until the change display is performed. In addition, while the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are changed. That is, the special effect has not yet been displayed until the on-hold variable display based on the effective winnings at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. Nevertheless, the display of the derivation progress status (that is, the number of effect points) for deriving the special effect is continued. In other words, even when the effect point P reaches 10 points, even if the counter value by the second special symbol hold counter 713 is 1 or more (that is, stored by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874). Even if the number of holdings of the second special symbol is 1 or more), the display of the number of effect points is maintained and the variable display based on the counter value (the holding) is performed. Thereby, the game is straddled across a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points. It is possible to continue to give a sense of expectation to the person, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when the variation display of the hold based on the effective winning at the second starting port 392 or the third starting port 394 that causes the production point P to reach 10 points is started, as shown in FIG. 108 (f). The character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 moves to substantially the center of the effect display device 115 and is displayed in an enlarged manner. A series of effect display by such characters corresponds to the special effect of the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the aspect in which the character continues to dance above the effect point display area 1154 corresponds to the special first effect, and the character dancing above the effect point display area 1154 is substantially in the center of the effect display device 115. The mode displayed in an enlarged manner corresponds to the special second effect. Therefore, the special first effect is displayed immediately regardless of the number of holds when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. On the other hand, the special second effect is effective for the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 when the effect point P reaches 10 points by the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394. If a valid winning is held in addition to the winning, it will be displayed after the variable display based on the holding is completed.

  Thus, when the production point P is stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (10 points in this case) due to the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394, the production point P becomes the predetermined achievement upper limit. Since the special first effect that solicits the fact that the player has reached is displayed, the player can easily grasp that the special effect has been obtained, and can maintain the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the special 2nd effect which is the special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result is performed based on the achievement point P having reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  Then, when both the special first effect and the special second effect are finished, that is, the suspension based on the effective winning at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 that causes the effect point P to reach 10 points. When the variable display is finished, the effect point P is reset to 0, and the effect point P is displayed in the effect point display area 1154 in a mode where it is 0.

  In the present embodiment, the effect point P is also reset when a jackpot game (more specifically, a long game) is started, and the storage of the effect points P is started from 0 after the jackpot game ends. As a result, with the jackpot game as an opportunity, the player can enter the game with a new feeling. In addition, during the jackpot game, even if a game ball wins the second starting port 392, the effect points are not stored, and therefore the storage status of the effect points is not displayed. Accordingly, since the effect points newly displayed after the jackpot game ends are 0, the player can renew the mood and restart the game after the jackpot game ends.

  Next, the storage display mode of the effect point P performed in response to winning the effect point P storage lottery will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state where the effect points P displayed in the effect point display area 1154 are 7 points. That is, the second display mode indicates that the game ball has won the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 and the first reserved storage display unit 1150a is held by the second special symbol hold counter 713. In addition, the display color in the frame of the effect point 7 display unit 1154g changes, and the effect point P is added and displayed. As a result, the display colors in the frames of the effect point 1 display unit 1154a to the effect point 7 display unit 1154g have changed, and the display colors in the frames of the effect point 8 display unit 1154h to the effect point 10 display unit 1154j are the background color. It has become the same color.

  On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 109 (a), if the game ball is effectively awarded to the first starting port 390 after the start memory of the second special symbol is digested, the game is suspended as shown in FIG. 109 (b). In the display area 1150, the number of holds by the first special symbol hold counter 703 (the number of holds by the first special symbol hold number storage means 872) is displayed as the first display mode in the first hold storage display unit 1150a, The addition display of the production point P in the production point display area 1154 is not performed. Note that when the game ball effectively wins the first start opening 390, the CPU 664 receives an effect command from the main control board 131 and the variation pattern reception flag is turned on (see step S329 in FIG. 91). If the special effect condition is satisfied, effect point P storage processing (see step S34444 in FIG. 106) is performed. Here, the special effect condition is an effect point P performed in response to the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern and the effect command received in step S321 being a specific variation pattern. Winning the storage lottery. In addition, it is a precondition for special effect conditions to be satisfied that an effect point is more than a predetermined threshold (7 points in this embodiment) and less than an achievement upper limit (10 points).

  Here, “greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold value” means a value that reaches a predetermined achievement upper limit if a game ball wins a little more at the second start port 392. In the present embodiment, since the achievement upper limit value is 10 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit value, that is, 7 points becomes a predetermined threshold value when about 3 game balls win the second starting port 392. Further, when the predetermined achievement upper limit is, for example, 100 points, a value that reaches the achievement upper limit when about 3 to 5 game balls win the second starting port 392, that is, about 95 to 97 points is predetermined. It becomes a threshold value. In other words, if the difference between the stored performance points and the predetermined achievement upper limit is too large, the player thinks that the predetermined achievement upper limit will not be reached. If the predetermined achievement upper limit is reached, attention is drawn to the winning of the game ball at the second start port 392, and interest is drawn to the trend of the game ball. At this time, it is usual to feel that the predetermined achievement upper limit is not reached only by winning one ball at the second starting port 392, but at this time, the production points are stored together as 2 points or 3 points. Thus, it is possible to give a surprise to the player, thereby giving a great sense of expectation to the player and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the effect point P storage process, as shown in FIG. 109 (c), the suspension based on winning in the first start port 390 that is the basis for the effect point P storage process (in this embodiment, FIG. 109 (b) ) Of the first hold storage display section 1150a corresponds to the hold display), the production point P is stored and displayed until it reaches the upper limit of 10 points, and the special first Production is performed. Then, in this same variable display, as shown in FIG. 109 (d), the special second effect is performed subsequent to the special first effect. In addition, the display of the effect point P in the effect point display area 1154 is displayed up to the special second effect that is the final aspect as the effect privilege.

  Thus, even when the production point P is not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points), the production point P is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (here, 7 points), and When the special effect condition is satisfied (that is, when a variable display based on a predetermined length or reach is made), the effect point P for displaying the predetermined special effect is stored. . In other words, even if the difference between the stored production point P and the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10 points) is 2 or more, the special production condition is satisfied as long as the difference is within a small difference range of 3 or less. If is established, it means that the production point P is stored. The stored effect points P are indicators that can be visually recognized by the player in the effect point display area 1154, and are stored and displayed in a manner approaching the predetermined achievement upper limit.

  Therefore, the player can confirm the remaining number of points necessary until a predetermined special performance, and that the special performance condition is established based on the winning of the game ball to the start opening 390, 392, 394. I can confirm. And the special 1st production which teaches that the production | presentation point P has reached the predetermined achievement upper limit, and the special 2nd production which is a special production privilege regarding derivation | leading-out of a lottery result are displayed as a series of special productions. Therefore, the player can have a sense of expectation to obtain a privilege of a series of special effects (first special effect and special second effect) even if the effect points P are not stored up to a predetermined upper limit value. Can maintain and improve the interests of

  In addition, regarding the effect point P storage process performed in response to winning of the effect point P storage lottery, in the present embodiment, the effect command received based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start port 390 is specified. Although the effect point P storage lottery is performed when the effect command indicates the fluctuation pattern, it is not limited to this. For example, when the effect command based on the fact that the game ball is effectively won at the second start port 392 or the third start port 394 is a command indicating a specific variation pattern, the effect point P is always performed without performing the effect point P storage lottery. You may make it perform a storage process.

  In addition, when the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is a short win or a small hit, the effect item in the game state after the short hit game or the small hit game is executed An effect using a game ball by 430 is performed. The effect using the game ball by the effect agent 430 is not always performed immediately after the short hit game or the small hit game ends. Therefore, when the production point P becomes 10 points between the end of the short hit game or the small hit game and the production using the game ball by the production role 430, or the production point P Even if the storage lottery is won, a special effect is performed.

  As described above, when the production point P reaches 10 points, until the variation display based on the hold by the second special symbol reservation number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points, is performed. Display of special effects is put on hold.

  In this way, the change display based on the hold by the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the effect point P to 10 points is managed by the effect hold count means 855. More specifically, when the production point P reaches 10 points, the number of second special symbols stored in the second special symbol storage means 874 (see FIG. 57) at this time is used as the production reservation counter value. Remember. Then, every time the variable display is performed by the second special symbol image display control means 852 (see FIG. 57), one is subtracted from the effect suspension counter value. When the production hold counter value becomes 1, the variable display based on the hold of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol hold number storage means 874 that triggered the production point P to 10 points is performed. And the second special effect is displayed. The first special effect is performed when the effect point P reaches 10 points.

[About game effects]
Next, typical ones of the game effect modes (including the variation mode of the decorative symbol 1153) executed in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that the “game effect mode” refers to effects by the effect display device 115 (including variations of the decoration pattern 1153), effects by the effect for the purpose 430, sounds such as sound effects output from the speakers 18 and 57, This is a concept including various effects such as opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 executed according to the gaming state.

  In the “game effect mode”, an effect in which a character imitating a person sings music (hereinafter referred to as a character singing effect) may be executed. In the present embodiment, there are four characters (here, a first character to a fourth character) having different hairstyles and clothes for a specific person. In the “character singing effect”, images (including moving images) representing the singing actions corresponding to the first to fourth characters are displayed on the effect display device 115, and each character is unique from the speakers 18 and 57. (Songs A to D here) are output as audio.

  In addition, the “music piece” in the present embodiment includes three parts of an introduction part (intro part), a first half part, and a second half part, and one piece of music is configured as a whole by combining the parts. Specifically, the “introduction section (intro section)” is a musical tone at the beginning of a song, and makes the player conceive the title of the song and the subsequent musical tone. The “first half” is the musical sound of the part following the intro part of the music, and includes at least the first half of the main part (so-called rust part) of the music. The “second half” is the musical sound of the part following the first half of the music, and includes at least the second half of the main part (so-called chorus part) of the music.

  In this embodiment, the “music piece” is composed of an introduction part (intro part) and a main part (rust part), but may be a series of music from the introduction part to the end of the song. In addition, “musical sound” means a part of music. Accordingly, only the introduction part (intro part), only the first half part, and only the second half part correspond to musical sounds. Further, the musical sound is not limited to one phrase, and may be a plurality of phrases.

[Regarding normal fluctuation mode]
First, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a “normal variation mode” that is the most basic game effect mode will be described. This “normal variation mode” is a mode for deriving the winning or losing of the lottery result without performing a special effect (for example, an intro effect or a chance eye effect described later) until the reach occurs. Three patterns are included: “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”.

  As described with reference to FIG. 86, “normally off” is an effect mode in which each stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c stops at a different symbol that is completely unrelated (that is, , Deviation fluctuation without reach production). Note that, as described above, the “normal departure” is a variation number 1 to 10 depending on whether the variation is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whether or not the short-time operation is performed, whether or not the certain variation operation is performed, and the number of holdings. Is selected (see FIG. 80).

  As described with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, “normal reach failure” means that the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are the same, and only the stop symbol of the middle symbol row 1153b. It is an effect mode that stops at a different symbol (that is, deviation fluctuation with reach effect). 86. “Normal out of reach” in FIG. 86 corresponds to fluctuations based on “normal out” of fluctuation numbers 8 and 9 (see FIG. 77), and “out of normal reach” in FIG. 87 is “normal out of” of fluctuation numbers 73 and 74. (Refer to FIG. 79).

  As described with reference to FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, “normal length hit” is an effect mode in which all of the left symbol row 1153a, the right symbol row 1153c, and the middle symbol row 1153b stop at the same symbol (that is, jackpot fluctuation) ). 86. “Per normal length” in FIG. 86 corresponds to a variation based on “per normal length” of variation number 10 (see FIG. 70), and “per normal length” in FIG. 87 represents “normal length per variation number 75”. This corresponds to a variation based on “winning” (see FIG. 72).

  In addition, in both “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, all symbol variation periods in which all symbol sequences 1153a to 1153c are displayed are changed, and the left symbol column 1153a and the right symbol column 1153c are stopped at the same symbol. The reach variation period in which only the middle symbol 1153b varies. In addition, not only “out of normal reach” and “per normal length”, but also in the variable display where the reach described below occurs, it is composed of at least the entire symbol change period and the reach change period. In the all symbol variation period, variation display of all symbols is performed and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 18 and 57. The reach variation period is reached after the entire symbol variation period, and a specific musical tone (a specific portion including a chorus portion) of a predetermined music is output from the speakers 18 and 57.

[Regarding normal special mode]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when normal reach is established in the “normal fluctuation mode” (see FIG. 86D or 87C), a sense of expectation for hitting the normal reach is urged. A “normal special mode” that is a game mode with a special effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “normal special mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 110 (A) is a diagram showing a mode of a character singing effect displayed after normal reach is established, FIG. 110 (B) is a diagram showing a mode of an encore effect, and FIGS. 110 (C) to (F). ) Is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the character displayed after the encore effect.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), after normal reach is established, the middle symbol sequence 1153b is scrolled and the singing effect of the character is executed. That is, the singing action by the first character is displayed on the effect display device 115, and the first half of the music unique to the character (here, music A) is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the action. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 11,76 “song reach A out (before encore)” (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and “ This corresponds to fluctuation based on “reach A per normal length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110 (B), when the first character is hidden behind the curtain by the curtain that is closed from the left and right directions, a display further prompting the player to press the effect selection switch 60 is displayed. At the same time, the sound imitating the clapping is output from the speakers 18 and 57. That is, an encore effect is made to request further singing of music for the first character hidden behind the curtain. Then, after the effect selection switch 60 is pressed or a predetermined time elapses, any of the effects shown in FIGS. 110C to 110F is displayed. If the effects of FIGS. 110C to 110F are not executed and the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the decoration symbol 1153 The variation is “out-of-track variation with reach production”, and corresponds to variation based on “single reach A out (after encore)” of variation numbers 12 and 77 (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  110 (C), the first character hidden behind the curtain in FIG. 110 (B) is displayed again, and the second half of the music A is the speaker 18, in accordance with the action of the first character singing. 57. If the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Song Reach A Long Out” of 14, 79 (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 15 and 80” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach A long length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  In FIG. 110 (D), a second character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. is displayed from the first character, and in accordance with the movement of the second character singing, a music unique to the character (here, The latter half of the music B) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 16,81 “song reach B (via song reach A)” (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 17 and 82” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach B (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  In FIG. 110 (E), a third character that is different in hairstyle, clothes, etc. from the first and second characters is displayed, and in accordance with the singing action of the third character, Here, the latter half of the music piece C) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “Song reach C (via song reach A)” 18, 83 (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation” and the “song of variation numbers 19 and 84” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach C (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  In FIG. 110 (F), a fourth character having a different hairstyle, clothes, etc. from the first to third characters is displayed, and in accordance with the movement of the fourth character singing, Here, the latter half of the music D) is output from the speakers 18, 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to fluctuations based on 20,85 “song reach D (via song reach A)” (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the “song of variation numbers 21 and 86” This corresponds to a fluctuation based on “reach D (via song reach A) per length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  As described above, in the “normal special mode” of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for normal reach and suppress the decrease in interest by the singing effect or the encore effect of the character.

[Intro special aspects]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special effect that promotes a sense of expectation for reach by executing the singing effect of the character before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, during the entire symbol variation period). The “intro special mode”, which is a game effect mode accompanied with, will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, an “intro special mode” is provided for each of the second character (song B), the third character (song C), and the fourth character (song D).

  First, the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 111 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 111 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. The figure which shows the mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG. 111 (D) is the figure which shows the mode at the time of the singing performance of the second character before the reach, and FIGS. 111 (E) to (F) are the first after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 2 characters.

  As shown in FIG. 111 (B), in this “intro special mode”, similarly to the “normal variation mode” described above, first, the scroll variation of the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c is started. During the scroll fluctuation, the display screen of the effect display device 115 suddenly becomes dark. Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), after an effect imitating a flash (flash light) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the singing operation of the music by the second character is displayed, Only the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. As described above, in the “intro special mode”, the introduction section (intro section) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect output during the entire symbol variation period. After the singing effect (ie, intro effect) of the intro part by the second character, if the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c stop at different symbols (ie, reach occurs) If not, the variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is “out-of-track variation without reach effect”, and corresponds to variation based on the variation number 22 “out of song reach B intro” (see FIGS. 77 and 79).

  However, even if the reach does not occur after the intro effect performed during the entire symbol variation period of the music B (that is, when the reach variation period does not occur), the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right When the symbol row 1153c stops at a predetermined related symbol after the scroll change, the short hit or the small win game state is won, and thus the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state occurs. As a result, in the case where the introduction part (intro part) of the music B is output instead of the sound effect during the entire symbol variation period, even if the reach is not reached, there is a possibility that the player wins a short win. Therefore, a player's discouragement can be reduced and the fall of interest can be suppressed. The variation of the decorative pattern 1153 corresponds to the variation based on the variation number 23 “out of song reach B intro (short hit)” or the variation number 24 “out of song reach B intro (small hit)” (FIG. 75). reference).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), if the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c become the same after the intro effect (that is, when the shift to the reach variation period), it is always performed. A reach (hereinafter referred to as “super reach”) in which the expected value won in the lottery by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is relatively higher than the normal reach occurs. Thus, when the intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect), the reach variation period is passed after the entire symbol variation period. Since a super reach having an expected value higher than that of normal reach is always derived, the player plays a game in the hope of shifting to the reach change period, and can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, when the intro effect is performed, the introduction part (intro part) of the music is output instead of the sound effect even in the entire symbol variation period, so even in the entire symbol variation period in which the symbol variation can only be visually recognized. The pleasure of whether to shift to the reach fluctuation period is increased, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Note that super reach is performed via normal reach. Accordingly, when the super reach is performed, the shift to the super reach is performed after the normal reach is performed. Therefore, the reach variation period is longer than that in the case where only the normal reach is performed.

  The “expected value” is a probability that the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 (hereinafter simply referred to as “lottery result” in this paragraph) is not selected. And the probability selected in the case of winning, and if the expected value is high, the sense of expectation that has been won increases. Specifically, for example, when there is a reach mode A and a reach mode B as reach modes, the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is out of place is 1/2, When the probability that the reach A and the reach B are selected when the lottery result is a win is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, the reach value of the reach A is higher than that of the reach B. In addition, the probability that reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is off is 9/10 and 1/10, respectively, and reach A and reach B are selected when the lottery result is win. When the probability of being played is one-half, reach B has a higher expected value than reach A.

  And if it shifts to a reach variation period after the intro effect performed in all the symbol variation periods, the first half part of the music B will be output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the second character. Here, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation This corresponds to fluctuations based on the number 25 “single reach B first half off” (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 26 “song reach B” This corresponds to a variation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing effect of the second character shown in FIG. 111 (E) (the first half of the music B), the singing action by the second character is performed as shown in FIG. 111 (F). In addition, the latter half of the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57. Then, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at a symbol different from the stop symbols of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “displacement variation with reach effect”, and the variation number This corresponds to a variation based on 27 “Long-term reach of Song Reach B” (see FIGS. 77 and 79). On the other hand, if the middle symbol row 1153b stops at the same symbol as the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c, the variation of the decorative symbol 1153 is “big hit variation”, and the variation number 28 “song reach B” This corresponds to a variation based on “per second half length” (see FIGS. 70 and 72).

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special aspect” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 112 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 112 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. FIG. 112 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of the flashlight effect, FIG. 112 (D) is a diagram showing an aspect at the time of singing the third character before the reach, and FIGS. 112 (E) to (F) are figures after the reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 3 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 112A to 112F) is the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 111 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), in the effect display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153, and as shown in FIG. 112 (C), An effect imitating a flash (flashlight) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the singing operation of the music by the third character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. The Then, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), if reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the song C is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the third character's singing effect (the first half of the song C), as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the latter half of the song C in accordance with the singing action by the third character. Are output from the speakers 18 and 57.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 29 to 35) for the “intro special mode” of the third character (song C) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (music B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIGS. 111 (C) and 112 (C) because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. The third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 112 (D) to (F)) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 111 (D) to (F)). And so on.

  Next, the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (song D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “intro special aspect” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 113 (A) is a diagram showing an aspect of a decorative symbol 1153 before the start of change, FIG. 113 (B) is a diagram showing an aspect of the decorative symbol 1153 being changed before reach, and FIG. 113 (C) is a diagram. The figure which shows the mode at the time of flashlight production, FIG.113 (D) is the figure which shows the mode at the time of the singing performance of the 4th character before reach, FIG.113 (E)-(F) is the 1st after reach. It is a figure which shows the aspect at the time of the singing performance of 4 characters.

  The flow of the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 113A to 113F) is also the flow of the “intro special mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 111 ( A) to (F)) are basically the same. That is, in this “intro special mode”, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), in the effect display device 115, the display screen suddenly becomes dark during the scroll fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153, and as shown in FIG. 113 (C), An effect imitating a flash (flashlight) is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), the singing operation of the music by the fourth character is displayed, and only the introduction part (intro) of the music D is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the singing operation. The Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), if reach occurs after the intro effect, the first half of the music piece D is output from the speakers 18 and 57 in accordance with the action of the fourth character singing. Furthermore, when the lottery result is not derived in the singing effect of the fourth character (the first half of the music D), as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the second half of the music D is synchronized with the action of the fourth character singing. Are output from the speakers 18 and 57.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 36 to 42) for the “intro special mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also used for each variation command (intro special mode) of the second character (music B). The same as the variation numbers 22 to 28). However, the above-described flashlight effect is displayed in a different manner in FIGS. 111 (C) and 113 (C) because the display manner differs depending on the music that the character subsequently sings. In addition, the singing effect of the fourth character (see FIGS. 113D to 113F) is the singing effect of the second character (see FIGS. 111D to 111F) and the singing effect of the third character. (See FIGS. 112 (D) to (F)).

  As described above, in the “intro special mode” of the present embodiment, the singing action of the character is displayed before the reach occurs during the symbol variation (that is, the entire symbol variation period), and the music introduction unit ( Intro section) is output. When reach is established by this intro effect, the continuation of the intro part (the first half and the second half) of the music is output together with the singing action of the character. At this time, the super reach is suddenly displayed without going through the normal reach. That is, the reach form in which the continuation of the intro part (first half part and second half part) of the music outputted during the entire symbol variation period is output together with the singing action of the character corresponds to super reach. As described above, the super reach is suddenly displayed, so that the player can be surprised and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, when an intro effect is performed during the entire symbol variation period (that is, when a music introduction part (intro part) is output instead of the predetermined sound effect), instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period. The general musical sound that is the same music as the specific musical sound (rust part) output during the reach fluctuation period and includes a part (intro part) that is different from the specific musical sound (rust part) is output. When the intro part of the music is output in, a sense of expectation that a reach mode having an expected value higher than that of normal reach is derived increases, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the musical sound output during the reach variation period includes the phrase of the chorus part that is most exciting in the music. Thereby, a player's mood can be heightened by the combination of the effect display in the effect display device 115 and the musical sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes phrases related to the musical composition that is output during the reach variation period. The player can be reminded of what is being done, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the general musical sound that is output instead of the predetermined sound effect during the entire symbol variation period is a musical tone that includes a phrase applied to the introduction part (intro part) of the music that is output during the reach variation period. If so, it is possible to give the player an interesting feeling such as “intro quiz” that predicts what kind of music will be output, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the entire symbol variation period.

[About special aspects of chance]
Next, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, “chance” that is a game effect mode with a special effect that derives a small hit or short hit and directs a transition to a mode that is likely to be advantageous to the player. The “eye special mode” will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “chance eye special mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 114 (A) shows a mode in which the decorative symbol 1153 represents a small hit or short hit, and FIG. 114 (B) shows a mode in which a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). FIG. 114 (C) is a diagram illustrating a mode for deriving that the effect opening / closing device 398 is opened, and FIGS. 114 (D) to 114 (E) are diagrams illustrating modes during a mode transition chance. 114 (F) to (G) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the first mode, and FIGS. 114 (H) to (I) are diagrams illustrating the mode of the second mode.

  The following “chance eye special mode” is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “chance eye (short hit)” of the fluctuation number 43 or the “chance eye (small hit)” of the fluctuation number 44.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (A), when the “song” symbol is stopped on the left symbol column 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped on the right symbol column 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped on the middle symbol column 1153b. The decorative design 1153 derives a short hit or a small hit. Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the decorative symbol 1153 starts scrolling again, and a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Specifically, in parallel with the scroll variation of the decorative symbol 1153, the “song” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c → the “princess” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → the “song” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. The number of decorative symbols 1153 is almighty symbols (2 to 6 in this embodiment) for the number set in the order of “Princess” symbol → “Legend” symbol in the left symbol column 1153a → “Legend” symbol in the right symbol column 1153c. (Design A).

  Here, the almighty symbol (A symbol) will be described repeatedly. In a change after a part of the decorative symbol 1153 changes to an almighty symbol (A symbol), when either one of the stop symbol of the left symbol column 1153a or the stop symbol of the right symbol column 1153c becomes an almighty symbol (A symbol) Are controlled so that reach always occurs. Further, when both the stop symbol of the left symbol row 1153a and the stop symbol of the right symbol row 1153c are almighty symbols (A symbol), control is performed so that long hits are always generated. Therefore, in FIG. 114 (B), the greater the number of decorative symbols 1153 that change to an almighty symbol (A symbol), the higher the player's expectation for reach or win, and the lowering of interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, the quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is displayed in the lower left part of the effect display device 115 (see FIG. 114 (B)), and every time the almighty symbol (A symbol) triggers reach ( That is, every time the symbol becomes a stop symbol, it returns to the second suppression symbol (normal symbol) before the change, and the quantity of the almighty symbol (A symbol) is subtracted. Therefore, since the player can easily grasp the remaining amount of the almighty symbol (A symbol), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, up to six of the decorative symbols 1153 (specifically, the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c) can be changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). Conventionally, there has been a change in the decorative design to an almighty design, but all of the decorative designs in a certain design row are changed to an almighty design. This is because, for example, an effect using an almighty symbol is performed only in the variation in which the reach mode is formed. When using an almighty symbol (A symbol) over a plurality of subsequent variations as in the present embodiment, changing all of the symbol columns to an almighty symbol (A symbol) requires frequent reach production. , Can put excessive expectations on the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by changing the maximum six decorative symbols 1153 to the almighty symbol (A symbol), it becomes possible to produce a disengagement that does not use the almighty symbol (A symbol). The load is reduced. In addition, the game can be made appropriate without giving excessive expectations to the player.

  Then, after the fluctuation of the decorative symbol 1153 shown in FIG. 114 (B) is stopped, the short hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (C), an effect (for example, “Aim for the top!”) That prompts the game ball to be ejected toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed. At the same time, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 is executed twice as “short hit” or “small hit”. One of the game balls won in the effect opening / closing device 398 is held by the distribution mechanism 438 until an effect by the effect accessory 430 described later is performed.

  Here, a winning manner to the effect opening / closing device 398 by short win or small win will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. FIG. FIG. 115 is a front view of the effect display device and effect accessory before winning the effect opening / closing device, and FIG. 116 is a front view of the effect display device and effect accessory after winning the effect opening / closing device. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 115, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438 because the game opening / closing device 398 has not won a game ball before the short hit or the small hit is executed. As described above, since the accessory guiding path 436 through which the game ball is guided from the effect opening / closing device 398 is formed of a transparent member, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side) It can be visually recognized that the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 116, when a game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 by performing a short hit or a small hit, the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls on the accessory guide path 436, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. Is visible. From the fluctuation after the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438 (in other words, a mode transition chance described later may be activated). ) To the player (specifically, “CHANCE” shown in FIG. 116) is displayed on the effect display device 115.

  Returning to FIG. 114, with the opportunity that the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). When it is determined that the mode transition chance is to be executed, the mode transition chance accompanied by the effect by the following effect accessory 430 is executed. The mode transition chance of the present embodiment is not necessarily executed by the next change, but is activated after execution of the hold change for the number of times selected by the lottery. On the other hand, when it is determined not to execute the mode transition chance, the mode transition chance is not executed, and the effect by the effect accessory 430 is not executed.

  Here, the mode transition chance will be described. Since the player cannot determine whether it is a small hit or a short hit only by opening / closing operation of the performance object 430, whether or not the player has shifted to the probable game state due to the short hit by the “mode shift chance” in this embodiment The player's expectation is improved by being able to judge to some extent (in other words, whether or not the normal gaming state remains due to the small hit).

  First, when a mode transition chance is activated, an effect for deriving the mode transition opportunity is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 114 (E), an effect of lottery of which mode to shift to among a plurality of modes is displayed along with the effect by the effect-use agent 430 described later. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of modes to be transferred to, a first mode (in this embodiment, “diva mode”) that is highly likely to be a probability variation gaming state, and a probability variation gaming state that is more likely than the first mode Has a high second mode (in this embodiment, “SUPER diva mode”). Further, in this mode transition chance, there is a case where the mode is not changed and the normal gaming state is selected (in this embodiment, “out”), but here “first mode” and “first” are selected. A case in which one of “2 modes” is selected as a mode transition destination will be described as an example.

  Here, the mode lottery effect by the effect object 430 executed at the mode transition chance will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 117 is a front view of the effect display device and the effect accessory for the mode lottery effect. As shown in FIG. 117, in the mode lottery effect by the effect item 430, the effect item 430 is rotationally driven and the figure 434 arranged inside the accessory rotation body 432 is the front side (that is, the player side). ) And the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 438 is guided to the first performance basket 470. And the aspect (refer Fig.54 (a)) which the 1st production | generation bowl 470 inclined downward toward the 1st stage exit 476, and the 1st production | generation hall | pass 470 below the 2nd production pole guidance port 478 An inclined operation (see FIG. 54B) is repeated, and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470 is performed. In this embodiment, when the game ball rolls in the left-right direction, by changing the inclination mode (for example, the degree of inclination) of the first performance pole 470, the performance outlets 476, 480 for winning the game ball are awarded. It has a structure that can be suggested before. Thereby, a lottery result to be described later can be suggested to some extent even during the lottery, and the mode lottery effect does not become monotonous. As a result, the interest of the mode lottery effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 117, the arrow of “first mode” (diva mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 114 (E) points to the first stage 476, and “second mode” ( The arrow of SUPER Diva Mode) points to the second performance exit 480. Therefore, when the first stage 樋 470 is inclined toward the first stage 476 and the game ball wins the first stage 476, the “first mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first effect 樋 470 is tilted toward the second effect 樋 guide port 478 and the game ball rolls on the second effect 樋 472 and wins the second performance exit 480, the mode transition destination “Second mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 114, when the “first mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. 114 (F), the effect of deriving the transition to the “first mode” is obtained. Is displayed. As shown in FIG. 114 (G), in the “first mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode (see FIG. 86, etc.), and thereafter, the display state is based on this display state. The scroll variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “first mode” that is highly likely to be in the probability-changing gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for winning.

  On the other hand, when the “second mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), an effect for deriving the transition to the “second mode” is displayed. . As shown in FIG. 114 (I), in the “second mode”, the background effect displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode and the “first mode”. The scroll variation of the decorative pattern 1153 is executed. Therefore, by executing the “second mode” that is more likely to be a probability variation gaming state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  In addition, as described above, when the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). However, even when a game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, a lottery for shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is performed. Then, after the transition to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is determined, an execution lottery based on the variation pattern is performed from the next variation. Only after winning in the execution lottery, the mode is shifted to the “first mode” or the “second mode”. However, when the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, the probability of shifting to the “first mode” or the “second mode” is lower than when the game ball is held.

  As described above, in the “chance eye special mode” of the present embodiment, not only a small hit or short win is derived, but also an almighty symbol (A symbol) effect or a mode lottery effect for the director for an effect 430 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve a sense of expectation for winning or mode transition and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that the player has struck toward the game area 37 is received by the effect opening / closing device 398, and the mode transition effect is performed by the figure 434 using the received game ball. . As a result, while being a first-class gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with a sense similar to that of a second-class gaming machine (that is, a feeling in which a game result is determined using a game ball that has been struck by itself) As a result, the fall of interest can be suppressed.

  The “song” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row 1153a, the “princess” symbol is stopped in the right symbol row 1153c, and the “legend” symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row 1153b, and then the decorative symbol 1153 is scrolled again. Thus, it has already been described that a part of the left symbol row 1153a and the right symbol row 1153c is changed to an almighty symbol (A symbol). In the variation that produces the replacement with the almighty symbol (A symbol), in the “chance eye special mode”, the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined symbol (“1”, “3”, “2” in this embodiment). Stopped display. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the variation that produces the replacement to the almighty symbol (A symbol), the decorative symbol 1153 is a predetermined probable big hit symbol (in this embodiment, “1”, “1”, “1”). ) Is displayed in a stopped state. This mode is executed at the time of fluctuation based on the “number of chances (per probability variation length)” of the fluctuation number 45. In this case, the substitution to the almighty symbol (A symbol) is virtually meaningless, but since the probability variation per unit is suddenly derived, it is possible to surprise the player and delight the player. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the transfer destination mode is determined in advance. And it is the above-mentioned mode transition chance that makes the transition to the predetermined mode look as if it is drawn by a game ball. Next, specific processing in the mode transition chance will be described.

[Determine destination mode]
The mode to be the transfer destination is determined by referring to the mode transfer destination lottery table shown in FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b). The mode transition destination lottery table includes a small hit hour mode transition destination lottery table (see FIG. 118 (a)) corresponding to small hits and a short hit hour mode transition destination lottery table (see FIG. 118 (b)) corresponding to short hits. ) And are prepared. In each mode transition destination lottery table, “gaming state”, “current mode”, and “mode transition destination” are shown. “Game state” indicates a game state before winning a short win or a small win. There are three game states: low probability, low probability (UP), and high probability. The high probability is an internal probability variation state (probability variation state) in which time-short control is not performed. The low probability is a normal state (non-probability variation state) that is not a probability variation state. The low probability (UP) is a case where the normal state and the number of fluctuations after the long hit are within a predetermined range (200 to 299, 400 to 499, 600 to 699 in the present embodiment). “Current mode” indicates a mode in which the player is staying at the time of winning a small hit or short win. The “mode shift destination” includes “normal mode”, “first mode” (diva mode in this embodiment), “second mode” (SUPER diva mode in this embodiment), and “Live mode” (probability change mode to be described later) is prepared, and the destination is allocated according to the gaming state and the current mode, and the destination mode is determined. . For example, in the small hit hour mode transfer destination lottery table (see FIG. 118 (a)), as shown in the upper row, when the low probability state is small hit while staying in the “normal mode”, 60/100 The mode of the transfer destination is determined as “normal mode” with probability (no transfer). Further, the mode of the transfer destination is determined as the “first mode” with a probability of 35/100, and the mode of the transfer destination is determined as the “second mode” with a probability of 5/100. In this case, the transfer destination mode is not determined to be the “live mode”.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, different tables for short wins and small hits are referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined based on the game state before the execution of the short hit game or the small hit game (see FIG. 118 (a), FIG. 118 (b)). Thereby, the mode of the transfer destination according to the change of the gaming state due to short hit or small hit can be determined appropriately and easily. Then, in the short hit that is controlled to a high probability state regardless of the previous gaming state after execution, the probability that the “first mode” or “second mode” is selected as the transition destination mode is “normal mode”. "Is higher than the probability of being selected. Therefore, by changing to the “first mode” or the “second mode”, it is possible to infer a change in the gaming state to the high probability state, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  In the present embodiment, “first mode”, “second mode”, and “live mode” are prepared in addition to the “normal mode” as the transfer destination mode. Thereby, the mode transition does not become monotonous, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed. The possibility that the “first mode” is in a high probability state is higher than that in the “normal mode”, and the possibility that the “second mode” is in a high probability state is higher than that in the “first mode”. It has become. Thereby, the player's expectation degree by mode transfer can be changed, and the interest of a game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the transfer destination mode is determined based on the mode (current mode) at the time of short hit or small hit (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)). As a result, when the chance appears, there is no mode change such as “first mode” transition while staying in “second mode” or “normal mode” transition while staying in “first mode”, and the player is Don't be disappointed.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations after a long hit is within a predetermined range (low probability (UP)) in the normal state, the transition destination is compared with a case where the number of fluctuations is not within the predetermined range. The mode distribution to be determined is different (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)). Specifically, at a low probability (UP), mode change is not performed with a high probability of 80/100 while staying in the “normal mode” at the time of a small hit (that is, the mode of the transfer destination is “normal mode”). (Refer to FIG. 118 (a)), at the time of short hit, the mode is shifted to the “first mode” or the “second mode”. Specifically, the transition destination mode is determined to be the “first mode” with a probability of 55/100, and the transition destination mode is determined to be the “second mode” with a probability of 40/100 (FIG. 118 (b)). )reference). As a result, when the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined range, if there is a mode transition from a low probability state, the possibility of a short hit is extremely high. As a result, the mode transition in the case where the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined range can further improve the player's sense of expectation, and the player can be thrilled and excited.

  After the transition destination mode is thus determined, the actual mode transition is performed after the predetermined condition is satisfied. As described above, when a game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, the mode transition is performed with the execution of the mode transition chance (in this embodiment, “diva chance”). On the other hand, when the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, the mode is suddenly changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Next, the mode transition condition will be described.

[Mode transition conditions (when game balls are held)]
When a game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, the mode transition chance is always executed. Whether or not to execute the mode transition chance is determined by the variation pattern and the activation probability as the activation condition.

  In the present embodiment, a mode transition chance is executed when a predetermined variation pattern is sent from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131 and the activation condition is satisfied. Specifically, as shown in Table 3, when a variation pattern with variation numbers 8 to 21 is stored, a mode transition chance may be executed, and a variation pattern with variation numbers 22 to 72 is stored. If this happens, there is no possibility that a mode transition chance will be executed. Then, the mode change chance is executed in place of the change display based on the change patterns of the change numbers 8 to 21. Further, even when the variation patterns of the variation numbers 8 to 21 are stored, the mode transition chance is not immediately executed. As shown in Table 4, the variation numbers 8 to 21 are first varied (first time). When the pattern is stored, the mode transition chance is executed with a probability of 2/5. If the mode change chance is not executed for the first time, the mode change chance is executed with a probability of 1/2 when the change pattern of the change numbers 8 to 21 is stored next (second time). Similarly, when the mode transition chance is not executed for the second time, the mode transition chance is executed with a probability of two thirds when the variation pattern of the change numbers 8 to 21 is stored next (third time). The If the mode transition chance is not executed for the third time, the mode transition chance is executed with a probability of 1 (always) when the variation pattern of the variation numbers 8 to 21 is stored next (fourth).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a predetermined variation pattern (that is, a variation pattern of variation numbers 8 to 21) is transmitted from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131, the mode transition chance is executed. . Then, the mode change chance is executed by replacing the change display with the change pattern. With this configuration, the mode lottery effect by the effect accessory 430 executed at the mode transition chance is executed in accordance with the change time based on the change pattern. Thus, if the predetermined variation pattern is appropriately selected in advance, the mode lottery effect time can be sufficiently secured, and the mode lottery effect that is interesting and easy to understand for the player is executed. Can do. Moreover, if the predetermined variation pattern is appropriately selected in advance, for example, a variation display that is highly expected by the player will not be replaced with a mode lottery effect, and the execution of the mode lottery effect will be rejected and the interest of the game will be reduced. You can avoid the situation of letting you. Furthermore, the control of the mode lottery effect can be realized relatively easily by replacing the display with a variation pattern.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the variation patterns 8 to 21 are stored, the mode transition chance is not immediately executed, but the mode transition chance is executed with the activation probability shown in Table 4. The As a result, the execution timing of the mode transition chance becomes uncertain in combination with the determination of the execution of the mode transition chance based on the variation pattern. As a result, for example, the fun of the game can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the mode transition is performed immediately after the end of the short hit or the small hit or after a predetermined number of changes. In addition, since it is determined whether or not to execute based on the activation probability shown in Table 4, the execution determination process becomes relatively simple.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the mode transition chance is executed by storing the variation patterns of the variation numbers 8 to 21, as shown in Table 4, the first (first time) has a probability of 2/5. The second time has a probability of 1/2, and the third time has a probability of 2/3. That is, the activation probability is gradually increased every time the variation patterns of the variation numbers 8 to 21 are stored. Thereby, since the probability that the mode transition chance is executed increases stepwise, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the execution delay of the mode transition chance. In addition, as shown in Table 4, since the activation probability is 1 at the fourth time and is always executed, it is possible to reliably prevent the execution delay of the mode transition chance.

[Mode transition conditions (when game balls are not held)]
When the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438, the mode transition chance is not executed, but the mode transition may be performed at a certain timing. Whether or not to perform mode transition is determined based on the mode at the transition destination, the variation pattern, and the rush probability as the rush condition.

  In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to perform mode transition based on the determined transition destination mode. Even when execution is determined, the mode transition is not immediately performed. Further, when the predetermined variation pattern is sent from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131 and the entry condition is satisfied, the mode transition is performed. It is supposed to be executed. Specifically, as shown in Table 5, when the determined transfer destination mode is the “first mode”, execution is determined with a probability of 1/2. Then, when a variation pattern indicating reach variation is stored in the variation display repeated thereafter, mode transition is executed with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, as shown in Table 5, when the determined transfer destination mode is the “second mode”, execution is always determined. Then, when a variation pattern indicating reach variation is stored in the variation display repeated thereafter, mode transition is executed with a probability of 9/10. In each case, if the mode transition is not executed while the variation pattern indicating the reach variation is stored three times, the mode transition is not performed even when the execution of the mode transition is determined.

  Thus, in this embodiment, first, based on the execution condition corresponding to the mode of the transfer destination, it is determined whether to execute the mode shift (see Table 5). As a result, the execution of the mode transition depends on whether the transition destination mode is the “first mode” or the “second mode”, which contributes to the enhancement of the fun of the game. Further, even if it is decided to execute the mode transition, the mode transition is not immediately performed. Specifically, as shown in Table 5, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (that is, a fluctuation pattern indicating reach fluctuation) is sent from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131, the rush probability corresponding to the mode of the transition destination is Mode transition is performed. Thereby, coupled with the determination of the execution of the mode transition based on the variation pattern, the execution timing of the mode transition becomes uncertain. As a result, for example, the mode transition seems to have been suddenly executed compared to the configuration in which the mode transition is performed immediately after the end of the short hit or the small hit or after a predetermined number of fluctuations. Can be generated. Further, it is determined whether or not to perform mode transition based on the rush probability shown in Table 5. Therefore, the execution determination process is relatively simple.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed, the mode transition is not executed when the number of times of storing the variation pattern indicating the reach variation reaches the upper limit number (three times in the present embodiment). Confirm. This can reliably prevent the execution of mode transition from being delayed more than necessary.

[Mode transition conditions (when the mode transition chance is executed and “disappears”)]
Although it has already been described that the mode transition chance is always executed when the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438, the mode transition is not always executed by the execution of the mode transition chance. In other words, there is a case where the mode is not changed in the mode change chance and is controlled to the normal gaming state (“normal mode”) (in this embodiment, “out”). At this time, the mode transition may be suddenly executed at a certain timing thereafter. Whether or not to execute the mode transition is determined by the gaming state, the variation pattern, and the rush probability as the rush condition.

  In this embodiment, when the mode transition is not performed in the mode transition chance and the normal mode is set, whether to execute the mode transition is determined based on whether the gaming state is a low probability state or a high probability state. To do. Even if execution is decided, it is not executed immediately. Further, when a predetermined variation pattern is sent from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131 and the entry condition is satisfied, the mode transition is executed. It has become so. Specifically, as shown in Table 6, when the gaming state is a low probability state, the mode transition is not executed. This is to prevent the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state, execution of the mode transition is determined with a half probability. Then, when a variation pattern indicating reach variation is stored in the variation display repeated thereafter, mode transition is executed with a probability of 9/10. Note that if the mode transition is not executed while the variation pattern indicating the reach variation is stored twice, the mode transition is not executed even when the mode transition execution is determined.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, first, based on the execution condition corresponding to the gaming state, it is determined whether or not to execute the mode transition (see Table 6). As a result, the execution of the mode transition depends on the gaming state, and it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations by not performing the mode transition in the low probability state. Thereafter, as shown in Table 6, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern (that is, a fluctuation pattern indicating reach fluctuation) is sent from the ROM 604 of the main control board 131, a predetermined entry probability (10 in this embodiment) is set. 9), the mode transition is executed. Thereby, coupled with the determination of the execution of the mode transition based on the variation pattern, the execution timing of the mode transition becomes uncertain. As a result, even if the mode transition is not performed due to the mode transition chance, the mode transition seems to have been suddenly executed thereafter, so that the player can be surprised and expect a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not to perform mode transition based on the rush probability shown in Table 6. Therefore, the execution determination process is relatively simple.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the mode transition is to be executed, the mode transition is not performed when the number of times of storing the variation pattern indicating the reach variation reaches the upper limit number (two times in the present embodiment). Confirm. This can reliably prevent the execution of mode transition from being delayed more than necessary.

[About mode drop]
When the mode transition described above is performed, then a mode fall lottery is performed. When the mode drop lottery is won, the normal mode is returned from the first mode or the second mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, there are a fall due to the number of fluctuations, a fall due to the reach of the first special symbol, and a fall due to the reach of the second special symbol.

[Fall by the number of fluctuations]
In the fall by the number of fluctuations, a lottery is performed according to the number of fluctuations from the time of entering the first mode or the second mode. Specifically, after the entry, if the number of changes reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), it is assumed that the lottery is won.

[Fall by the number of reach of the first special symbol]
The fall due to the number of times the first special symbol has been reached is drawn through a predetermined number of changes (15 times in the present embodiment) after entering the first mode or the second mode. Specifically, the falling lottery is performed with the probability shown in the following Table 7 according to the reach number of the first special symbol after a predetermined number of fluctuations. In this case, in the normal gaming state (low probability), it is easier to fall than in the probability variation gaming state (high probability). Further, in the first mode, it is easier to fall than in the second mode. It should be noted that when the reach number of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times in the present embodiment), it always falls.

[Fall by the number of reach of the second special symbol]
The fall due to the reach number of the second special symbol is drawn by lottery after a predetermined number of fluctuations (15 times in the present embodiment) after entering the first mode or the second mode. Specifically, the falling lottery is performed with the probability shown in the following Table 8 according to the reach number of the second special symbol after a predetermined number of fluctuations. Also in this case, in the normal gaming state (low probability), it is easier to fall than in the probability variation gaming state (high probability). Further, in the first mode, it is easier to fall than in the second mode. It should be noted that when the reach number of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (10 times in the present embodiment), it always falls.

  In the present embodiment, such a falling lottery can prevent the mode effect (the effect of the first mode or the second mode) from being executed for a long period of time, and does not cause the player to have excessive expectations. . Further, as described above, the falling lottery is performed using the reach number of the first special symbol and the reach number of the second special symbol. That is, when the variation pattern forming the reach mode is transmitted, it is determined that the end condition is satisfied with the probabilities shown in Tables 7 and 8. As a result, the end timing of the first mode or the second mode (falling timing to the normal mode) can be made uncertain, which contributes to improving the fun of the game.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in Table 7 and Table 8, in the low probability lottery game state (low probability), the fall probability is higher than in the high probability lottery game state (high probability). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the mode effect from being executed over a long period of time despite the low probability lottery game state, and it is possible to reliably suppress the player from having excessive expectations.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as shown in Tables 7 and 8, the fall probability is set to be gradually increased according to the number of times the variation pattern is sent. In particular, the fall probability is set to 1 when the number of times the variation pattern is sent reaches the upper limit number. As a result, the mode effect can be reliably prevented from being executed for a long period of time, and the mode effect is continued to some extent, which contributes to the enhancement of the mode effect.

[About long-performing effects]
Next, a “long win effect mode” that is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a long hit game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “long hit effect mode” is executed. That is, FIG. 119 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving long hits, FIGS. 119 (B) to (E) are diagrams showing modes during long hits, and FIGS. 119 (F) to (H) are FIG. 119 is a diagram illustrating a mode lottery after a long winning game, and FIGS. 119 (I) to (J) are diagrams illustrating a mode after a long winning game.

  First, when the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c become the same stop symbol (that is, when the big hit variation ends), the start of the long hit game is derived as shown in FIG. 119 (A). After that, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 397 is executed for 15 rounds, and accompanying this, the effect image (including characters) of the effect display device 115 and the sound of the speakers 18 and 57 (including music). Winning effect is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 119 (B), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) prompting the player to inject the game ball toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing device The opening / closing operation 398 is performed for two rounds. Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing downward) that prompts the player to inject the game ball toward the jackpot game opening / closing device 400 is displayed, and the jackpot game The opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 400 is performed over 12 rounds.

  Here, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is a second suppression symbol (in this embodiment, so-called “normal” which notifies the second suppression perpetuating to the second game suppression mode (time reduction mode) to be described later after the long winning game. And a first suppression symbol (in this embodiment, a so-called “probability variation symbol”) for notifying the first suppression per unit to shift to a first game suppression mode (probability variation mode) to be described later after a long hit game. Is also). Then, when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is the “second suppression symbol (normal symbol)” (that is, when the lottery result is per normal length, the lottery result is per probable length, and the decorative symbol is When the stop symbol of 1153 is “second suppression symbol (normal symbol)”, the mode lottery effects as shown in FIGS. 119 (D) to (I) below are executed. When the stop symbol of the decoration symbol 1153 is “first suppression symbol (probability variation)” (that is, the lottery result is per probability variation length and the stop symbol of the decoration symbol 1153 is “first suppression symbol ( In the case of “probable variation symbol)”, after the long hit game, the mode shifts to the probability variation mode (live mode) described later as the first game suppression state without performing the mode lottery effect (see FIG. 119 (I)). .

  When the stop symbol of the decorative symbol 1153 is “second suppression symbol (normal symbol)”, in the present embodiment, in the fourteenth round, as shown in FIG. Then, the second to fourth characters) are displayed so as to be selectable, and the player can select an arbitrary character by pressing the effect selection switch 60. Then, in correspondence with the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 119 (D), a long hit later mode lottery effect, which will be described later, is executed.

  Lastly, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), an effect (for example, an arrow image pointing upward) that prompts the player to inject the game ball toward the effect opening / closing device 398 is displayed, and the effect opening / closing is performed. The opening / closing operation of the device 398 is performed only for one round. With the above, a total of 15 rounds per game is completed. At the end of the long hit game, different long hit after mode lottery effects are executed according to the character selected on the effect screen of FIG. 119 (D).

  Specifically, when the second character is selected, a long hitting rear mode lottery effect (plate effect) shown in FIG. 119 (F) is executed. In this plate effect, a plurality of panels representing the mode transition destination are sequentially specified while the second character moves, and the second character stops and shifts to the mode represented by the last designated panel. . Further, when the third character is selected, a long hit after mode lottery effect (single notification effect) shown in FIG. 119 (G) is executed. In this one-announcement effect, only the transition destination mode is displayed in accordance with the action of the third character, and the mode is shifted to that mode. In addition, when the fourth character is selected, a long hitting mode lottery effect (an accessory lottery effect) shown in FIG. 119 (H) is executed, and details of the accessory lottery effect will be described later.

  Then, after the long hit game according to the present embodiment is completed, if the long hit is “per probable change short length” according to the long hit mode lottery effect of FIGS. 119 (F) to (H), FIG. As shown in I), a transition is made to a probability variation mode (live mode) in which both a probability variation gaming state and a short time gaming state occur. On the other hand, if the per unit length is “per normal unit length”, as shown in FIG. 119 (J), the mode shifts to the short time mode (private mode) in which only the short time gaming state occurs after the end of the long per game.

  Here, a long hitting mode lottery effect (a combination lottery effect) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a front view of the effect display device and the effect accessory at the time of long hitting mode lottery effect (actor lottery effect). In this accessory lottery effect, a mode lottery effect by the effect accessory 430 is performed using the game balls held in the distribution mechanism 438 by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing device 398 for the 15th round.

  That is, when the fourth character is selected on the effect screen shown in FIG. 119 (D), as in FIG. 116, when the game ball wins the effect opening / closing device 398 in the fifteenth round, the game mechanism ball 438 is assigned by the distribution mechanism 438. Is retained. When the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438, the game ball that has won the effect opening / closing device 398 after that is discharged to the back of the game board 5 by the distribution mechanism 438. From the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (that is, the player side), it is possible to visually recognize the manner in which the game ball rolls in the accessory guide path 436, and the game ball is held by the distribution mechanism 438. Is visible. In the opening / closing operation of the effect opening / closing device 398 in the first and second rounds, even when a game ball is won, the sorting mechanism 438 discharges the game ball 5 behind the game board 5 without holding the game ball. This is because the mode lottery effect by the effect object 430 is executed by using the game ball that the player has won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before (i.e., the 15th round). Thereby, since the player can surely grasp that the game ball used for the mode lottery effect has been won by himself, the decrease in interest can be suppressed. If the game ball is not won in the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round, the game ball for performing the mode lottery effect by the effect agent 430 cannot be secured, so other mode lottery effects (described above) Plate production etc.) is executed.

  Therefore, even though it is a first-class gaming machine, it can be played with a sense that the gaming result is determined using a game ball that it has struck like a second-class gaming machine, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest it can.

  In addition, when the second or third character is selected on the effect screen of FIG. 119 (D), the effect by the effect agent 430 is not performed, so that the game ball is sent to the effect opening / closing device 398 in the 15th round. Even if the prize is won, the game ball is not held in the distribution mechanism 438. In addition, when the fourth character is selected, an effect by the effect agent 430 is always executed, and therefore an effect for deriving that the game ball is held in the distribution mechanism 438 (specifically, FIG. 116). “CHANCE” shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 120, in the mode lottery effect by the effect item 430, the effect character 430 is rotationally driven, and the figure 434 arranged inside the accessory rotation body 432 is moved to the front side (that is, Directed to the player side). Then, the game ball held by the distribution mechanism 438 is guided to the first effect basket 470. And the aspect (refer Fig.54 (a)) which the 1st production | generation bowl 470 inclined downward toward the 1st stage exit 476, and the 1st stage 樋 470 below toward the 2nd production pole 478 The inclined mode (see FIG. 54B) is repeated, and an effect operation in which the game ball rolls in the left-right direction on the first effect rod 470 is performed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 120, the arrow of “time reduction mode” (private mode) displayed on the effect screen of FIG. 119 (H) points to the first performance exit 476, and “probability mode” (live change mode) The (mode) arrow points to the second performance exit 480. Therefore, when the first performance pole 470 is inclined toward the first performance exit 476 and the game ball wins the first performance exit 476, the “time reduction mode” is selected as the mode transition destination. On the other hand, when the first effect 樋 470 is tilted toward the second effect 樋 guide port 478 and the game ball rolls on the second effect 樋 472 and wins the second performance exit 480, the mode transition destination “Probability mode” is selected.

  Returning to FIG. 119, when the “probability change mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the effect item 430, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the process proceeds to the “probability change mode”. In the “probability change mode”, the probability change game state and the short-time game state are executed until the next jackpot, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode and the “short-time mode”. Therefore, by executing the “probability change mode”, which is a game state that is extremely advantageous for the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, when the “temporal mode” is selected by the mode lottery effect of the production accessory 430, as shown in FIG. In the “short time mode”, the short time gaming state is executed until a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) is changed, and the background of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 115 is different from the normal mode. Therefore, by executing the “short time mode”, which is a game state advantageous to the player, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

  As described above, in the “long winning effect mode” of the present embodiment, the long winning game is not only generated with various images and sounds, but also the player can arbitrarily select the long winning mode lottery effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. In particular, in the after-long winning mode lottery effect (actor lottery effect), the effect by the effecting agent 430 using the game ball won in the effect opening / closing device 398 immediately before the end of the long hit game (that is, the 15th round). Therefore, even if `` normal long win '' is announced before the long hit game occurs, the expectation to shift to the `` probable change mode '' advantageous to the player after the long hit game is maintained, The decrease can be suppressed.

[About Probability Game Production Mode]
Next, the “probability game effect mode”, which is a game effect mode with a special effect for generating a probable game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the singing effects (that is, the probability-changing game effect mode) of the second to fourth characters (music B to music D) as described below in the probability-changing game state after the long hit game are as follows. It is executed until derivation per length. Below, the “probability game effect mode” for each character (music) will be described.

  First, the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating an aspect displayed on the effect display device when the “probability game effect aspect” of the second character (music B) is executed. That is, FIG. 121 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 121 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during a probability variation game.

  As shown in FIG. 121 (A), after the long hit game is completed, the mode is changed to the “probability change mode” (that is, the mode is changed to the probability change game state), and one of the change commands having the change numbers 46 to 54 is selected. In this case, the singing effect of the following second character (song B) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 121 (B) to (E), an effect is produced in which the four doors are sequentially closed from the left and right directions (that is, a maximum of four door effects), and accordingly, the music B Each part is output together with the character's singing performance. Here, the music B is composed of five consecutive parts (first part to fifth part), and the first first part is a prelude to the so-called music B (the same applies to the other music C and D). ). In the probability variation gaming state, the lottery result by the first special symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710 is not a reach effect by a plurality of symbol strings as in the normal gaming state (formally The variation display is performed until the lottery result is derived), and the singing effect itself by the character is the reach effect.

  Specifically, the first first part is output together with the singing effect of the character from the start of the singing effect of the second character (Song B) until the first door is closed (see FIG. 121 (B)). If there is an effect that the second character closes out to the front side of the first door, the singing effect of the character continues and the next second part is output until the second door closes. (See FIG. 121C). If there is an effect that the second character closes out to the front side of the second door, the next third part is output until the singing effect of the character continues and the third door closes. (See FIG. 121D). If an effect of exiting to the front side of the third door where the second character is closed is made, the next fourth part is output until the singing effect of the character is continued and the fourth door is closed. (Refer to FIG. 121 (E)). Finally, if an effect is made to escape to the front side of the fourth door where the second character closes, the singing effect of the character continues and the final part (fifth part) is output (FIG. 121). (See (G)). That is, if the second character can be sequentially pulled out to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues and the continuation portion in the music B is output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121 (F), when the second character is concealed on the back side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music B is also interrupted. Thus, the case where the singing effect of the second character is interrupted due to the door effect and falls off corresponds to the fluctuation based on the fluctuation number 46 of “song reach B door nth off”.

  The “n-th” means that in the probability variation game effect mode, the door effect is continuously performed up to four times as described above, and what number (n-th) door effect determines the change. Indicates. The same applies to the following.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 121 (G), when the singing effect continues without being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music B corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. As a result, as shown in FIG. 121 (H), the jackpot variation is executed in which the left symbol row 1153a, the middle symbol row 1153b, and the right symbol row 1153c all have the same stop symbol, and the second character derives the jackpot. An effect of taking a predetermined pose is performed. Thereafter, the long winning game and the long winning effect mode are executed in the same manner as described above.

  Thus, the case where the singing effect of the music B by the second character is completed corresponds to the fluctuation based on the fluctuation number 51 of “per song run B completion length”. In addition, even if the singing effect of the music B is interrupted by the door effect, the singing effect of the second character may be revived and win. This corresponds to the fluctuations based on the fluctuation numbers 52 to 54 based on “single reach B door nth recovery length”. In addition, when the singing production of the music B is interrupted by the door production, but the small hit or short win is won, the variation numbers 47 to 48 “song reach B door nth short hit” and the variation numbers 49 to 50 This corresponds to the fluctuation based on “Song Reach B Door nth Small Hit”.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (song C) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (music C) is executed. That is, FIG. 122 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 122 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during the probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the third character (music C) (see FIGS. 122A to 122H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (see FIG. 122). 121 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 122 (A), after the long hit game is over, the process proceeds to the “probability change mode”, and when one of the change commands having the change numbers 55 to 63 is selected, the following third character ( The singing effect of the music piece C) is executed based on the variation command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B) to 122 (E), if the door effect is performed up to four times and if the third character can sequentially escape to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character is performed. The continuation of the music piece C is continuously output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 122 (F), when the third character is concealed on the back side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the song C is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), when the singing effect continues without the third character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire song C corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and the third character takes an effect of taking a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot, and thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 55 to 63) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the third character (song C) is also changed for each “change probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the third character's singing effect (see FIGS. 122 (B) to (G)) is different from the second character's singing effect (see FIGS. 121 (B) to (G)). And so on.

  Next, the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a mode displayed on the effect display device when the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) is executed. That is, FIG. 123 (A) is a diagram showing a mode for deriving a probability variation game, and FIGS. 123 (B) to (H) are diagrams showing a mode during the probability variation game.

  The flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) (see FIGS. 123A to 123H) is the flow of the “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B) (FIG. 121 (A) to (H)). As shown in FIG. 123 (A), after the long hit game is over, the process proceeds to the “probability change mode”, and when one of the change commands having the change numbers 64 to 72 is selected, the following fourth character ( The singing effect of the music D) is executed based on the change command. That is, as shown in FIGS. 123 (B) to 123 (E), a maximum of four door effects are performed, and if the fourth character can escape to the front side of the closing door, the singing effect of the character continues. Then, the continuation of the music D is output from the speakers 18 and 57. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), when the fourth character is concealed behind the closing door, the singing effect of the character ends and the output of the music D is also interrupted. Then, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), when the singing effect continues without the fourth character being concealed by any of the four doors, the entire music D corresponding to the character is output without interruption. That's right. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 123 (H), the jackpot variation is executed, and the fourth character performs an effect of taking a predetermined pose for deriving the jackpot, and thereafter, the long win game and the long win effect mode are performed. Executed.

  Therefore, each variation command (variation numbers 64 to 72) for the “probability change game effect mode” of the fourth character (music D) is also changed for each “probability game effect mode” of the second character (music B). This is the same as the command (variation numbers 46 to 54). However, the singing effect of the fourth character (see FIGS. 123B to 123G) is the singing effect of the second character (see FIGS. 121B to 121G) and the singing effect of the third character. (See FIGS. 122 (B) to (G)).

  Thus, in the “probability variation game effect mode” of the present embodiment, if the probability variation game is effected not only by the character singing effect and the door effect, but also if the character singing effect (that is, the output of the music) continues. Since the sense of expectation for winning improves as the game is performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Further, the first special is performed by the character singing effect and the door effect (that is, by the image effect in the effect display device 115 and the sound output by the speakers 18 and 57) without performing the reach effect by using a plurality of symbol rows as in the prior art. Reach production is performed to give the player a sense of expectation of winning the lottery by the symbol lottery means 700 or the second special symbol lottery means 710. Originally, the image effect in the effect display device 115 is performed in order to increase the reach form by a plurality of symbol sequences. However, as in the present embodiment, the image effect and the image effect can be performed without performing the reach effect by the plurality of symbol sequences. By performing the reach effect only by the sound output from the speakers 18 and 57, the player can listen to the singing by the character without paying attention to the change display of the symbol sequence, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, although this invention is described in said preferable embodiment, this invention is not restrict | limited only to it. Various embodiments are possible without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention.

  For example, in the above embodiment, the game on the first start port 390 (first start port) side and the second and third start ports 392, 394 (second start port) side only when in the short-time game state. The variation time is determined so that the variation time is shorter when the total value of the hold with the game is equal to or greater than a predetermined lower limit value. However, even when the probability changing function is also activated, the sum of the holding value of the game on the first start port 390 side and the game on the second and third start ports 392 and 394 is equal to or greater than a predetermined lower limit value. The variation time may be determined so that the time is shorter.

  In addition, after distinguishing the starting port into a first starting port corresponding to a disadvantaged game and a second starting port corresponding to an advantageous game, the above-mentioned one lottery probability is determined in advance. For the first start port and the second start port for which the determination about the jackpot is made, the expected value of the number of game media that can be given when the jackpot determination is made is increased or decreased (the expectation on the first start port side) The value may be reduced and disadvantageous, and the expected value on the second start side may be increased and advantageous). In this way, if a specific starting port (first starting port) is disadvantaged (the number of jackpot winning balls corresponding to a predetermined lottery probability is not paid out), as a gaming machine While adopting the above-mentioned main premise configuration (a configuration for determining a big hit with a predetermined lottery probability regardless of the start port), another start port (second start port) So that either of the disadvantaged game and the favored game can be realized selectively according to the starting port where the game medium is won. become. Originally, the gaming machine according to the invention of the present application is particularly effective when applied to a game in which such an advantageous and disadvantageous game is adopted. For example, when the game on the first start port side is disadvantaged and the game on the second start port side is advantageous, the game on the second start port side is digested first. In the game restrained state, it is important to maintain the number of games held on the second start port side so that the disadvantaged game on the first start port side is not performed. According to the above, the player can quickly cope with such gameability and can play the game without suffering a loss.

  The effect image display device in the above-described embodiment is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a gaming machine other than a pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine, a gaming machine that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. The invention can be applied. In consideration of the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the “game ball” in each of the above configurations may be used as a “game medium”.

  In other words, a pachinko machine is a game in which an input medium such as a game ball that is a medium that a player inserts into the game machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, center objects, display means, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entrance for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage opening, an arrival opening, etc., a rail for guiding the game ball from the launching device to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the entrance and according to the entrance mode of the game balls to a plurality of entrances.

  There are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as “digipachi”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (ie, game state) Detection means), lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the entrance state detection means, and special symbol display means for changing the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. Or “additional effect image display means for displaying a decorative symbol sequence composed of a plurality of decorative symbols and causing characters or the like to appear at a predetermined timing” , Which is generally represented by what is referred to as a “multi-function machine”, comprising a lottery means for performing lottery by distributing game balls in an accessory and lottery means for performing lottery by winning at the start opening. ”, Represented by what is generally called“ Alepatchi ”“ For example, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 games, and the game balls are placed in a plurality of entrances in one game. In accordance with this, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls” can be exemplified.

  On the other hand, with a pachislot machine, a medal that is a game medium is inserted, and after inserting the medal, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the operation of the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). It is a slot machine with a stop operation function that performs a substantial game of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the variation of the symbol row satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large amount of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are combined is a plurality of (for example, five) game balls that are used as one unit of input medium. ) Is variably displayed in accordance with the operation of), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the change in the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the combination of symbols at the time when the variation of the symbol sequence is stopped satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In this case, a special advantageous state advantageous to the player is generated.

  In addition, it seems that there is no gaming medium at first glance in a gaming machine that does not play a substantial game depending on the medium to be inserted, such as a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the game content played using a game ball or other appropriate article is included in the entire game content. Therefore, even such a gaming machine can be a target of a gaming machine in which a game is played using a gaming medium.

  In addition, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to a liquid crystal display device. It may be a display device such as an EL display device, a plasma display device, and a CRT. That is, as long as the first display mode, the third display mode, and the second display mode can be displayed, and any of these modes can be hidden, the mode is not limited.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment described above has the following configuration. In addition, the following structures are provided independently or in combination as appropriate.
(Technical thought 1)
A first starting port capable of accepting a game ball driven into the game area;
A second starting port having a movable piece operable between an open state and a closed state, and when the movable piece is in the closed state, it is more difficult to receive a game ball than the first starting port;
A jackpot determination means for performing a determination process for the jackpot with a predetermined winning probability;
When the game ball enters either the first start port or the second start port, the jackpot determination means performs a determination process for the jackpot, and the determination process determines a jackpot. A game control means for performing a special game in which a privilege is given to the player;
Display control means for performing a symbol variation on a predetermined display screen and performing a special symbol display indicating that the determination is made when the jackpot is determined,
The game control means determines a symbol used for the special symbol display by the display control means when performing the special game based on the jackpot determination, and the display control means is determined by the game control means. A gaming machine that performs the special symbol display using a symbol,
The game control means includes
When a game ball enters the first start port, the first start is made by waiting until the execution condition is satisfied based on the determination process for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port. When the game on the mouth side is put on hold and a game ball enters the second starting port, the execution condition is established for the determination process for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the second starting port Game holding means for holding the game on the second start port side by waiting until
In performing the special game based on the jackpot determination, a first suppression design that suggests that the game on the first start port side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the second start port side, and One of the second suppression symbols suggesting that the game on the second start port side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the first start port side is used for the special symbol display by the display control means. A symbol lottery means for determining a symbol;
As long as the game on the second start port side is put on hold when the first suppression symbol is determined by the symbol lottery means, the game on the first start port side and the second start port side First game suppression control means for controlling to a first game suppression state in which only the game on the second start port side of the game is executed,
As long as the game on the first start port side is put on hold when the second suppression symbol is determined by the symbol lottery means, the game on the first start port side and the second start port side Second game suppression control means for controlling to a second game suppression state in which only the game on the first start side of the game is executed,
The first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means after the first suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display, and after the second suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display Out of the second game suppression states controlled by the second game suppression control means, superior / inferior impression control capable of setting and changing the predetermined one winning probability to a higher probability only in the first game suppression state A gaming machine comprising means.

In the above configuration, as a symbol used for special symbol display that appears on a predetermined display screen,
-A first suppression pattern that suggests that the game on the first start side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the second start side, and-The game on the second start side is on the first start side Prepare a second suppression symbol that suggests that the game will be executed later. In executing the special game, either the first suppression symbol or the second suppression symbol is determined (symbol lottery means).

  In other words, the first and second control relating to the suspension and digestion of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is performed in accordance with the symbol thus determined (the symbol used for symbol display). The player can recognize ahead of time for the above-described reservation and digestion only by looking at the types of symbols used for symbol display. Thereby, even if the advance and the turn related to the above-mentioned hold digestion are changed frequently, the player can appropriately perform the game corresponding to the advance and the stop related to the stop digestion without being confused. . For example, when the game on the first start port side is disadvantaged and the game on the second start port side is advantageous, the game on the second start port side is digested first. In the game suppression state, it is important to maintain the number of games held on the second start port side so that the disadvantaged first start port side game is not performed. The player can quickly respond to such a game and can play the game without suffering a loss.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, the first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means after the first suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display, and the second suppression in the special symbol display. Of the second game suppression state controlled by the second game suppression control means after the symbol appears, the predetermined one winning probability is changed to a higher probability only in the first game suppression state. It was possible (superior impression control means).

  That is, in this case, only when the first start opening side game execution is suppressed and only the second start opening side game is controlled to be executed in the first game suppression state, the predetermined one is determined. A setting change to a higher probability of winning can be expected. In other words, when the game is controlled to the second game suppression state in which the game execution on the second start port side is suppressed and only the game on the first start port side can be executed, the predetermined one win is selected. Changing the setting to a higher probability cannot be expected. Therefore, while maintaining the above-described gameability in which the determination on the jackpot is performed with the predetermined one winning probability in both the game on the first start side and the game on the second start side, Give the impression that the game at the first starting side is disadvantaged by a low winning probability, and give the impression that the game at the second starting side is favored by a high winning probability Will be able to.

  The second game suppression control means (or the first game suppression control means) is triggered by the fact that the second suppression symbol (or first suppression symbol) is determined when the special game is executed. What is necessary is just to control to the said 2nd game suppression state (or 1st game suppression state), and does not necessarily control to the said 2nd game suppression state (or 1st game suppression state) immediately after completion | finish of a special game. May be. For example, when the second suppression symbol is determined at the time of execution of the special game, after the predetermined period has elapsed since the execution of the special game (for example, 100 lottery games have been consumed) You may make it control to 2 game suppression states.

(Technical thought 2)
The game control means includes
When the first game suppression control means controls the first game suppression state, the frequency at which the movable piece is operated between the open state and the closed state is increased to increase the frequency of the first start port side game. A second game continuation control means for controlling the game so that the game on the second start port side that is digested first is not interrupted, and the second game suppression state by the second game suppression control means The second start port is increased by increasing the frequency at which the movable piece is operated between the open state and the closed state for the first predetermined period after being controlled to the second game suppression state. The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, further comprising second game saving control means for performing control to enable execution of the game on the first start port side while saving the holding of the game on the side.

  In the above configuration, when the first game suppression control unit controls the first game suppression state, the first start is performed by increasing the frequency with which the movable piece is operated between the open state and the closed state. Control is performed so that the game can be held so that the game on the second start port side, which is digested before the game on the mouth side, is not interrupted (second game continuation control means). Therefore, in the first game restrained state, the player continuously executes only the game on the second start port side while avoiding the game on the first start port side, which has the impression of being disadvantaged. You will be able to play games.

  Moreover, in the said structure, the frequency which makes the said movable piece operate | move between an open state and a closed state only for the first predetermined period after being controlled to the said 2nd game suppression state by the said 2nd game suppression control means is raised. Thus, while holding the game hold on the second start port side, the control to enable execution of the game on the first start port side digested earlier is performed (second game saving control) means).

  That is, in the gaming machine described in the above technical idea 1, when the game is controlled to the second game suppression state, the game at the first start side (the game that is digested first) is performed as the main game. Will be. In this regard, in the above-described configuration, the first predetermined period after the control to the second game suppression state is made a saving period in which the game on the second start port side can be easily stored. In other words, in this case, when the second game restrained state is being controlled, even if all the suspension of the game at the first start side performed as the main game has been lost, The played game on the second starting port side is supplementarily performed. Therefore, the interruption of the game when being controlled to the second game suppression state can be suppressed by the reserved saving of the auxiliary game (game on the second start port side).

  Note that the game on the second start port side is only performed in an auxiliary manner with respect to the game on the first start port side in the second game suppression state, so that the second game suppression state is This function (a function of suppressing a game on the second start port side) is preferably maintained.

(Technical thought 3)
The game control means includes
Having a variation time determining means for determining a variation time required for symbol variation by the display control means;
The variation time determining means includes
When in the first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means, the sum of the suspension of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is less than a predetermined lower limit value The variation time is such that the variation time is shorter when the sum of the holding value of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is equal to or greater than a predetermined lower limit value. The first determination means for determining the first game, and the second game suppression control means controlled by the second game suppression control means, and the second game saving control means is in a period during which the control is performed. The game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side than when the sum of the holding value of the game on the start port side and the game on the second start port side is less than a predetermined lower limit value, The change is shorter when the sum of pending values is greater than or equal to the specified lower limit. A second determining means for determining the variation time so as to be a moving time; and the second game suppression state controlled by the second game suppression control means, and the control by the second game saving control means is performed. If you are in a period
When executing the game on the first start port side, the number of games held on the first start port side is less than the predetermined lower limit value than when the game hold number on the first start port side is less than a predetermined lower limit value. While determining the variation time so that the variation time is shorter when it is above the lower limit value,
The technical idea 2 includes third determination means for determining a variation time that is generally shorter than a variation time determined when the game on the second start port side is executed. Game machines.

  In the above-described configuration, when the first game restrained state is present, the above-described hold value of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side is less than a predetermined lower limit value. The variation time is determined so that the variation time is shorter when the sum of the hold of the game at the first start port and the game at the second start port is equal to or greater than a predetermined lower limit value ( First determining means). Similarly, even when the second game saving state is in a period in which the second game saving control means is in a period during which the game on the second start-up side can be easily stored, the same as the above. The variation time is determined so that the variation time is shorter when the sum of the holding value of the game at the one start opening side and the game at the second start opening side is equal to or more than a predetermined lower limit value (first operation). 2 determining means).

  As described above, the variation time required for the symbol variation is determined not only according to which game state (first game restrained state or second game restrained state) but also according to a more detailed game situation. In addition, the game progress can be made smoother and the above-mentioned game as the gaming machine can be achieved by determining based on the sum of the hold of the game on the first start port side and the game on the second start port side. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the property.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when the second game saving control means is in a period in which the control by the second game saving control means is not performed, the first start is performed when the game on the first start port side is executed. The above variation so that the variation time is shorter when the number of games held on the first start side is equal to or greater than the predetermined lower limit than when the number of games held on the mouth side is less than the predetermined lower limit. The time was decided. In addition, when the game on the second start port side is executed, a change time that is generally shorter than the change time determined when the game on the first start port side is executed is determined (third determining means). For this reason, in the same game state, the game can be established only by the game (holding) on the first starting port side as the main game.

  Note that “determining a variation time that is generally shorter than a variation time determined when the game on the first start opening side is executed” means that the average value of the variation time determined when the game on the first start opening side is executed ( It means that the variation time is determined so that the average value (expectation value) of the variation time determined when the game on the second start port side is executed is shorter than the expected value).

It is a perspective view which shows the state by which the main body frame was opened by the one side of the outer frame of a pachinko machine, and the front frame was opened by the one side of the main body frame. It is a front view which shows the whole front side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which isolate | separates the main body frame and game board of a pachinko machine, and shows from diagonally upper right front. It is a rear view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the whole rear side of a pachinko machine from upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the back cover body, various control boards, etc. from the perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state by which various members were assembled | attached to the main body frame of the pachinko machine from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows a main-body frame simple substance from diagonally upper right back. It is a perspective view which shows the game board with which various control board boxes were mounted | worn from lower right back. It is an enlarged front view showing the configuration of a game board having a game area. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board for every main component and shows from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a game board for every main component and shows from diagonally back. It is a perspective view which shows a game board from diagonally forward, Comprising: It is a perspective view which enabled visual recognition of the 1st warp and the 2nd warp by removing a decoration cover. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the periphery of a 1st warp and a 2nd warp. It is the figure which showed the positional relationship of a light transmissive member, a 1st warp, and a 2nd warp. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of the light transmissive member of the position different from FIG. FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view including a light transmissive member according to FIG. 17. It is a perspective view shown from the front in the state where the back unit and the effect display device were assembled. It is a perspective view which shows FIG. 19 from back. It is a perspective view which shows a back unit from back. It is a rear view of an effect display device. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a back unit, an effect display apparatus, etc., and shows from the front. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board containing the effect for an effect. It is a perspective view which shows the back unit attached to the back of a game board from the front upper front. It is a front view of a game board. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a back unit for every main member and shows from the front. It is an irregular front view shown from the front of a figure in the state which provided the distribution mechanism in the production | presentation accessory. It is a rear view shown in the state provided with the distribution mechanism in the effect | action thing. It is a top view in FIG. It is a bottom view in FIG. It is a perspective view shown from the front in the state provided with the distribution mechanism in the effect | action thing. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the effect | action tool for every main structure, and shows from the front. It is a perspective view which shows an accessory rotating body. It is an anomalous front view which shows an accessory rotary body as a figure front. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the figure side of the accessory rotating body. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the decoration member side of an accessory rotary body. It is a figure which shows the rotational drive mechanism of the 1st production pole in an accessory rotary body. It is BB sectional drawing in FIG. It is CC sectional drawing in FIG. It is DD sectional drawing in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the discharge path | route of the game ball in the effect | action thing for a production. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st opening / closing apparatus from the left front. It is a perspective view which shows a 1st opening / closing apparatus from the right front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a 1st switchgear. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st opening-and-closing device, the accessory guideway, the distribution mechanism, and the production | presentation accessory from upper left. It is a top view of an accessory guide path, a distribution mechanism, and a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows the aspect by which a game ball is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a figure which shows the aspect by which the game ball following FIG. 48 is distributed by the distribution mechanism. It is a figure which shows the aspect by which the game ball following FIG. 49 is distributed by the distribution mechanism. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a main substrate. FIG. 2 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration, mainly showing a configuration around a peripheral substrate. It is a functional block diagram which shows roughly the functional structure of the peripheral control board in a main board | substrate and a peripheral board | substrate. (A) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of a production | presentation accessory, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production eaves inclines downward toward the 1st performance exit. (B) It is a front view which shows the internal structure of the accessory container of the effect | action thing, Comprising: It is a figure which shows that the 1st production | generation effect | action is inclined downward toward the 2nd production effect | guidance | derivation guidance port. It is the figure which looked at the production display device from the front. It is the figure which looked at the production display device from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure of the periphery control board in a periphery board | substrate. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a figure which shows the effect in a hold display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main system process which CPU mounted in the main control board of a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory | storage area | region concerned with a reservation order. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd starting opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 1st special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the variation pattern selected in the pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol length. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time variation pattern table setting process per 2nd special symbol length. It is a list figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the 2nd special symbol length per hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the fluctuation pattern selected in the short hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process and the small hit hour fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process at the time of the 1st special symbol removal. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd special symbol change time fluctuation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows the variation pattern selected when it is judged that it is reach in the 2nd special symbol deviation variation pattern table setting process. It is a table | surface figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selected when it is not judged as reach in the 1st special symbol deviation time fluctuation pattern table setting process and the 2nd special symbol loss time fluctuation pattern table setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory big hit control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special electric accessory small hit control process. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol when deriving the lottery result by the 1st special symbol lottery means to an effect display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of a decoration symbol in the case of deriving the lottery result by the 2nd special symbol lottery means to an effect display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation aspect of the decoration symbol in the case of deriving the said lottery result to an effect display apparatus, when the lottery result by a special symbol lottery means is a short hit or a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 1st, 2nd, 3rd start opening effective winning memory | storage process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a 2nd and 3rd start opening effective winning effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination in an ornamental symbol variation start process, and an A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit hour A symbol use number setting process in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time A symbol usage number setting process per 2R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the hour A symbol usage number setting process per 15R in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the A symbol consumption process in a fluctuation pattern determination and A mode setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance A symbol consumption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the setting number of A symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (consumption number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining the use number (consumption number) of A symbol in A symbol consumption process at the time of a chance. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special effect lottery process in a decoration design change start process. It is a figure which shows an example of the table for determining whether an effect point storage process is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to the 2nd and 3rd starting opening valid winning flag being ON. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage display mode of the production | presentation point P performed according to having won the production | presentation point P storage lottery. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "normal special aspect". It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 3rd character (musical piece C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "intro special aspect" of the 4th character (musical piece D). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed with an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "chance eyes special aspect". It is a front view of the effect display device and the effect item before winning the effect opening / closing device. It is a front view of the effect display device after winning the effect opening / closing device and the effect accessory. It is a front view of the production | presentation display apparatus at the time of mode lottery production | presentation, and the effect | action thing for production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a mode transfer destination lottery table. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of a "long hit effect aspect." It is a front view of the production | presentation display apparatus at the time lottery production effect after long hit (community drawing lottery production) and the production | presentation accessory. It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 2nd character (music B). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability game effect aspect" of the 3rd character (music C). It is a figure which shows the aspect displayed on an effect display apparatus at the time of execution of the "probability change game effect aspect" of the 4th character (music D).

Explanation of symbols

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Front frame 5 Game board 32 Operation handle 82 Normal symbol indicator 84 First special symbol indicator 86 Second special symbol indicator 88 First special symbol hold indicator 90 Second special symbol Hold indicator 92 Normal symbol hold indicator 115 Production display device 116 Display device control board 119 Sub control board 131 Main control board 194 Launcher unit 195 Power supply board 197 Discharge control board 199 Power relay terminal board 300 Center accessory 390 First start Port 392 Second start port 394 Third start port 396 A pair of movable pieces 398 Production opening / closing device 400 Big hit game opening / closing device 402 Passing gate 404 General winning port 406 Ball discharge port 600 Main board 616 Launch control board 618 External terminal board 624 Panel relay terminal board 630 Gate sensor 632 General prize opening sensor 636 Normal design Special design display board 644 First start sensor 646 Second start sensor 648 Third start sensor 660 Peripheral board 662 Peripheral control board 674 Frame decoration relay terminal board 1150 Reservation display area 1153 Decoration pattern 1154 Production point display area

Claims (1)

A first starting port capable of accepting a game ball driven into the game area;
A second starting port having a movable piece operable between an open state and a closed state, and when the movable piece is in the closed state, it is more difficult to receive a game ball than the first starting port;
A jackpot determination means for performing a determination process for the jackpot with a predetermined winning probability;
When the game ball enters either the first start port or the second start port, the jackpot determination means performs a determination process for the jackpot, and the determination process determines a jackpot. A game control means for performing a special game in which a privilege is given to the player;
Display control means for performing a symbol variation on a predetermined display screen and performing a special symbol display indicating that the determination is made when the jackpot is determined,
The game control means determines a symbol used for the special symbol display by the display control means when performing the special game based on the jackpot determination, and the display control means is determined by the game control means. A gaming machine that performs the special symbol display using a symbol,
The game control means includes
When a game ball enters the first start port, the first start is made by waiting until the execution condition is satisfied based on the determination process for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the first start port. When the game on the mouth side is put on hold and a game ball enters the second starting port, the execution condition is established for the determination process for the jackpot based on the game ball entering the second starting port Game holding means for holding the game on the second start port side by waiting until
In performing the special game based on the jackpot determination, a first suppression design that suggests that the game on the first start port side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the second start port side, and One of the second suppression symbols suggesting that the game on the second start port side will be executed as a post-rotation of the game on the first start port side is used for the special symbol display by the display control means. A symbol lottery means for determining a symbol;
As long as the game on the second start port side is put on hold when the first suppression symbol is determined by the symbol lottery means, the game on the first start port side and the second start port side First game suppression control means for controlling to a first game suppression state in which only the game on the second start port side of the game is executed,
As long as the game on the first start port side is put on hold when the second suppression symbol is determined by the symbol lottery means, the game on the first start port side and the second start port side Second game suppression control means for controlling to a second game suppression state in which only the game on the first start side of the game is executed,
The first game suppression state controlled by the first game suppression control means after the first suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display, and after the second suppression symbol appears in the special symbol display Out of the second game suppression states controlled by the second game suppression control means, superior / inferior impression control capable of setting and changing the predetermined one winning probability to a higher probability only in the first game suppression state A gaming machine comprising means.